Home

Model 1001MC NetLink™ SNMP Management Card Operations Guide

1. 86 Set Default Configurdblofi cutre ee Pr ERI aida 86 Slot Configuration page MIB variables description eerte nennen ener 86 Card Address msi tl 2 te tei tte a mte ide eie ie etienne Eee irt 86 Local Model Code localModelGode 5 2 2 2 6 repetit it rrt cassvetawesececesiueesdvcceesoudeass seg susdecd Ea aiaeei 86 View Rack X hyperlink 2 es oca rei deter etr tete aid 86 Card Identification InfOrmiatiORi A oui stude esis He desi hee 86 Loal Use rid docaltIserl isa 86 Remote User Id remoteUserID iii E E EE E Ea 86 Local Circu 1D local Cron D Vii ta 86 Remote Circuit ID remote Circuit 3 5 52 8 2 e irre E ii dali 87 Alanna Information nta a 87 Clear Slot Alarmas resetStatis dedicada 87 Hardware Reset resetStabus 2 2 00 cette e Fete Poe beet bapti eo voee pvo ebd ee bee eeu A leue dva o 87 Card Lost Indication eardiostlnd ication ta Ee rt e ode eee ree e n rede tennant 87 Line Down Indication lineDownIndication eese nanna ontant nnns sette sea ag 87 Using the Download page to upgrade 1094ARC software eese nter nennen 87 68 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management Introduction This chapter describes managing a Model 1094ARC NetLink HDSL modem using the Model 1001MC NetLink N MS internal HTTP HTML web engine and a standard web browser This chapter is meant to be used in addition to the manual that came with your unit
2. Record Information Hard Reset 2 Use the Apply System Configuration pop up menu see figure 135 to select the template you want to apply 3 Click the Apply Configuration button The template has been applied System Config 273 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in one Model 1001 rack Do the following to apply global configuration to all Model 1095RC rack cards installed in one Model 1001 rack l Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page see figure 137 Figure 136 on page 273 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the sys tem Patton Electronics HomePage System Level Information HOME a x t FAN About 1001MC a am Configure Cards va System Overview E System Info Apply System Configuration e iere Apply System Test Mode A SNMP Total Slots Available X 15 System Config Total Cards Installed 5 G Help Power Supplies Installed 1 Total System Wamines 0 Total System Errors 0 O Update gt Rack 1 Top Level j Rack 1 Enable enabled 1 J Submit View Rack 1 Address Range S S 1 15 Total Slots Available 15 Total Cards Installed 5 Power Supplies Installed 1 Total Errors 0 Total Warnings q y YT 0
3. Daisy chain connection to Model 1001CC Each daisy chained rack uses a single Model 1001CC for management Figure 4 Network management through a network using a 10Base T connection to Model 1001MC 14 Model 1001MC management overview Chapter 2 Hardware installation Chapter contents Muscle CUT 17 Before you inetd ce eee ERROR OR EC OUN IR AERE E E OE E EE 17 A contents ecd eM EE M Term M Um e Rr Mee 17 Irsrallingssbe Model OO NI Giinta chewmackiclasgis peer ceu T tees oe tine TTE Ir 18 EN a ena rea e a E EUIS ATTORE ATE 19 Hardware setup fora Modell HE TTT 19 Configure tame THT 19 Set the HUE E L T 20 Ie Hn e T 20 IS lela e l 20 Hardware setup for a Tag lE 22 Contiourimestnamie ais 22 Set che OD A AR svsrom ad feas eo cere te eie ed TETTE IIT TTE TEES 22 Polline overview mee te Uere ce TIT UTEM T eT iu E cere A 22 a en eet n e TUE T NETTE AE TEE ETE TERRE S po ETardwaresetupuor oi 24 Configure frame round ceste R T Ie 24 Seti the LOIRE system onerosa 24 INST O UI UE 24 Pl o o 24 Hardware setupifora Modell DIR ovino UM UON 26 Configuring frame TT 26 e 25 Pollin repeat eU Mer eU MEME 27 Polling mack lleandidatsyzchaimed TaS sare a A E A e 27 Hard waresctupior a Model 2707 RG Se aa a A a E E A UE TTA DTE 28 SORT as 28 Hardware setup fora aS IIE 29 A ia 29 ETardwaresetuputoraviodel asis 29 Conneurine T TEOG 29 Hardware setupifora Modelo 088 RC cere e ETSI RESTITIT METER PRISE NEAR TRITT SEINS 29
4. Figure 28 Modem Information page for the Model 1094ARC c ddress Line Status Warnings Errors Local User Id Local ModelCode Remote User Id Remote ModelCode Local Circuit Remote 0 0 0 0 ips Tet Model 1000MC None None None None 1 startup l D 0 Local modell094ARC D Remote modell094A 1 Tech Bench 2 startup 1 0 0 Local 1nodellDP4ARCQ gt Remote tundel 109442 Starting from the HOME page to access the Modem Information page for the 1094ARC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 Figure 29 on page 71 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Modem Information page see Displaying the Slot Configuration page on page 76 Configuration and management 70 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management View Rack 1 Cad Slot ar 0 K ibd Configuration Configure System Level sn Cards Information Cow Rak 3 mation Rack X System 1 Modem FA w Mode Configuration View Rack 8 System Log Modi Record Information SNMP MIB System Log RAM Hard Reset System Log Flash Figure 29 Web page navigation to Modem Information page E is He 16 E CAJA Login HOME System Log Modify Configuration Next Configuration Configuration and management 71 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Displaying the Model 1094 Configuration Slot page The Model 1094 Configuratio
5. Figure 80 Model 2701RC Global Configuration page 2 Change the parameters requiring modification see figure 80 When you have finished changing the con figuration click on the Submit button to save the changes Refer to section Applying a template on page 164 to activate the template Deleting a template Do the following to delete a template Note When a template configuration is deleted it cannot be recovered 1 Select a template from the Delete Configuration pop up menu see figure 79 on page 163 2 Click the Delete Configuration button Applying a template This section describes how to apply a global configuration to all Model 2701RC rack cards Model 2701RC cards which will not be configured to the selected Global Configuration are Those installed in a Model 1001 rack that has the entire rack set to be protected 1 Those that are individually set to protected 1 mode Instructions for protecting either an entire rack or individual 2701RC cards are given earlier in this chapter Creating and modifying global configuration templates 164 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management The template can be applied to All 2701 RC NTUs in ALL Model 1001 racks AIL 2701 RC NTUs in just ONE Model 1001 rack To configure all Model 2701RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks Complete the following steps l Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Leve
6. LED Color Function Description Power Green Power status On Power is ON Off Power is OFF TD LEDs LI Green Ethernet Twisted On Connected to active LAN RD LEDs pair link indication Off Not connected to active LAN TD Yellow Ethernet Transmit Yellow Idle condition PPP LED Green data from 1001MC Green Toggles yellow green Fault LED to LAN with activity RD Yellow Ethernet Receive Yellow Idle condition Green data at 1001MC Green Toggles yellow green from LAN with activity Poll Yellow Heartbeat Toggles when packet TX is on the indicator backplane bus Fault Red Fault condition On Signals hardware fault Off No hardware fault 277 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 11 Troubleshooting and maintenance Table 16 Symptoms and remedies Problem Corrective Action Verify that power is being supplied to the Model 1001MC Power LED green is not lit Verify that at least one chassis power supply module is installed in the 1001 rack chassis and functioning normally Replace the 1001MC see section Replacing the Model 1001 MC on page 284 Fault LED red is lit The 1001MC has detected a hardware fault do the following TBD LI LED green is not lit A valid Ethernet link has not been detected do the following TBD Troubleshooting network malfunctions Using the Model 1001MC to troubleshoot a network problem generally involves the following steps 1 Receiving noti
7. NetLink NMS description Specifically designed for use in the Patton NetLink system when the NetLink HDSL is coupled with the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS and the Patton Model 1001 rack system the modem is fully SNMP manageable SNMP management can be performed on both the local and remote units using a standard SNMP network man agement station NMS or by using a standard web browser and the Model 1001MC s built in web server You can view and change configuration variables view statistical variables and view error and warning indications Configuration and management This section describes the configuration and management of your NetLink HDSL modems using a Model 1001MC NetLink N MS with built in HTTP HTML web server If you plan to manage your units using a standard network management station you can download the Patton Enterprise MIBs either through the SNMP web page on the Model 1001MC or obtain them from the Patton web site at www patton com The following pages are used to configure and manage the Model 1094ARC Modem Information page This page displays a list of the cards that are installed in your system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems see section Displaying the Modem Informa tion page on page 70 Model 1094 Configuration Slot page This page along with the Model 1094 Configuration Next Config uration page enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 1094A and
8. Figure 93 Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page for the 3088RC click on the following links Home menu gt Configure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number gt model3088RC xxx x in the Local Model Code column for the 3088RC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 93 the 3088RC was installed in slot 4 Figure 94 on page 194 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 193 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management System Level Information Modem Infor mation Rack X Modem Configuration System Log ail odi System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 94 Web page navigation to Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page Information Hard Reset Making configuration changes to your 3088RC NetLink NTU Do use the following to make configuration changes to your NetLink NTU Note You must be logged in as superuser to perform the following procedure 1 With the Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page displayed change the Input Mode see figure 93 to superVisoryMode The Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear 2 Click on the Modify Configuration hyperlink to display the Model 3088RC Configuration page 3 Make your configuration changes or select the Set Default Configuration button Select the Submit Query button to pl
9. internal receiveRecover 0 B receiveRecover 2 Tx Data Sample Point TM from DTE Gisabieac Framing Mode Figure 133 Model 1095 Global Configuration page 269 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference 2 Use the Local DTE Rate pop up menu to select local DTE rate You have the following choices rate64k 3 rate640k 12 rate1280k 22 rate1856k 32 ratel28k 4 rate704k 13 rate1344k 23 rate1920k 33 ratel92k 5 rate768k 14 ratel408k 24 rate1984k 34 rate256k 6 rate832k 15 ratel472k 25 rate2048k 35 rate320k 7 rate896k 16 rate1536k 26 rate2112k 36 rate384k 8 rate960k 17 ratel600k 28 rate2176k 37 rate448k 9 ratel024k 18 ratel664k 29 rate2240k 38 rate5 12k 10 ratel088k 19 ratel728k 30 rate2304k 39 rate576k 11 ratel216k 21 rate1792k 31 3 Use the Local Clock Mode Local Remote pop up menu to select the clock mode You have the following choices internal receiveRecover 0 external receiveRecover 1 receiveRecover internal 2 receiveRecover external 3 external external 4 4 Use the Local Tx Data Sample Point pop up menu to select the local transmit data sample point You have the following choices normal 0 inverted 1 5 Use the Remote Tx Data Sample Point pop up menu to select the
10. 3 Use the Local Clock Mode Local Remote pop up menu to select the clock mode You have the following choices internal receiveRecover 0 external receiveRecover 1 receiveRecover internal 2 receiveRecover external 3 external external 4 4 Use the Local Tx Data Sample Point pop up menu to select the local transmit data sample point You have the following choices normal 0 inverted 1 5 Use the Remote Tx Data Sample Point pop up menu to select the remote transmit data sample point You have the following choices normal 0 inverted 1 6 Configure the Local TM from DTE pop up menu using the following choices disabled 0 enabled 1 7 Configure the Remote TM from DTE pop up menu using the following choices disabled 0 enabled 1 8 Configure the Local Framing Mode pop up menu using the following choices slotted 0 Creating and modifying global configuration templates 120 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management normal 3 9 Configure the Remote Framing Mode pop up menu using the following choices slotted 0 normal 3 10 When you have finished setting the configuration click on the Submit button to save the changes Note Ifyou receive an invalid configuration error after creating a configura tion it is resulting from an illegal combination of variables Refer to sec tion Illegal configuration messages on page 118 for mo
11. Model1095RC 2 3 90 Download 1095RC Software Model 1094ARC 2 1 1 1095RC Key 2 1 0 1001MC CONFIGURATION MENL Figure 36 Download page Configuration and management 77 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management Starting from the HOME page to access the Download page for the 1094ARC click on the Download link Figure 37 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Cards System Information System Level Information gt View Rack 8 System Log System Log Download SNMP MIB Record Information RAM System Log Flash Figure 37 Web page navigation to Download page For more information about items on the Slot Configuration page see Using the Download page to upgrade 1094ARC software on page 87 Modem Information page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Modem Information page Slots Available totalConfigSlots Displays the number of configurable slots available in the rack Modems Installed rackXCardsInstalled Displays the number of modem cards installed in the rack that the system has found Number of Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies This is where you specify the number of power supplies installed in the rack this value determines the addressing range for the rack In the case of a redundant power supply system you should set this variable to 2 t
12. 72 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management System Level Information Modem Infor mation Rack X Modem Configuration System Log ail odi System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 31 Web page navigation to Model 1094 Configuration Slot page Information Hard Reset Making configuration changes to your 1094ARC NetLink modem Do use the following to make configuration changes to your NetLink modem Note You must be logged in as superuser to perform the following procedure 1 With the Model 1094 Configuration Slot page displayed change the Input Mode see figure 30 to super VisoryMode The Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear 2 Click on the Modify Configuration hyperlink to display the Model 1094A Next Configuration page 3 Make your configuration changes or select the Set Default Configuration button Select the Submit Query button to place the changes into the 1001MC temporary memory If you decide that you do not want your changes implemented you can select the Clear Changes button Select the Back hyperlink to return to the Model 1094 Configuration Slot page 6 Change the Input Mode back to onLine and select the Submit Query button When the unit returns to the online state the 1094A will begin implementing the configuration changes Note The variables that you changed are now highlighted in yellow After the 1094A processes the new information t
13. Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks Do the following to apply global configuration to all Model 1095RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks l Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page see figure 135 Figure 136 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Patton Electronics HomePage System Level Information HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Overview System Info Apply System Configuration DownLoad Apply System Test Mode System Log SNMP Total Slots Available K 15 System Config Total Cards Installed Help Power Supplies Installed Total System Warnings Oo oO u Total System Errors Clear All System Alarms Update e e zZ a E x vd Z V io e Rack 1 Top Level Rack 1 Enable View Rack 1 Address Range S S E 15 Total Slots Available 15 AS m Figure 135 System Level Information page System Config 272 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference 1001MC Configure Cards Information System Log System Log RAM SNMP MIB System Log Flash Model 1095 Config Global Configuration Figure 136 Web page navigation to System Level Information page System Level Information System Log Modi
14. Connect the RS 232 V 24 port of the terminal to the rear panel RS 232 configuration port of the 1001MC through a null modem The RS 232 port is configured as data terminal equipment DTE Apply power to the rack system The Model 1001MC will begin a series of diagnostic tests to exercise the internal sub systems in the unit You must halt the power up sequence in order to enter a new IP address mask and default gateway into the box Press the b key three times when you see the following DRAM Configure Complete FLASH Configure Complete Boot Version May 11 1999 14 44 24 Validating operation code Valid operational code Hit b three times to stop operational boot Introduction 37 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 3 Getting started 5 After pressing the key three times the system will display the following Timer Started May 11 1999 14 44 24 Timer installed Clock installed Trying the console Ethernet Hardware Address 00 a0 ba 00 01 71 Current IP settings IP 192 168 200 1 Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 209 49 110 1 Change IP settings y n TypeY to change the IP address You will be prompted to enter a new IP address mask and default gate way as follows Current IP settings IP 209 49 110 188 Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 209 49 110 1 Change IP settings y n y User Set IP 209 49 110 188 User Set Mask 255 255 255 0 User Set Gateway 209 49 110 1 Settings to save IP 209 49 110 188 Mask 255
15. Error e Warning None Note Une Down Indication must be set to error 2 line up and line down SNMP trap messages to be sent Slot Configuration page MIB variables description 66 Chapter 5 Model 1094ARC management Chapter contents T RI 69 NM descriptione erc 69 A wee hee et E ET ee TUNE 69 Di e e DEEST TOUT 70 Displaying the Model LOC oasis 72 Making configuration changes to your JO94ARC Netlink modem eee J Displaying the Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page eene 74 Mr AEA TA AOE AE ec cem m a EUR 76 IES the Download page oe moea a e M CE 77 Modem Information page MIB variables description eco eMe E EU 78 As oo CT 78 Modemsilinstalledittacke lt arnds installed teense cee cessor E ae ener ee eee 78 NumberotPower Supplies rackoiPowerSupplics meester metta a rrr ree 78 Rack Protection Mio T tee eee eee E eng ao ee uO ao 78 STI aE 79 PowerSupply IS eteteesee CEU NUR UIT UI UI MEN eU Ue e eb euer yo Bower LE er rr err Mee putes rune e mange Te 79 caracol dad O ce a ae E A ee 79 IRL TREES aT T 7 Rr T 79 Nery cn 2 aorta EE 80 GT 0 GEET OREA 80 Lal A CMM E 80 MAMo O oe dr REM 80 Remote Usd e R EE ET EA EE 80 Remote Model Gode emoe He Le Ta H 80 Protected a a se T R 81 EAE ONNE 2 PUE HET 81 Remote rcu O TS O ORIENTE 81 G T DI PECOT AT EAE T TE E A A eet cre N E AE A E E sree 81 Model 1094 Configuration Slot page Taa TEORI STO 81 Model 1094A Model 1094Conheuraton Slot amiss loti n aa eee
16. Rack 1 Top Level Rack 1 Enable View Rack 1 Address Range S S E 15 Total Slots Available 15 R Ex Figure 63 System Level Information page Creating and modifying global configuration templates 126 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management 1001MC Configure Cards Information System Log System Log RAM SNMP MIB System Log Flash System Model 1095 Config Global Configuration Figure 64 Web page navigation to System Level Information page System Level Information System Log Modi Record Information Hard Reset 2 Use the Apply System Configuration pop up menu see figure 63 to select the template you want to apply 3 Click the Apply Configuration button The template has been applied Creating and modifying global configuration templates 127 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in one Model 1001 rack Do the following to apply global configuration to all Model 1095RC rack cards installed in one Model 1001 rack l Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page see figure 65 Figure 64 on page 127 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Patton Electronics HomePage System Level In
17. Table 5 shows the bit setting to configure the address Table 6 shows examples of address settings Table 5 Bit setting to configure the address S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 S1 4 Upper Lower Nibble S1 5 GES S1 7 S1 8 0 ON ON ON ON 1 ON ON ON OFF 2 ON ON OFF ON 3 ON ON OFF OFF 4 ON OFF ON ON 5 ON OFF ON OFF 6 ON OFF OFF ON 7 ON OFF OFF ON 8 OFF ON ON ON 9 OFF ON ON OFF A OFF ON OFF ON B OFF ON OFF OFF C OFF OFF ON ON D OFF OFF ON OFF E OFF OFF OFF ON F OFF OFF OFF OFF Installing NetLink modem cards 23 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Table 6 Examples of address settings Address in Hex Dec 0x01 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 0x02 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON Ox10 16 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OxB5 181 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF Hardware setup for a Model 1095RC The following must be done to configure your Model 1095RC hardware for use with the Model 1001MC net work management station Connect frame ground to signal ground see section Configuring frame ground Set the system address see section Setting the 1094ARC system address When you are finished install the Model 1095RC front card and rear I O card using the installation proce dures in the manual that came with the modem Configuring frame ground The Model 1001MC uses an internal bus to communicate with the NetLink modems installed i
18. The power supply is working normally e down 1 If the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Clear Rack X Alarms clearAlarms Click on this button to clear alarms for the current rack Note The System Log will still display the errors after the Clear Rack X Alarms button is clicked Card Address nmsSlotID Defines the address of the card The Model 1001MC will poll the cards using the addresses listed in the Card Address column If a modem is found with the same address it will be displayed in that row The address of the card is setup using the DIP switches on the card For more information about setting the address of a card please refer to the appropriate NMS version of the manual for the specific NetLink modem The address is also a hyperlink to the Slot Configuration page see section Slot Configuration on page 243 for more informa tion This page can be used to set slot specific information about the card Modem Information Rack X 240 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Line Status The line status column on each View Rack page shows the current line status of each card Keep in mind that the more cards the 1001MC is managing the longer it will take for the line status field to update Displays the status of the line The following
19. superuser The superuser password level lets you view statistics and make configuration changes to the sys tem To log in as a superuser type the word superuser all lower case as the username and password monitor The monitor level password enables you to view statistics but it will not let you make any config uration changes To log into the system at the monitor level type monitor all lower case for the username and password Note The superuser and monitor passwords are set in the unit as the default passwords For proper security make sure that during your initial setup you change the passwords see section System Informa tion on page 246 for information on how to change passwords Introduction to the internal HTTP HTML management pages 41 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 3 Getting started HTTP HTML and SNMP object format In this document we shall describe the variables found on each of the internal HTTP HTML pages This description will include brief definitions of the Patton Enterprise MIB or SNMP MIB II object identifiers wherever applicable The format of the variables will resemble figure 17 HTTP variable Patton Enterprise MIB or Product SNMP MIB Object Total Active Calls diActive Figure 17 HTTP HTML and SNMP object format Saving HTTP HTML object changes Sometimes you will need to save changes that you have made in the HTTP HTML pages Do the following to make changes to read write variables l
20. 10 0 None none 0 X None none 0 Figure 142 Modem Information Rack page displaying errors Troubleshooting network malfunctions 281 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 11 Troubleshooting and maintenance Using the System Log to check for network problems The System Log see figure 143 is a messaging system that stores information about the system as it is running Do the following to display the System Log Non Volatile Memory page for help in troubleshooting a problem 1 From the HOME page click on the System Log then Non Volatile Memory links to display the System Log Non Volatile Memory page see figure 143 Patton Electronics Home Page SYSTEM LOG Non Volatile Memory HOME System Up Time 0 days 0 hrs 27 min 46 sec About 1001MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad Time Message System Log MP 0 days 0 hrs 0 min3 sec box boxmib c Enable Rack 1 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 7 sec bor rack cC ard Found Address 11 0 days 0 hrs 2 min 13 sec box rack c Card Found Address 01 0 days 0 hrs 2 min 30 sec box rack c Card Found Address 02 box boxmib c Error Power Supply 1 Down box boxmib c Error No Cards Enabled 0 days 0 hrs 3 min 13 sec box rack c Card Found Address 08 0 days 0 hrs 3 min 52 sec box rack c Card Found Address 09 0 days 0 hrs 38 min 24 sec funcidslfuncidsl c Line Up Address 11 0 days 0 hrs 38 min 52 sec funcidslfuncidsl c Line Down Address 11 System Config Help Zz 5 e z
21. Apply Rack Configuration Apply Test Mode Rack Protection Mode Clear Alarms Figure 137 System Level Information page 2 Locate the rack section of the System Level Information page that you will configure in figure 137 Rack 1 Top Level is being modified 3 Use the Apply Rack Configuration pop up menu see figure 137 to select the template you want to apply 4 Click the Apply Configuration button The template has been applied System Config 274 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Help 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Support e The Help Menu page see figure 138 provides hyperlinks to help pages located within the 1001MC Applica tions notes are also available on the Model 1001MC CD ROM or by contacting Patton Electronics Technical Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Log SNMP System Config Help e e Zz A w lt x O m rad A L V Patton Electronics Help Menu The following table provides hyperlinks to help pages located within the 1001MC Applications notes are also available on the Model 1001MC CD ROM or by contactiig Patton Electronics Technical Support configuration info This page gives information about setting the configuration for the cards in your system This page gives help l hints to aid in the proper configuration of your system rack help This page gives information about the
22. Delete Model 2701RC 2707 RC Configuration Example 0 Delete Configuration Figure 79 Global Configuration Menu page Do the following to modify a template l Select a template from the Modify Configuration pop up menu see figure 79 then click the Modify Configuration button Creating and modifying global configuration templates 163 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management etu Model 2701RC Global Configuration HOME About 1001MC Import Export Modify Configuration Name Example Submit Query Configure Cards System Info Channel Assignment DownLoad System L ic oe 1 C Channel 1 Channel 2 Factive d y Channel 3 active 0 oa Channel 4 ecive E Channel 5 fever y Channel 6 active y Help Channel active El Channel 8 scive Z Channels active 0 El Channel 10 acive E Channel 11 active 0 E Channel 12 ectve el Channel 13 acive 0 X Chanel 14 acive o E Channel 15 actve 0 Channel 16 ecive Channel 17 acive O Z Chanel 18 active E Channel 19 active Z Channel 20 ecive 3 Channel 21 active 0 E Channel 22 actve Z Channel 23 active Channel 24 ecivet 2 Channel 25 active Chamel 26 actve Channel 27 active 2 Channel 28 active Z Channe 29 inactive 1 Channel 30 active 2 Channel 31 acive Z Channel 32 inactive 1
23. Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation 3 Slide the front rack card into the front chassis slot 14 see figure 6 until it meets the rear card receptacle When that happens push the front card gently but firmly into the card edge receptacle of the rear card it should click into place Slot Slot2 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 Slot7 Slot8 Slot9 Slot 10 Slot11 Slot12 Slot13 Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 pip poy wapoy pub poy wapoy pap poy wapoy pip poy wapoy 10 pan poy uopoly Ajddns samod junpunpa 10 pid poy wapoy jound yung Ajddns 190g o e z A E e A Ln a E E e pn poy wepow pip poy wapoy pan poy wapoy pap poy wapoy pn poy wapo pan poy wapoy pan poy wapo pan poy wapo pan poy wapoy jddns samod ubpunpa Figure 6 Rack chassis slot layout front view Secure the front rack card using the captive fasteners Installing NetLink modem cards This section contains hardware installation information that affects the following NetLink modems Model 1092ARC see section Hardware setup for a Model 1092ARC Model 1094ARC see section Hardware setup for a Model 1094ARC on page 22 Model 1095RC see section Hardware setup for a Model 1095RC on page 24 Model 2701RC see section Hardware setup for a Model 2701 RC on page 26 e Model 2707RC see section Hardware setup for a Mode
24. Modify Configuration Name test Valid Configuration Local Remote DTE Rate rate64k 3 Clock Mode Local Remote internal receiveRecover 0 receiveRecover 2 Tx Data Sample Point normaro TM from DTE Gisabieac Framing Mode 265 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference 2 Use the Local DTE Rate pop up menu to select local DTE rate You have the following choices rate64k 3 rate640k 12 rate1280k 22 rate1856k 32 ratel28k 4 rate704k 13 rate1344k 23 rate1920k 33 ratel92k 5 rate768k 14 ratel408k 24 rate1984k 34 rate256k 6 rate832k 15 ratel472k 25 rate2048k 35 rate320k 7 rate896k 16 rate1536k 26 rate2112k 36 rate384k 8 rate960k 17 ratel600k 28 rate2176k 37 rate448k 9 ratel024k 18 ratel664k 29 rate2240k 38 rate5 12k 10 ratel088k 19 ratel728k 30 rate2304k 39 rate576k 11 ratel216k 21 rate1792k 31 3 Use the Local Clock Mode Local Remote pop up menu to select the clock mode You have the following choices internal receiveRecover 0 external receiveRecover 1 receiveRecover internal 2 receiveRecover external 3 external external 4 4 Use the Local Tx Data Sample Point pop up menu to select the local transmit data sample point You have the fo
25. Patton Electronics is an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer and our products are carefully tested before ship ment All of our products are backed by a comprehensive warranty program Note Ifyou purchased your equipment from a Patton Electronics reseller ask your reseller how you should proceed with warranty service It is often more convenient for you to work with your local reseller to obtain a replacement Patton services our products no matter how you acquired them Warranty coverage Our products are under warranty to be free from defects and we will at our option repair or replace the prod uct should it fail within one year from the first date of shipment Our warranty is limited to defects in work manship or materials and does not cover customer damage lightning or power surge damage abuse or unauthorized modification Outofwarranty service Patton services what we sell no matter how you acquired it including malfunctioning products that are no longer under warranty Our products have a flat fee for repairs Units damaged by lightning or elephants may require replacement Returns for credit Customer satisfaction is important to us therefore any product may be returned with authorization within 30 days from the shipment date for a full credit of the purchase price Ifyou have ordered the wrong equipment or you are dissatisfied in any way please contact us to request an RMA number to accept your return Patton is not responsibl
26. User supplied string that defines the Customer Premise box at the far end of the link The string is stored in non volatile flash within the CP unit If the unit is moved the User ID will move to the new slot making it useful for hardware identification The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Local Circuit ID localCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms resetStatus Selecting this push button erases the alarms errors and warning associated with the specified slot Note The errors and warning will still be listed in the System Log Hardware Reset resetStatus Selecting this push button will force the associated modem to perform a hardware reset Card Lost Indication cardLostlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem is removed from the man agement system Three choices are available e None 0 e Warning 1 e Error 2 Line Down Indication lineDownlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem reports a line down sce nario Three choices are available e None 0 e Warning 1 e Error 2 Note Line Down Indication must be set to error 2 line up a
27. e pate 3 Model 2701RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 147 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management lal 4 lalWithpat 5 e JalWithpate 6 rdl v54 7 e rdlv54Withpat 8 rdl v54Withpate 9 e rdl csu 10 e rdl csuWithpat 11 e rdl csuWithpate 12 e rdl remote 13 SW Test Mode testModeSet270 1 RC This displays any test mode invoked through the NMS See next configuration for information about invoking test modes through the NMS This option will be highlighted in blue if the unit is in test mode off 1 No test mode in process pat 2 Pattern generator 511 turned on e pate 3 HPattern generator with errors 511 E turned on lal 4 Local loopback test e lalWithpat 5 Local loopback test with 511 pattern generator JalWithpate 6 Local loopback test with 511 E pattern generator with errors rdl v54 7 Remote loopback test from V54 e rdl Withpat 8 Remote loopback test with 511 from V54 rdl Withpate 9 Remote loopback test with errors 511E from V54 RDL Response v54Loop This displays if the unit will respond to a V 54 loop up command enabled or if the unit will ignore a V 54 loop up command disabled FP Switches frntSwitch This displays if the front panel toggle switches used for loopbacks and pattern generators are enabled or disabled Pattern Select patternSelect This displays the pattern 511 2047 QRSS that is used when t
28. tion command 4 Click the Submit button The rack card is now protected Creating and modifying global configuration templates 213 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Creating a template This section describes how to create a global configuration template Patton Electronics LI x HomePage Global Configuration Menu HOME 1 sept Asti Create New Configuration I BA p m ud Turc Esport 1095 Patton Electronics Comp Create Configuration Configure Cards E 2701RC 2707RC Create Configuration System Info ae DownLoad 3088RC i Create Configuration System Log Modify Configuration System Config 1095 Patton Electronics Comp Modify Configuration Help 2701RC 2707RC None Created Modify Configuration 3088RC 0 Modify Configuration Z P zZ w lt c e Z V io e K Delete Configuration 1095 Patton Electronics Comp Delete Configuration 2701RC 2707 RC None Created Y Delete Configuration 3088RC 9 lt Delete Configuration Figure 100 Global Configuration Menu page Note You can create as many as five templates if you need to delete a tem plate to make room for another refer to section Deleting a template on page 217 Do the following to create a template 1 In the Create New Configuration section type a short name 10 characters or less in the text box named Model 3088RC 2707RC Configura
29. 0 Apply 3088 Test Mode none 0 Rack Protection Mode normal Clear Alarms Figure 104 System Level Information page Rack section 2 Locate the rack section of the System Level Information page that you will configure in figure 104 Rack 1 Top Level is being modified 3 Use the Apply Rack Configuration pop up menu see figure 104 to select the template you want to apply 4 Click the Apply Configuration button The template has been applied Creating and modifying global configuration templates 219 Chapter 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Chapter contents O T T T eee CORTO 224 UE 224 STS In 225 A aa aaa RTS 226 TR Leere Pee L PME E DU TDI T TAA 226 Configure ads e e eR EN RR T TNT M TET E 226 Md recen ee eee EM e UT 227 SI halo d pe Ue HT EI Ted 227 Modenmustatst cse eoe ur mec ec UU EU por Modemwcontieurationdagec ee rtp RE 227 E E E ee ence metre sce erat E E E E 227 Download eee Meer eA UM LEE e EI 227 System IE EE 227 aan Oro or 228 S GG NIemorye e ec e d e TET 228 Syslog Non Volatile Memory esac cec tpm E d e 228 SIND ec UD CER SEAR T een 228 IS TE 228 BO a 228 SOMA Verion DO roland a 228 Software Date Code E R e IT 228 Box Name iaa 229 Box EINEAN 0 H 229 Box Location ET TG HI 229 MS ET BIST T H dre teense T T gee 229 petatino TSE crees nec eMe UT c ee IUE E erste meets ees 229 SliataliSystemeSlotscAyailablextotale onfie Slots ON 229 Tork eine Slotsa tacalActive
30. 10Base T network Figure 10 shows the RJ 45 jack pin out diagram Refer to the following sections when con structing Ethernet cables to connect to the Patton Model 1001MC mu TX Transmit Data 2 TX Transmit Data 1 yee ug 2 3 RX Receive Data ey 4 5 5 RX Receive Data Ne Figure 10 1001MC 10Base T Ethernet port pin out diagram Connecting the cables 32 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Connecting a 10Base T hub to the 1001MC The Ethernet 10Base T port on the rear of the 1001MC connects directly to a 10Base T hub or repeater using RJ 45 unshielded twisted pair cable that is wired straight through see figure 11 Note Cable lengths should not exceed 330 feet 100 m when using Type 4 or 5 cable 10Base T Hub 1001MC 10Base T port RJ 45 pin no RJ 45 pin no 3 X 3 04 6 UU 6 UTU 1 RX 1 RX 2 RX WH 2 RX Figure 11 Hub wiring diagram Connecting a 10Base T workstation to the 1001MC The 10Base T port on the 1001MC connected to a workstation by means of a cross connect cable Refer to figure 12 to build a cross connect cable that connects between the 10Base T port on a workstation s NIC and the 1001MC s 10Base T port Note Cable lengths should not exceed 330 feet 100 m when using Type 4 or 5 cable 10Base T Workstation 1001MC 10Base T port RJ 45 pin no RJ 45 pin no 3 RX 3 RX 6 RX 6 RX 2 TX 2 TX Figure 12 W
31. Ad ias 153 Local ser Nd docalUs ell Tm 153 Remote User Td remote User iia las esc le OR 154 Local Circuit ID Moce meu it A et den ea 154 Remote Cirouit ID remote en ii ad ees 154 Alar Into ISO poa ii Dad 154 Clear Slot Alatms resetStaEus iii iii 154 Hardware Reset iS to das 154 Card Lost Indication cardLostindication nia il dades 154 Line Down Indication lineDownIndication sss sss 154 Creating and modifying global configuration templates eei cedat intentes 155 Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 2701 RC NTUs from global modification 155 Protecting an entire Model 1001 rack from global configuration eene 155 Protecting a selected Model 2701RC rack card from global configuration eee 157 Creating a template 2 eerte idad 158 Modas atemp aE MR 163 Del tias a template cose tii eite cdi teed O e cete e cetus da 164 Applying a template nia oett fete dtes Pe ania ed ha anaes 164 To configure all Model 2701RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks eee 165 To configure all Model 2701RC rack cards in just one Model 1001 rack eee 166 131 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Introduction This chapter describes managing a Model 2701 RC NetLink G 703 G 704 network termination unit NTU using the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS internal HTTP HTML web engine and a standard web browser
32. Modify Configuration Next Configuration Configuration and management 192 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Displaying the Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page The Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page see figure 93 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 3088RC and the remote NTU When the page displays the unit is set to the onLine state and the current configuration is displayed Patton Electronics Home Page Input Mode onLine 0 pe a pee HOME About 1001MC if unit is set to protected mode ade global configurations will not apply Import Export Global Configuration Mode normal 0 L 0 lt Submit Query Configure Cards System Info Configuration Status static 1 DownLoad System Log Local Remote SNMP System Config A Model Code model3088RC 12 model3088 K 32 Help DSL variables DTE Rate rate2048k 32 rate2048k 32 Clock Mode Local Alai external receiveRecover 1 internal Tx Clock Invert disable 1 disable 1 DSL Link Enable disable 1 disable 1 Line Probe disable 1 isable 1 Annex Type annexB 1 annexB 1 Software Rev 230 2 3 0 Card variables Front Panel Switches enable 0 disable 1 Response to Test Mode disable 1 disable 1 Serial Interface Type el normal 0 3088 XT Timeslot Map Not Implement Line Type tl unframed 0 Line Code Selection ami 0 Line Built Out e1750hm 4
33. O lt e O _ Z d Q e O days hrs 38 min 2 sec box box c Warnme Line Down Address 11 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 2 sec System Powered up 2 time Odays0 hrs 0 min 2 sec lan laninit c Using stored ethernet settings N davs hrs min 2 sec lanlanconf e Rev R PCR Figure 143 System Log Non Volatile Memory page displaying warnings and errors 2 Examine the page for error or warning are entries warnings are highlighted in yellow and errors are high lighted in red If you are able to determine the cause of the problem by using the System Log apply appropriate remedies to resolve the situation If the remedy includes replacing a NetLink modem refer to the user manual that came with the rack card for the procedure on replacing the defective rack card Otherwise check rack card LEDs in the malfunctioning rack to see if one is displaying a fault condition refer to the user manual that came with each rack card for information on using front panel LEDs to troubleshoot problems If you are still unable to determine the source of the problem refer to section 1001 MC test mode diagnostics for information on performing diagnostics tests to isolate the problem 1001MC test mode diagnostics The Model 1001MC provides the following diagnostics tests and loops that are very helpful when troubleshoot ing NetLink modems connections e fivell 511 When this test is applied it causes the V 52 bit error rate
34. Select the appropriate Modify screen 2 Make changes to the desired parameter 3 Click on the Submit button Return to the HOME screen 5 Click on the Record Current Configuration button Note Make sure you follow steps 1 through 5 when modifying the HTTP HTML pages Otherwise your changes will be lost when the 1001MC is power cycled Help screens The Model 1001MC web pages have built in help screens that enable you to get information about the vari ables that are being described Each web page contains several headings that describe the section that is being defined Some of the headings are hyperlinks to the help screen for that page The new window will automati cally scroll to the help area that was requested You may also scroll through this page to view help information about other sections of the page In some cases the headings for the tables will be shown as hyperlinks these hyperlinks work the same as was previously discussed showing the help screen for that column of the table HTTP HTML web page navigation This section describes how to navigate the internal HTTP HTML web pages on the Model 1001MC The diagram below shows how all of the web pages are linked together Following figure 18 there is a brief descrip tion of each page For more detailed information about each web page refer to chapter 10 HTTP HTML web page reference on page 220 Saving HTTP HTML object changes 42 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 3
35. System Log c SAME Local Remote 8 System Config Z Help E DTE Rate rateb4k 1 v rate64k 1 MV kad Clock Mode Local Remote internal receiveRecover 0 Y internal 0 e AAA TF P i T Tx clock Invert disable 1 v dissble 1 v z DSL Link Enable disable 1 w disable 1 Line Probe disab e Y disable 1 Annex Type ennexA 0 Y lannexA 0 Front Panel Switches disab e 1 y disable 1 Response to Test Mode disab le 1 x disable 1 Serial Interface Tyne normal 0 normal 0 Figure 95 Model 3088RC Configuration page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 3088RC Configuration page for the 3088RC click on the following links Home menu gt Configure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number gt model3088RC xxx x in the Local Model Code column for the 3088RC you wish to manage gt Modify Configuration you first have to change input mode from onLine to superVisoryMode Figure 96 on page 196 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Model 3088RC Configuration page see Model 3088RC Configu ration page MIB variables description on page 206 Configuration and management 195 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 1001MC Configure System Level Cards Information System Information System Log Login HOME Record Information Hard Reset SNMP MIB System Log Modi System Log RAM Sy
36. The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 14 The daisy chained racks are set up in the same manner with 13 addresses being available in a redundant system and 15 addresses being available in single supply system When you disable a rack the addresses are still set aside for that rack space If a power supply is removed the addressing will not change unless you make the change through the 1001MC web pages This allows easy service of the power supplies If the address is O all ON position then the unit will run completely from its DIP switch configuration This can be useful for testing circuits independently of the management system If an address is placed on the switch the unit will boot from its stored flash configuration and begin looking for poll commands from the Model 1001MC Switch S1 allows an 8 bit address to be assigned to a link The following rules apply to setting the address Bit S1 8 is the least significant bit A bit set to ON is considered a 0 A bit set to OFF is considered a J Patton Electronics suggests that you set your addresses starting with address 1 at the far left of your rack farthest away from the power supplies and increment the numbers by one as you go from left to right Setting the addresses in this manner will make configuration easier as you start using the web page management An example of this is shown below 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 NMS PS2 PSI
37. This chapter is meant to be used in addition to the manual that came with your unit NetLink NMS description Specifically designed for use in the Patton NetLink system when the NetLink G 703 G 704 NTU is coupled with the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS and the Patton Model 1001 rack system the modem is fully SNMP manageable SNMP management can be performed on both the local and remote units using a standard SNMP network management station NMS or by using a standard web browser and the Model 1001MC s built in web server You can view and change configuration variables view statistical variables and view error and warning indications Configuration and management This section describes the configuration and management of your NetLink G 703 G 704 NTUs using a Model 1001MC NetLink NMS with built in HTTP HTML web server If you plan to manage your units using a standard network management station you can download the Patton Enterprise MIBs either through the SNMP web page on the Model 1001MC or obtain them from the Patton web site at www patton com The following pages are used to configure and manage the Model 2701RC Modem Information Rack X page This page displays a list of the cards that are installed in your system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems see section Displaying the Modem Information page on page 133 Model 2701 Configuration Slot X page This page along with the Model 2701 Configurat
38. must have the Framing Mode set to slotted for the local and remote units Notes on framing mode settings The Framing Mode Setting notifies the card of the type of interface it will be connected to When you are using an IM2RC K with a 1095RC rack card the system administrator should set the Local Clock Mode to external either external receiveRecover 1 or external external 4 and the Local Framing Mode to slotted When you are using an IMI K and a 1095 standalone at the remote site the system administrator should set the Clock Mode to external external 4 and the Remote Framing Mode to slotted Illegal configuration messages If you are receiving an invalid configuration indication after creating a configuration it is resulting from an illegal combination of variables In most cases the cause of the problem has to do with the Framing Mode vari able Patton DSL modems should only be set to the slotted mode when you are using an IM2RC K with the 1095RC or an IMI K with the 1095 standalone unit Also if you are using a IM2RC K or IMI K interface card the 1095 1095RC must always be set to the external clock mode Review the table below for a list of valid configurations that can be used with the 1095 1095RC Local Clock Mode Local Framing Mode Remote Clock Mode Remote Framing Mode Internal Normal Receive Recover Normal External Normal Receive Recover Normal External Slotted Receive Recover Normal External Slotted External
39. this number is greater than zero this field will be highlighted in yellow to notify you that the warning exists Warnings are cleared through the Configure Cards web page for the system or the Slot Configuration page for the individual modems You can view the System Log page to examine the source of the warnings Total System Errors boxErrorNumber This variable defines the number of errors that are currently outstanding in the system This number includes errors that have been generated from the NetLink modems as well as the Model 1001MC itself If this number is greater than zero this field will be highlighted in red to notify you that the errors exists Errors are cleared HOME 229 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference through the Configure Cards web page for the system or the Slot Configuration page for the individual modems You can view the System Log page to examine the source of the warnings IMMEDIATE ACTIONS Record Current Configuration Hard Reset Figure 111 Immediate actions Immediate Actions There are several immediate actions which can be executed on the Model 1001MC when in superuser mode see figure 111 which will cause the box to act according to the following Record Current Configuration Selecting the Record Current Configuration button causes the current configuration to be stored in Flash memory Any changes made to the Model 1001MC configuration are stored in non volatile
40. 134 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Displaying the Model 2701RC Configuration Slot page The Model 2701RC Configuration Slot page see figure 68 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 2701RC and the remote NTU When the page displays the unit is set to the onLine state and the current configuration is displayed Patton Electronics Model 2701RC Configuration Slot 4 Home Page HOME Line Status dataMode 2 About 1001 MC Previous Card Refresh Current Page Next Card Import Export Configure Cards Alarm Counters System Info DownLoad Los o lars lo System Log Flap Count lo CRC4 Error lo SNMP gt System Confi Clear Counters Help CRC4 Error Alarm Threshold lo Submit Query View Rack 1 Unit must be set to superVisoryMode to make configuration changes Input Mode anLine 0 Submit Query If unit is set to protected mode global configurations will not apply Global Configuration Mode normal 0 Submit Query Configuration Status static 1 Local Model Code model2701RC ETH 11 Line Format frame G704 1 Clock Mode internal CLE 1 DTE Rate 1792 Line Coding code HDB3 0 CRC Framing disabled 0 CAS Multi Framing disabled 0 Line Build Out Ibo 120ohm 1 Tx Clock Timing internal HW SW Test Mode of 1 SW Test Mode off 1 RDL Response enabled 1 FP Switches enabled 1 Pattern Select Reel 10 L
41. Assignment table e CRC Framing ls applicable when the frame G704 1 Line Format is chosen disabled 0 enabled 1 Line Build Out This selects the electrical characteristics for the types of electrical connections un bal anced 75 Ohm coaxial cable or balanced 120 Ohm twisted pair cable lbo 75Ohm 0 when using dual coaxial connections lbo 120Ohm 1 when using twisted pair as the transmission medium e V54 Loop enables or disables the 2701 RC 5 ability to respond to a V 54 remote loop initiation pattern disabled 0 enabled 1 Pattern Loop Creating and modifying global configuration templates 160 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management qrss 0 Quasi random signal source fivel 1 1 The 511 bit length pseudo random test pattern two047 2 The 2047 bit length pseudo random test pattern Loop Timeout determines the length of the in band loop test If the test is not of indefinite length it will automatically terminate the loop session time out 5min 0 5 minutes time out 10min 1 10 minutes time out 15min 2 15 minutes time out 30min 3 30 minutes time out 45min 4 45 minutes time out 60min 5 60 minutes time out 90min 6 90 minutes time out 120min 7 120 minutes time out 180min 8 180 minutes no time out 9 the loop runs indefinitely and must be turned off manually by the user Config Type Switch config 0 The 2701RC get
42. BER test pattern generator built into the NetLink modem to output using a mathematical polynomial a psuedo random bit pattern of 511 bits The receiving NetLink modem decodes the received bits using the same polynomial If the received 1001MC test mode diagnostics 282 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 11 Troubleshooting and maintenance bits match the agreed aupon pseudo random pattern then the NetLink modems and the communication link are functioning properly e fiveller 511 with errors After successfully concluding a fivell test use the fiveller test which ran domly adds errors to the 511 bit pattern to verify that the receiving modem detects the errors e lal local loopback The local loopback test checks the operation of the local NetLink modem Any data sent to the local NetLink modem in this test mode will be echoed returned back to the originating device i e characters typed on the keyboard of a terminal will appear on the terminal screen see figure 144 NetLink Modem NetLink Modem Serial Internal qun Serial Device Clocking Clocking Device Cable span LAL Initiated Figure 144 Local loopback diagram e lalWith511 local loopback with 511 This test functions the same way as the lal test but it adds a 511 pattern from the BER generator e JalWith51 ler local loopback with 511 and errors This test functions the same way as the lalWith511 test but it adds a 511 pattern from the BER generator that in
43. Company contact information Patton Electronics Co 7622 Rickenbacker Drive Gaithersburg Maryland 20879 U S A Phone 1 301 975 1000 Fax 1 301 869 9293 E mail support patton com WWW www patton com About 1001 MC 231 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Patton Electronics CURRENT SYSTEM INFORMATION Homie Page a ae oe TI ee AI A Ls HOME IP Address 192 168 200 21 About 1001MC TP Mask 255 255 255 0 Import Export Current Gateway 192 168 200 148 Configure Cards Lra Modifying the IP addressing System Info orn IP Address 192 168 200 21 t AR IP Mask 255 255 255 0 SNMP d iS2168200148 Ssstem Confi ateway 192 168 200 148 Hel Submit Query Box Contact Information Box Location Unknown Location Box Name SNMPMgr Box Contact Contactinfo Submit Query SNMP and HTTP Password Information Superuser Password superuser Superuser Password Verification Submit Query User Password monitor User Password Venfication Submit Query Background Information Web Page Refresh Rate rate30sec 30 Web Background Enabled disableGraphics 0 Submit Query Figure 113 System Level Information page About 1001MC 232 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Import Export The Import Export function enables you to make a backup or export copy of your Model 1001MC s configura tion parameters By exporting the configu
44. Configurifie Trame eroundbo or e eee sours Mee Ue tI UOLUIT 29 Seting the 3088RC system address aeaio aeee a EA a EH 29 lee l 30 Polling rack 1 andidaisy chained ooo 30 a TET E ere erecta Panera T T T SEE TTTTS 31 A ia 31 IE T T I T M e M E RT 32 15 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Instalinsthe Bthernetcable 2 curo rami pner eet eor erba dere pet aii 32 Connecting a TOBase T hub to the 1001 ME cuidaban is 33 Connecting a 10Base T workstation to the LOOLMC essere nennen nennen 33 Installing the RS 232 configuration daisy chain port cable i aeter e etes 34 LED a M 34 Ethernet LED indicators iii 35 Power LED indicator nidad di 35 Heartbeat LED indicator diria acopio 35 Fault LED indicator aii didas 35 BPP UD indicator oie HERE rei Re ERU IE balas 35 NT E 35 16 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Introduction Model 1001MC installation consists of the following Installing the front and rear cards into the rack chassis see section Installing the Model 1001MC into the rack chassis on page 18 Configuring and installing the NetLink modem cards see section Installing NetLink modem cards on page 19 Installing the NetLink power supply or supplies see section Installing the power supplies on page 31 Verifying that the 1001 MC functions normally when power
45. E1 unit specifies switch S3 for the card address in the NetLink System Each card in the chassis is given a unique address through the setting of switch S3 Note Standalone units use the address of the rack card that they are con nected to Polling overview The Model 1001MC sends poll messages along the internal bus looking for cards installed in the system Once a card is found it is placed online and communication with the management station can begin If the address of the NetLink modem is not configured or does not match the address range of the rack that it is installed in the Model 1001MC may not recognize the card The address range that is polled is determined by the configuration of the system The system administrator must make sure that the software configuration within the Model 1001MC matches the hardware configuration of the system Polling rack 1 and daisy chained racks The Model 1001MC uses the number of power supplies in the sys tem to determine what the address range of the individual racks will be The number of power supplies installed in each rack is entered on the Modem Information page If the system is set for two power supplies installed the 1001MC will automatically set the number of slots available displayed on the Modem Informa tion page in the chassis to 13 If the system is set for a single power supply installed the 1001MC will auto matically set the number of slots available in the chassis to 15
46. Getting started 1001MC Configure Cards System Information Download System Level Information ef System Log Modi System Log RAM System Log Model 1095 amp 2701 Global Configuration System Log Record Information SNMP MIB System Config a Figure 18 1001MC command map Saving HTTP HTML object changes 43 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 3 Getting started After logging in the system displays the HOME page see figure 19 Patton Electronics Home Page PATTON Electronics To HOME About 1001MC s Iro a Software Version 235 1 Configure Cards Software Date Code Apr 15 2003 09 47 20 System Info Box Name Support Unit Download Box Contact Test Unit System Log Sue S s Box Location Support Desk System Config Running Since Last Boot 85 days 0 hrs 7 min 38 sec STATUS OF Support Unit Total System Slots Available 115 Total Active Slots 5 a p e Zz m v E lt 22 _ G r4 e V Q e Total System Warnings 0 Total System Errors IMMEDIATE ACTIONS Figure 19 HOME page Home The HOME page displays a quick overview of the system including error and warning indications software information box names number of modems installed and so on On the left side of the HOME page is the Navigation View The list on the left side of the screen allows you to nav
47. Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management AIS aisAlarm Displays the number of times an Alarm Indication Signal on the El line is detected This should be set when an unframed all ones code is received at RPOSI and RNEGI This number is accumulating in the 1001MC Note Alarm counters severity level is controlled by the Line Down Indica tiom level The following options are available none Only Syslog message will be sent e warning Syslog message will be sent beginning with box Wbox c Warning and web page warning counter will be incremented error Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Error the web page error counter will be incremented and an SNMP trap message will be sent Flap Count lineDownCnt Displays the number of times the E1 line has been up and then becomes down This should be set when the El line is up and becomes down This number is accumulating in the 1001MC Note Alarm counters severity level is controlled by the Line Down Indica tiom level The following options are available none Only Syslog message will be sent warning Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Warning and web page warning counter will be incremented error Syslog message will be sent beginning with box1box c Error the web page error counter will be incremented and an SNMP trap message will be sent CRCA Error crc4Error Displays the number of CRC4 errors received by
48. If the 2701RC is operating in G 704 channelized mode a configurable Channel Assignment table appears When line format is set to frame G704 1 individual channels can be either enabled 1 or disabled 0 These options cannot be accessed if line format is set to frame G703 0 Note Timeslot 0 Channel 1 is reserved for synchronization when G 704 is enabled therefore this channel cannot be accessed Also if CAS multiframing is enabled Channel 16 cannot be accessed because it is used for signaling with CAS is enabled Unit Configuration table This table shows the configurable MIB variables for the set of units After changes are made select the Submit Query button at the bottom of the table and then place the Input Mode back to onLine 0 in the Model 2701 Configuration page The following sections explain the MIB variables that are shown in the Unit Configuration table Line Format lineFormat This option is used to set the line format to the following frame G703 0 G 703 unframed frame G704 1 framed G 704 Clock Mode clockMode270 RC This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink E1 modems The following options are available network CLK 0 internal CLK 1 e external CLK 2 DTE Rate dteRate2701RC This read only variable displays the DTE rate for the link This is the Nx64 kbps data rate selected by the number of activated channels Line Coding lineCoding2701RC This variable is used to select
49. Line Status set to datamode 2 e Ifa rack card is installed in the rack without a customer premise unit connected the remote information will be left as either none or highlighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified The following sections define the MIB variables that are shown in the Configuration Status table Model Code localModelCode remoteModelCode These variables display the local and remote models codes for the units that were found in the specified address DTE rate dteRateiDSL This variable displays the DTE rate for the link Because the NetLink iDSL modems are symmetrical same rate in both direction there is only one MIB variable that defines the DTE rate Clock Mode Local Remote This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink modems The display shows the Local clock mode rack card and then the remote clock mode TM From DTE dteTMiDSL remotedteTMiDSL These MIB variables define whether you would like the modems to accept test mode requests from the DTE that is connected In normal applications this should be set to disable 1 When the application is using rear cards or interface modules that do not have loop back ability from the DTE such as the IM2RC IA Ethernet rear card this variable must be set to disable 1 In most situations if a DTE test mode is required it should be enable only during the time that the test is needed HW Test Mode testModelndiDSL remotetestModelnd
50. Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed from the Configure Cards web page or from the Slot Configuration page Submit button Click the Submit button to input the changes to the management system After clicking the Submit button you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Note After submitting the remote circuit ID information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Model 1094 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 1094 Configuration Slot page Model 1094A Model 1094 Configuration Slot nmsSlotiD Displays the address of the NetLink HDSL modem The address is defined by the DIP switch setting of S1 on the rack card T he remote standalone unit has no address specified but uses that address of the rack card that it is connected to Model 1094 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description 81 Model 1001MC O
51. Moo torchecleforinebvorkeproblemse e eet E 282 AM oooO E M T Ur MN 282 Puinpnineitescmoderdiagngticse cocer e ice ee eT MI MU reU T NE 284 Ma e T Ire Iria 284 e e E aaa aaa 284 A IE 284 RI E UNS 284 276 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Introduction 11 Troubleshooting and maintenance This chapter describes troubleshooting and fault analysis that can be performed by the operator This section contains the following sections to help you troubleshoot the 1001MC rack card and NetLink rack cards Troubleshooting the 100MC rack card see page 277 Troubleshooting network malfunctions see page 278 Running test mode diagnostics see page 282 Replacing a 1001MC rack card see page 284 If you require more help refer to chapter 12 Contacting Patton for assistance on page 286 Troubleshooting the 1001MC rack card Refer to table 15 for 1001MC LED locations and definitions then refer to table 16 on page 278 for a list of common symptoms and suggested remedies Note Note Introduction The following information assumes that there is only one failure involv ing the Model 1001MC and that if you perform the corrective action listed it will solve the problem If you are unable to correct a failure refer to chapter 12 Contacting Patton for assistance on page 286 When replacing the 1001MC follow the procedures cited in section Replacing the Model 1001MC on page 284 Table 15 LED indicators
52. Note For Model 1095RC and Model 2701RC You can protect individual rack cards from being globally configured by setting the pop up menu from nor mal 0 to protected 1 After you have set the protection option if you are finished making changes to the cur rent rack card click on the Submit button located at the right side of the rack card s row in the table to save the changes Note Setting the protection to normal 0 will enable the rack card to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Note After submitting the protection setting you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Local Circuit ID localCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed within the Configure Cards page or from the Slot Configuration page After clicking the Sub mit Query button to input the string to the management system you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed from the Configure Cards we
53. OFF ON ON ON ON OxB5 181 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF Installing the power supplies Refer to the installation manual that came with the power supply or supplies to install the supply and rear power entry module into the rack chassis Verifying 1001MC functioning 1 Apply power to the rack system verify that the green Power LED on the Model 1001MC front card illumi nates 2 Turn off power to the rack system verify that the green Power LED on the Model 1001MC front card extinguishes Installing the power supplies 31 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Connecting the cables 2 Hardware installation Installing 1001MC rear 1 O card cables takes place in the following order A lightning activity WARNING Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of 1 Installing the 10Base T Ethernet cable onto the 10Base T port see figure 9 see Installing the Ethernet cable on page 32 2 Installing the cable onto the RS 232 configuration daisy chain port see figure 9 see Installing the RS 232 configuration daisy chain port cable on page 34 Rear 1 0 Card 10Base T pn RJ 45 jack RS 232 Configuration Daisy chain port DB 25 F connector Figure 9 Rear I O card ports Installing the Ethernet cable The RJ 45 Ethernet jack on the rear I O card of the Model 1001MC is designed to connect directly to a
54. Page The following options are available corporate mib Click on this link to download the corporate MIB file corporat mib products mib Click on this link to download the products MIB file product mib 1001MC Products Mibs Page Click on this link to view and download the product specific MIBs used by the 1001MC SNMP 258 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference System Config System Config Global Configuration Menu Model 1095RC 2701RC and 2707RC rack cards can be configured globally by templates you create If you use this capability you have the option to globally configure some or all Model 1095RC 2701RC and 2707RC modems in multiple racks or those in just one rack Note Due to the many different applications that are supported care must be taken when setting the configuration of your modems that you avoid using combinations of variables that could cause problems with the modems if implemented incorrectly Those variable combinations referred to as llegal combinations are described in this chapter This section contains the following information to help you configure and use templates Protecting individual Model 1001 racks and 1095RC rack cards from global modification You may not want all racks or modems to be modified when you apply the global template so section Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 1095RC modems from global modification describes how to protect individ
55. RAM first This allows you to set the box up with a working configuration before making the configuration permanent Changes become permanent when you select Record Current Con figuration You will lose all changes not stored to Flash the next time the 1001MC is re booted unless you store them Hard Reset Clicking the Hard Reset button causes the 1001MC to restart When you select Hard Reset the 1001MC confirms that you want to execute this command Then the 1001MC will re initialize the interfaces and re load configuration parameters from Flash Note Clicking the Hard Reset only restarts the 1001MC it will not per form a hardware reset on the modems in the system This can be done in the slot configuration web page for the individual cards HOME 230 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference MODEL 1001MC System Information Software Version 2 8 1 Software Date Code Apr 15 2003 09 47 20 Running Since Last Boot 0 days 0 hrs 7 min 59 sec CPU Idle 89 Total System Wamings 0 Total System Errors Contact Information Patton Electronics Co Phone 301 975 1000 7622 Rickenbacker Drive Fax 301 869 9293 Gaithersburg Maryland 20879 E mail support patton com 5 WWW http Awww patton com Figure 112 About 1001MC About 1001MC About 1001MC About 1001MC The About 1001MC link displays system information and the following Patton Electronics
56. RTS Model 1000MC None None None None 1 startup 1 0 0 Local em Remote modell095AD Tech Bench Figure 42 Modem Information page for the Model 1095RC Starting from the HOME page to access the Modem Information page for the 1095RC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 Figure 43 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Modem Information page see Displaying the Slot Con figuration page on page 99 1001MC Configure Cards System Level Information Modem Infor mation Rack X i i System Information 1 System Log System Log Modi System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 43 Web page navigation to Modem Information page Record Information SNMP MIB Hard Reset Next Configuration Configuration and management 94 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Displaying the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page The Model 1095 Configuration Slot page see figure 44 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 1095RC and the remote CPE box When the page displays the unit is set to the oz Line state and the cur rent configuration is displayed 6 Model 1095RC management Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Log SNMP System Config Help Model 1095RC Configuration Slo
57. Slotted Receive Recover Normal Internal Normal Receive Recover Normal External Normal a Denotes a unit that must have an IM2RC K or IMI K installed Creating and modifying global configuration templates 118 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Procedure for creating a template HOME System Info DownLoad System Log SNMP Help e a e 2 zz w lt x p ie Z V Q M e About 1001MC Configure Cards Patton Electronics Home Page Global Configuration Menu Create New Configuration Model 1095 Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration CONFIG 1 0 el Modify Configuration Delete Configuration Delete Model 1095 Configuration CONFIG 1 0 Delete Configuration Figure 58 Global Configuration Menu page Note You can create as many as five templates if you need to delete a tem plate to make room for another refer to section Do the following to create a template on page 125 6 Model 1095RC management 1 Click in the Model 1095 Configuration text box see figure 58 and type a short name 10 characters or less for the new template then click the Create Configuration button The Model 1095 Global Configuration window displays see figure 59 Z lt z P x ie Z O La ad Q Creating and modifying global configuration templates Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System In
58. Starting from the HOME page to access the Download page for the 1095RC click on the Download link Figure 51 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system System Information Download SNMP MIB System Log System Log Record Information RAM System Log Flash Figure 51 Web page navigation to Download page For more information about items on the Download page see Using the Download page to upgrade 1095RC software on page 111 Modem Information page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Modem Information page Slots Available totalConfigSlots Displays the number of configurable slots available in the rack Modems Installed rackXCardsInstalled Displays the number of modem cards installed in the rack that the system has found Number of Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies This is where you specify the number of power supplies installed in the rack this value determines the addressing range for the rack In the case of a redundant power supply system you should set this variable to 2 this will inform the Model 1001MC that there should be 2 power supplies in the system Rack Protection Mode If you want to protect all Model 1095RC rack cards installed in the current rack from being globally config ured select protected 1 from the pop up menu then click the Submit button For more information about t
59. TH Help io Delete Configuration O Delete Model 1095 Configuration Q Figure 40 Global Configuration Menu page for the Model 1095RC Starting from the HOME page to access the Modem Information page for the 1095RC click on the System Con fig link Figure 41 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more informa tion about items on the Global Configuration Menu page see Creating and modifying global configuration templates on page 113 About 1001MC Cards l Information i Download System Log System Log RAM SNMP MIB Flash System Model 1095 Config Global Configuration Figure 41 Web page navigation to Global Configuration Menu page System Level Information Record Information Configuration and management 93 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Displaying the Modem Information page The Modem Information page see figure 42 displays the cards installed in the system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems MODEM INFORMATION RACK 1 Card Display Type listPopOnly D Max Slots Available 13 Number of Power Supplies IB Submit Query Power Supply 1 Status availsble 0 Power Supply 2 Status available 0 Clear System Alarms Card Address Line Status Wamings Enors Local User Id Local ModelCode Remote User Id Remote ModelCode Local Circuit ID Remote 0 0 o a
60. This is where you specify the number of power supplies installed in the rack this value determines the addressing range for the rack In the case of a redundant power supply system you should set this variable to 2 this will inform the Model 1001MC that there should be 2 power supplies in the system Rack Protection Mode rackXProtected If you want to protect all Model 3088RC rack cards installed in the current rack from being globally config ured select protected 1 from the drop down menu then click the Submit button For more information about the system configuration feature refer to section System Config on page 259 Modem Information Rack X page MIB variables description 198 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Submit button After you have defined the number of power supplies installed in the rack and the rack protection mode click on the Submit button to save the changes Power Supply 1 Status rackXPower Down Displays the current status of power supply 1 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 If the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Power
61. This page along with the Model 1095 Configura tion Slot page enables you to update configuration of modems installed in the system see Displaying the Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page on page 97 Slot Configuration page This page can be used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors or warnings see section Displaying the Model 1095 Configu ration Slot page on page 95 Download page This page is where you can download the latest version of 1001MC and 1095RC software see section Displaying the Download page on page 100 Note bor information about other Model 1001MC pages refer to chapter 10 HTTP HTML web page reference on page 220 Introduction 92 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Displaying the Global Configuration Menu page The Global Configuration Menu page see figure 40 is where you can create templates that can globally config ure the Model 1095RC With this capability you can globally configure some or all Model 1095RC modems in multiple racks or just one rack Patton Electronics HomePage meie Global Configuration Menu HOME 52 Abeui00MC Create New Configuration Configure Cards A System Info Model 1095 Configuration mx s DownLoad mi System Log Modify Configuration ean SNMP System Config Modify Configuration CONFIG 1 0 Modify Configuration
62. This page displays a list of the cards that are installed in your system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems see section Displaying the Modem Informa tion page on page 50 Model 1092 Configuration Slot page This page along with the Model 1092 Configuration Next Config uration page enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 1092A and the remote CPE box see section Displaying the Model 1092 Configuration Slot page on page 52 Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page This page along with the Model 1092 Configura tion Slot page enables you to update configuration of modems installed in the system see Displaying the Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page on page 54 Slot Configuration page This page can be used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors or warnings see section Displaying the Model 1092 Configu ration Slot page on page 52 Note bor information about other Model 1001MC pages refer to chapter 10 HTTP HTML web page reference on page 220 Introduction 49 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Displaying the Modem Information page 4 Model 1092ARC management The Modem Information page see figure 20 displays the cards installed in the system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems MODEM INFORMATION RACE 1 Card Display
63. Type stPopOnly 0 Max Slots Available 13 Number of Power Supplies IE Submit Query Power Supply 1 Status available 0 Power Supply 2 Status available 0 Clear System Alarms Card Address Line Status Warnings Erors Local User Id Local ModelCode Remote User Id Remote ModelCode Loc ircuit ID Remote 0 0 0 0 een Test Model 1000MC Nore None None None 1 startup l 0 0 Local modell092ARC D Remote modell092A 1 Tech Bench 2 startup 1 0 0 Local modell092ARCO gt Remote ruodel 109242 Figure 20 Modem Information page for the Model 1092ARC Starting from the HOME page to access the Modem Information page for the 1092ARC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 Figure 21 on page 51 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Modem Information page see Displaying the Slot Configuration page on page 56 Configuration and management 50 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management View Rack 1 Cad Slot ar 0 K ibd Configuration Configure System Level sn Cards Information Cow Rak 3 mation Rack X System 1 Modem FA w Mode Configuration View Rack 8 System Log Modi Record Information SNMP MIB System Log RAM Hard Reset System Log Flash Figure 21 Web page navigation to Modem Information page E is H
64. Using this information the Model 1001MC will poll the specified address range in each rack Thus in a single power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from address 1 to address 15 Note The 1001MC is always address 0 The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 16 In a redundant power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from address 1 to address 13 The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 14 The daisy chained racks are set up in the same manner with 13 addresses being available in a redundant system and 15 addresses being available in single supply system When you disable a rack the addresses are still set aside for that rack space If a power supply is removed the addressing will not change unless you make the change through the 1001MC web pages This allows easy service of the power supplies The 2701RCs are shipped to use DIP switch configuration as default Software configuration can be enabled through either the VT 100 screens or through the 1001MC NMS To use the NMS switch S2 7 must be set to the OFF position otherwise the VI 100 port is active Switch S3 allows a decimal address to be assigned to a link The following rules apply to setting the address e 3 1 is the LSB and S3 8 is the MSB Patton Electronics suggests that you
65. a a a a 32 25 S s 33 PEE 523 58 Figure 5 Rack chassis slot layout rear view Installing the Model 1001MC into the rack chassis The Model 1001MC consists of a front rack card and a rear input output I O card see figure 2 on page 12 The two cards meet inside the rack chassis and plug into each other by way of mating 50 pin card edge connec tors Do the following to install the Model 1001MC cards into the rack chassis ting changes and fuse replacement should only be performed by qualified ser vice personnel Contact Patton Electronics Technical support at WARNING 301 975 1007 for more information j There are no user serviceable parts in the power supply section Voltage set Note The Model 1001MC is hot swappable which means that you can install it into the rack chassis without having to turn off power to the rack chassis For the purpose of this procedure though it is assumed that power to the rack is OFF at the beginning l Slide the rear I O card into rear chassis slot 14 see figure 5 along the metal guide rails Note The Model 1001MC installs into rack chassis slot 14 because that slot provides information about the power supplies to the 1001MC If the card is not installed in slot 14 the 1001MC will report power supply failure 2 Secure the rear card using the captive fasteners Installing the Model 1001MC into the rack chassis 18
66. all Model 3088RC rack cards Model 3088RC cards which will not be configured to the selected Global Configuration are Those installed in a Model 1001 rack that has the entire rack set to be protected 1 Those that are individually set to protected 1 mode Instructions for protecting either an entire rack or individual 3088RC cards are given earlier in this chapter The template can be applied to All 3088RC NTUs in ALL Model 1001 racks All 3088RC NTUs in just ONE Model 1001 rack To configure all Model 3088RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks Complete the following steps l Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page see figure 103 Creating and modifying global configuration templates 217 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Patton Electronics System Level Information Home Page 29 HOME e About LOOIMC System Overview El Apply 1095 System Configuration Patton Electronics Comp Apply Configuration vam Configure Cards MM S System Info Apply 1095 System Test Mode Patton Electronics Comp E gt S DownLoad Apply 2701RC System Configuration None Created E 58 System Log i gt T SNMP Apply 2701RC System Test Mode Rn xi Apply Test Mode i System Config Apply 3088RC System Configuration 0 a Z HRK Help Apply 3088RC System Test Mode none D io Z Total S
67. and warning Starting from the HOME page click on the follow ing links Home menu Configure Cards menu View Rack rack number X in the Card Address column Card Address nmsSlotID Displays the address of the card Local Model Code localModelCode Displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address View Rack X hyperlink Click on the View Rack X link to display the Modem Information Rack X window see section Modem Infor mation Rack X on page 239 for more information Card Identification Information Local User Id localUserlD User supplied string that defines the NetLink NTU installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink NTU and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Slot Configuration page MIB variables description 153 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Remote User Id remoteUserlD User supplied string that defines the Customer Premise box at the far end of the link The string is stored in non volatile flash within the CP unit If the unit is moved the User ID will move to the new slot making it useful for hardware identification The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Local Circuit ID localCircuitlD The
68. box c Error the web page error counter will be incremented and an SNMP trap message will be sent Model 2701RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 144 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management AIS aisAlarm Displays the number of times an Alarm Indication Signal on the El line is detected This should be set when an unframed all ones code is received at RPOSI and RNEGI This number is accumulating in the 1001MC Note Alarm counters severity level is controlled by the Line Down Indica tiom level The following options are available none Only Syslog message will be sent e warning Syslog message will be sent beginning with box Wbox c Warning and web page warning counter will be incremented error Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Error the web page error counter will be incremented and an SNMP trap message will be sent Flap Count lineDownCnt Displays the number of times the E1 line has been up and then becomes down This should be set when the El line is up and becomes down This number is accumulating in the 1001MC Note Alarm counters severity level is controlled by the Line Down Indica tiom level The following options are available none Only Syslog message will be sent warning Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Warning and web page warning counter will be incremented error Syslog message will be sen
69. boxl pAddtess iii pee EI e se erbe 247 Mak bolos e sauna Das 247 Gateway bon aray ui a 247 Box Contact Information ani id 247 Box Location boxLocatlon oen teer cereis ia 247 Box Name boxlName uec HUE REESE 247 Box Contact Dos Contac e 3 1 iecit ete a E REDE 247 SNMP and ATT P Password Informations e ret rentrer Hc dd 247 Superuser Password boxSnmpMoasterPasswozd 1 cepere decet ciaci n 247 User Password boxSnmpMlotiitorPassword miis 248 Background Information boxBackeroundfPlag cin 248 Webi Page Refresh Rate Box WebRefreshiRate urinaria ERU 248 Web Background Enabled boxBackeroundlElag siii iria reel 249 Dosvnload siete detnr e sett ere e ERRARE tins 249 Upgrading 1001MC software via FTP download iii di dades 249 Systemi Li pidi 251 System Lop Modi tad taa 252 Damon ninia ia dasa edad tada 252 Syslog Daemon IP Address syslagDaemonlB osa nr titre etti t RHET 252 SNMP Trap Daemon IP Address syslog Trapl P REIR rd 253 asy TL 253 Min Priority for SysLog Daemon ee nee RO RH eb ee n ele e e PN At pete 253 Mun Priority for Flashi Storage i gam Rer lod itera tr P e UR ene 254 Min Priority for RAM 45 ettet ise rt tege Re ia 254 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference A OSO 255 Malutenants aci CEN 256 Maintain Flash Storage syslogFlashClear T 256 System Log Volatile Memory 4 5 lia 256 System Log Non Volaule Memory aiii oa 257 Erase Fla
70. celeste enden em a eats A 182 167 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Line Coding lineCoding2707RG cialis dais 182 Line Build Out lnebuildOut etr a ees 182 EP Switebes ime Swit la a rs 182 FI W Test mode testModeSetInd vico HR eee Re ert 182 S W Test mnodextestModeSet2707R ni 182 Loop Time Out loop 20 tee er neu deba ee a e a E ee EE ERG TREE RAE 183 TM from DTE testMode DTE 42 tarte eret de td das 183 Configuration Type config R 42 t rte ie orte rrr tr Rae reser ads 183 Software Version softVersion2707RG iii a id eras 183 Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page MIB variables description eee 183 Line Statis lineStatus2707R 4 5 erectio rr eere eec ebd ete te e Peta Pci eco tere EAEE beet heres 183 Software Version soft VersiOn2707 RC earen nren s ct Puto etes ee is Haee pete e e QE Ee cater ER P PENNE ER board 183 Configuration Type contg Dype ida 183 Unit Configuration table sesei 25 2 5 2 D n peteret pr He Oe perra ce bee TR er HR dE 184 Tine Pormat imnebormab 25er sie esee reet eet eo cte orte et ee etre remi eeepc ter tr de e E dte e eee 184 Clock Mode clockMode2707 RC 5 eei steep oa a 184 DTE Bate dteRate2707RQ ui tot ecce tt c eei tee tec reta gea ve coco b et e EO Dea ete pee pe bed 184 Line Coding lineCoding2707RG nio iia 184 Line Build Out lineBuldOun ais 184 EP Switches frntSwiteh 5 mt oed ere res cere ete Eve Eie t
71. click on the Clear Local ID button then click on the Submit button Remote User Id remoteUserlD 10 byte user supplied string that defines the remotely connected modem The string is stored in non volatile Flash within the NetLink modem Note The remote user ID is only used with Patton xDSL rack cards To configure the remote user ID type the ID into the Remote User ID text box then click the Submit button located next to the Remote User ID text box to save the changes Note After submitting the card identification information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Clear Remote ID button If you want to delete the remote ID information click on the Clear Remote ID button then click on the Submit button Local Circuit ID localCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile Flash within the Model 1001MC To configure the local circuit ID type the ID into the Local Circuit ID text box then click the Submit button located next to the Local Circuit ID text box to save the changes Note After submitting the card identification information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Clear Local Circuit ID button If you want to delet
72. configuration to the DTE rate that is set here Clock Mode Local Remote This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink modems The display shows the Local clock mode rack card and then the remote clock mode as a single variable in the Local column The Remote column displays a read only field showing the remote units clocking mode This was done to avoid an illegal configuration of the NetLink mDSL modems For instance both units CAN NOT be set to internal clock The options list all pos sible clocking combinations Tx Data Sample Point bxdEdge 1 095 remotetxdEdge 1 095 This variable defines the sampling point that is used by the NetLink mDSL modems to read data from the DTE In most situations it should always be set to normal 0 In high speed applications there are situations that would require an inverted 1 sampling point TM From DTE dteTM 1 095 remotedteTM 1095 These MIB variables define whether you would like the modems to accept test mode requests from the DTE that is connected In normal applications this should be set to disable 1 When the application is using rear cards or interface modules that do not have loop back ability from the DTE such as the IM2RC IA Ethernet rear card this variable must be set to disable 1 In most situations if a DTE test mode is required it should be enable only during the time that the test is needed Framing Mode This bit defines the mode of operation of the interface The follow
73. displays the current version of code that is running in the NetLink El rack card modem Configuration Type configType This displays if the 2707RC is using the DIP switch control or software control for its configuration Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page MIB variables description 183 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Unit Configuration table This table shows the configurable MIB variables for the 2707RC card After changes are made select the Sub mit Query button at the bottom of the table and then place the Input Mode back to onLine 0 in the Model 2707RC Configuration page The following sections explain the MIB variables that are shown in the Unit Configuration table Line Format lineFormat This option should be set to G 703 unframed frame G703 0 Clock Mode clockMode2707RC This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink E1 modems The following options are available network CLK 0 internal CLK 1 e external CLK 2 DTE Rate dteRate2707RC This read only variable displays the DTE rate for the link This is the Nx64 kbps data rate selected by the number of activated channels Line Coding lineCoding2707RC This variable is used to select the G 703 line coding The following options are available code HDB3 0 HDB3 e code AMI 1 AMI Line Build Out lineBuildOut This is used to select the line build out The following options are available bo 7
74. e EA e etree 81 IT TS ETES O94 E a A T a EEE E E PET SEE A S 82 Processor Mode processorMode iaa ES 82 Ia a U ZTE E A TM A e 82 Model 1094 Configuration Slot page Configuration Status table description ess 82 Model Code localModelCode remoteModel Code once svecsesss 83 DR IO 83 CM ia 83 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management TM From DTE dteTM109 remotedte TM 1094 seene 83 HW Test Mode testModeInd1094 remotetestModeInd1094 ss 83 SW Test Mode testModeSet1094 remotetestModeSet1094 sss 83 Software Rev softVersion1094 remotesoftversion 1094 sese 83 Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description ese 84 Card Address Or HS e it id 84 Line Status eS cats O94 did 84 Processor Mode processor Mode 94 coincidan 84 Local Software Rev soft Version 1094 ii bae da lidia 84 Remote Software Rev remotesoftversion 1094 sss sss 85 Next Configuration TTT 85 DTE rate RRA iaa 85 Clock Mode Loca Remote serrr etate tre ita 85 Tx Data Sample Point txdEdge1095 remotetxdEdge1095 iii rte tete 85 TM From DTE dte T MTO94 remotedte LM 1094 n reote cssva ccevsescocss tte tree e terrae ain 85 Test Mode testModeSet1094 remotetestModeSet1094 conoocccnonucononononononaninanaconnanononanononanoconnecinnanecinanenono 85 Submit Query T etre reete Losec andes ORO iii 85 Clear Changes ME
75. each variable follows figure 119 Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Log SNMP System Config Help G Z 2 Z w lt x ie Z O Q Current System Information IP Address boxlpAddress Displays the IP address of the box IP Mask boxlpMask Displays the IP mask of the box Current Gateway boxGateway CURRENT SYSTEM INFORMATION IP Address 192 168 148 7 IP Mask 255 255 2550 Current Gateway 192 168 148 148 Modifying the IP addressing IP Address 192 168 148 7 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 148 148 Box Contact Information Box Location Support Desk Box Name Support Unit Box Contact Test Unit SNMP and HTTP Password Information Superuser Password superuser Superuser Password Verification User Password monitor User Password Verification Background Information Web Background Enabled Figure 119 System Information Displays the current gateway for the network System Information 246 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Modifying the IP addressing IP Address boxlpAddress This parameter defines the IP address of the box Type the address into the text box then if you have no other IP addressing entries to make click the Submit button IP Mask boxlpMask This parameter defines the IP mask of the box Type the address into the text box th
76. error 2 line up and line down SNMP trap messages to be sent Slot Configuration page MIB variables description 186 Chapter 9 Model 3088RC management Chapter contents A O Ora t dr TORITO 190 NN Oi 190 E T EN euet mE ET m ETE 190 Di paese eee NEST RET IS 191 Displaying the Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page loci 193 Making configuration changes co your 308 REN NTU ee mre a TTE 194 Displaying the Modeli3088RG GonphIsuratiohipage c euer EUM e eT d 195 Wisplavinesthe A apetece M T ENERO 197 Modem Information Rack X pape MIE yaa description o ro ea e eee e eae 198 Slots Available total Conna Slot e a ee e E RR T TET RIT TS 198 E ST SR TTS RTS E TIS H 198 Number o Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies merne eaae a a a E E 198 IacleProtectiongvtoderacs xb rotected tem Aereo a e er cee leer ee Maan M E 198 Submit oe codo 199 Power Supply a GII eee NITE TRENT eee EIER TET 199 Dowersupply2iStatus racleePower2IDUWII ecce Rb T eer Te 199 leaniRaele ada ad A Um mE 199 Crd T TETE REUS 199 ne Status GT iio coca STU BEI UNE a I REI 199 OO OE OE 200 EOS O Odd Sea EOP ERC 200 ad O ee ee 200 ocalModelBode local Co 2 Le T E Lu ME ETT 200 Remote Usa er TU IM SEP a ee de 200 Remote Mode Code renta rides 200 Protected 5 e TUNIS DS 201 Trocal tereeure H R AOT La T T URT esee eese cest Leute de epe en cvs toe et AE 201 Remote Ercilla ee RES TUNE SE 201 SubnmnEbuttol e UU UE ER ENERO 201 Model 3088R Contiguration Slot X pace MIB variablesidesct
77. following values can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data Modem Information Rack X page MIB variables description 199 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management testMode 3 Warnings warningCount This field displays the warnings that are associated with each modem installed in the system When warnings are present this field will be highlighted in yellow and the number of warnings will be listed For more infor mation on the cause of the warning you should view the System Log Warnings will be highlighted in yellow in the log The warning for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the warnings even after the number is cleared The warning count listed in the Model 1001MC column is the sum of all warnings for the system including the individual modems Errors errorCount This field displays the errors that are associated with each modem installed in the system When errors are present this field will be highlighted in red and the number of errors will be listed For more information on the cause of the error you should view the System Log Errors will be highlighted in red in the log The errors for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the errors even after the number is cleared The error count listed in the Mo
78. highlighted in yellow in the log The warning for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the warnings even after the number is cleared The warning count listed in the Model 1001MC column is the sum of all warnings for the system including the individual modems Errors errorCount This field displays the errors that are associated with each modem installed in the system When errors are present this field will be highlighted in red and the number of errors will be listed For more information on the cause of the error you should view the System Log Errors will be highlighted in red in the log The errors for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the errors even after the number is cleared The error count listed in the Model 1001MC column is the sum of all error s for the system including the individual modems Local User Id localUserID User supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Local Model Code localModelCode This column displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address The M
79. in 229 Total System Warnings boxWaruineNumbeb cree ctv E 229 TotaliSysten Errors ox iro olsun ber eet rer A 229 Immediate Actions cree ce Eee e LEE rey eee eee ees Pe eee RTE 230 H TNT senec eR cem UC Me UE 231 Import Export eO CI ESOS SES USER HIS e A cee vtucesaesucaresvescetosterse e EET 233 E 4 ecu Nec M eL M TUE Th e 233 A eec eme e E T Coan tee Gaerne rere de 235 OSO ae E 235 A e eee tee eere ee A RD ELM rr EE rr e rn 235 Appi system Conneura tone e ce ce ios 235 INES IEA IN lo e cee E E a T e ce 236 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 lt HTTP HTML web page reference Toral Slots Available totalConfigSlots canada do dida 236 Total Cards Installed totalActiveSlots ii ii airada dla 236 Power Supplies Installed boxPowerSupplies eene 236 Total System Warnings box Warning Number ves inids 236 Total System Eror boxErrorNumben aiii nales E EEE 236 Clear All System Alarme dear Alarms ii aida 236 Rack X Wop Level escindida A ido be 236 Rack X Enable rack X Pra blei vicario eie eee oreet espere ee ed E a LE EE e tone 237 View Rack X hyperlinls 5 epe pU REGIE E RETE IE dE 237 Address A EE 237 Total Slots Available rackXSlotsAvailable cccsssccsssscccssesscssscccssssccsssesscsscccsssscesssssssesscscessesessesessseens 237 Total Cards Installed rack XCardsInstalled 1 eee es 237 Power Supplies Installed rackXPowerSupplies eene 237 Total Errors rac
80. information is stored Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description 85 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management in volatile RAM until you place the Input Mode to onLine 0 This will tell the 1001MC to copy all of the configuration information into the NetLink HDSL configuration space Clear Changes Once configuration changes have been made and you have selected the Submit Query button if you decide not to implement these changes select the Clear Changes button This will set the configuration back to the settings that were there when this page was entered Set Default Configuration Selecting this button will place the default configuration into the Next Configuration table Slot Configuration page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Slot Configuration page From the Modem Information page the address column creates a list of hyperlinks to the Slot Configuration page associated with the specified address The Slot Configuration page can be used to set slot specific information related to the sys tem and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors and warning Note The information contained here is also available in the Model 1001MC manual and is listed here for ease of use Card Address nmsSlotID Displays the address of the card Local Model Code localModelCode Displays the model code of the NetLink modem in
81. installed in the 1095 standalone unit at the remote site When setting a unit for the external clock mode the unit must have an external clock source in order to make a link When using either an IM2RC K or an IMI K the K module will always provide the external clock for the unit so it is not necessary to have a G 703 G 704 link available When using any other type of serial inter face make sure that an external clock is provided by the DTE equipment or the modems will not link System Config 263 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Notes on clock mode settings The Clock Mode Setting determines the source of timing for the link Most applications will use one of the following configurations internal receiveRecover 0 external receiveRecover 1 There are special situations which would require the use of the external external 4 clock mode setting This setting should only be used when the application has an IM2RC K and a 1095RC in the rack system and a IM1 K and a 1095 standalone at the remote site If you are using any other interface cards do not use the exter nal external 4 configuration Note When your are using the external external 4 clock mode settings you must have the Framing Mode set to slotted for the local and remote units Notes on framing mode settings The Framing Mode Setting notifies the card of the type of interface it will be connected to When you are using an IM2RC K with a 1095
82. is applied see section Verifying 1001MC functioning on page 31 Installing the interface cables see section Connecting the cables on page 32 When you finish installing the 1001MC go to chapter 3 Getting started on page 36 Before you install Before installing and configuring your Model 1001MC make sure you have the following items at hand A VT100 terminal or a VT100 terminal emulator for connection to the RS 232 configuration port A null modem or a null modem cable to connect your VT100 terminal to the Model 1001MC An Ethernet connection to your local LAN A locally connected workstation e g PC that you can use to ping the 1001MC An IP address for the Model 1001MC The network address space and netmask The IP address for the default gateway of your LAN Checking the contents Verify that the shipping container holds the following items 1001MC front and rear cards 1001MC CD ROM cthat includes this manual Introduction 17 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot13 Slot12 Slot11 Slot10 Slot9 Slot8 Slot7 Slot6 Slot5 Slot4 Slot3 Slot2 Slot JD un 2 188 I 3 lt lt lt o s ea ea zu z zw zz a pad a a zu z zz zz o e S S 8 o o o o o o o o o o o o o s 32 32 a 2 S 2 2 al 3 8 S S 3 S S 5 TEENS mU SR SR SR SS SS E ges ssp o o o o o o o o o o o o o 2 a ss 55M5 8 8 8 BB IB B 8 8 8 8 3S8 8 s AE ER gt e a a E a a a e ES a
83. match the rack that it is installed in the Model 1001 MC may not find the card The address range that is polled is determined by the configuration of the system The system administrator must make sure that the software configuration within the Model 1001MC matches the hardware configura tion of the system The Model 1001MC uses the number of power supplies in the system to determine what the address range of the individual racks will be The number of power supplies installed in each rack is entered on the Modem Information page If the system is set for two power supplies installed the 1001 MC will automatically set the number of slots available displayed on the Modem Information page in the chassis to 13 If the system is set for a single power supply installed the 1001 MC will automatically set the number of slots available in the chassis to 15 Using this information the Model 1001MC will poll the specified address range in each rack Thus in a single power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from address 1 to address 15 Note The 1001MC is always address 0 Installing the Model 1001MC RS 232 daisy chain port cable 40 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 3 Getting started The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 16 in a redundant power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from addres
84. of the modem table Each table heading is a hyperlink to a help page that contains information about the column Card Address nmsSlotID This variable defines the address of the card The Model 1001MC will poll the cards using the addresses listed in the Card Address column If a modem is found with the same address it will be displayed in that row The address of the card is set up using the DIP switches on the card The address is also a hyperlink to the Model 1092ARC Configuration Slot page This page can be used to set slot specific information about the card Line Status The line status column on each View Rack page shows the current line status of each card Keep in mind that the more cards the 1001MC is managing the longer it will take for the line status field to update Displays the status of the line The following values can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data Modem Information page MIB variables description 58 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management testMode 3 Warnings warningCount This field displays the warnings that are associated with each modem installed in the system When warnings are present this field will be highlighted in yellow and the number of warnings will be listed For more infor mation on the cause of the warning you should view the System Log Warnings will be highlighted in yellow in
85. on page 116 Creating and modifying global configuration templates 113 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Protecting a Model 1001 rack from global configuration Do the following to protect a Model 1001 rack 6 Model 1095RC management 1 Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page see figure 54 Figure 55 on page 115 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Patton Electronics Home Page System Level Information S HOME E gsm T E Se ES US HEN E ES AS SBE IES L sepia ae System Overview E System Info app System Configuration CONFIG 1 0 ME Apply Configuration f e ire Apply System Test Mode uo SNMP Total Slots Available 15 E System Config Total Cards Installed 1 s E Help E Power Supplies Installed 1 7 Total System Warnings Total System Errors 0 O Update Z l Rack 1 Top Level Rack 1 Enable enabled 1 submit Address Range 1 15 Total Slots Available 4 15 i Total Cards Installed 5 Power Supplies Installed 1 Total Errors fo Total Warnings as ry ps 0 SG Apply Rack Configuration CONFIG 100 Apply contiguration Apply Test Mode Apply Test Mode cee Aue o NA Ts T 1l Figure 54 System Level Information page Creatin
86. page 252 for more information System Log Volatile Memory This page contains a log of messages that have been sent to the RAM storage area using the Min Priority for RAM variable in the Syslog Modify page Messages stored here will be lost if the box reboots see System Log Volatile Memory on page 256 for more information System Log Non Volatile Memory This page contains a log of messages that have been sent to the Flash storage are using the Min Priority for Flash Storage variable in the Syslog Modify page Messages stored here will be saved even if the box reboots see System Log Non Volatile Memory on page 257 for more information System Log 251 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Lud e K z O lt GE ie a E e Gu Q 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Config Help SYSTEM LOG Modify Daemons SysLog Daemon IP Address U 92 168 200 156 System Trap IP Address 192 168 200 254 Priority Min Priority for SysLog Daemon priorityDisable 1000 J Mn Priority for Flash Storage prioritySystem 80 Min Priority for RAM priorityOddity 40 Unix Facility s Maintenance Maintain Flash Storage Figure 122 System Log Modify System Log Modify System Log System Modify System Log Log Modify The System Log Modify page see figure 122 allows you to modify the s
87. protection option if you are finished making changes to the cur rent rack card click on the Submit button located at the right side of the rack card s row in the table to save the changes Note Setting the protection to normal 0 will enable the rack card to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Note After submitting the protection setting you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Local Circuit ID localCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed within the Configure Cards page or from the Slot Configuration page After clicking the Sub mit Query button to input the string to the management system you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed from the Configure Cards web page or from the Slot Configuration page Submit button Click the Submit button to input the changes to the management system After clicking the Submit button you are required to select t
88. running settings You may want to issue a Record Current Configuration on the home page before dumping the configuration Export Flash IMPORT FLASH CONFIGURATION FROM FILE If you have previously exported the system configuration to a file then you can submit that file below and the system will update its flash configuration from the data saved in the file After this operation the system should be rebooted to activate the new settings The configuration is loaded directly into the flash and so does NOT immediately modify any settings WARNING This operation will erase whatever settings you currently have in the system Browse Submit Query Figure 108 The Import Export web management page Configure Cards Clicking on the Configure Cards hyperlink displays the System Level Information page This page is the starting point for the configuration and management of your Patton NetLink modems This page enables you to quickly identify potential problems and view statistics on a per rack basis You can also disable racks from this level For more information see section System Level Information on page 235 Introduction 226 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference From this page you can select a View Rack hyperlink that will display the Modem Information Page for the selected rack Modem Information Page The Modem Information Page consists of a table that displays top level information about
89. set your addresses starting with address 1 at the far left of your rack farthest away from the power supplies and increment the numbers by one as you go from left to right Set ting the addresses in this manner will make configuration easier as you start using the web page manage ment An example of this is below Installing NetLink modem cards 27 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 NMS PS2 PS1 Figure 7 shows the bit setting to configure the address Table 9 shows examples of address settings c Least significant bit LSB Hexadecimal Decimal ls Address Address NN significant bit MSB ON E ESL ES DD 4 On binary 0 0x01 1 l A eli 9 Off binary 1 12 34 56 7 8 ON 0x02 2 2 mp P P m e m 12345678 PETET 0x10 16 16 EHE EE 12345678 ON 0xB5 181 181 BEBE 12345678 Figure 7 Bit setting to configure the address Table 9 Examples of address settings Hex Address Decimal Address S3 8 S3 7 S3 6 S3 5 S3 4A S3 3 S3 2 S3 1 0x01 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 0x02 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON Ox10 16 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OxB5 181 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF Hardware setup for a Model 2707RC The following must be done to configure your Model 2707RC hardware for use with the Model 1001MC net work
90. shows the current line status of each card Keep in mind that the more cards the 1001MC is managing the longer it will take for the line status field to update Displays the status of the line The following values can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data Modem Information Rack X page MIB variables description 141 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management testMode 3 Warnings warningCount This field displays the warnings that are associated with each modem installed in the system When warnings are present this field will be highlighted in yellow and the number of warnings will be listed For more infor mation on the cause of the warning you should view the System Log Warnings will be highlighted in yellow in the log The warning for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the warnings even after the number is cleared The warning count listed in the Model 1001MC column is the sum of all warnings for the system including the individual modems Errors errorCount This field displays the errors that are associated with each modem installed in the system When errors are present this field will be highlighted in red and the number of errors will be listed For more information on the cause of the error you should view the System Log Errors will be highlighted in red in
91. supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from address 1 to address 15 Note The 1001MC is always address 0 The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 16 In a redundant power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from address 1 to address 13 The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 14 The daisy chained racks are set up in the same manner with 13 addresses being available in a redundant system and 15 addresses being available in single supply system When you disable a rack the addresses are still set aside for that rack space If a power supply is removed the addressing will not change unless you make the change through the 1001MC web pages This allows easy service of the power supplies If the address is O all ON position then the unit will run completely from its DIP switch configuration This can be useful for testing circuits independently of the management system If an address is placed on the switch the unit will boot from its stored flash configuration and begin looking for poll commands from the Model 1001MC Switch S2 allows an 8 bit address to be assigned to a link The following rules apply to setting the address Bit S2 8 is the least significant bit A bit set to ON is considered a 0 A bit set to OFF is considered a J Patton Elec
92. system you should set this variable to 2 this will inform the Model 1001MC that there should be 2 power supplies in the system Note The 1001MC does not automatically detect the number of installed power supplies It must be configured here Modem Information Rack X 239 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Rack Protection Mode If you want to protect all Model 1095RC 2701RC and 2707RC rack cards installed in the current rack from being globally configured select protected 1 from the pop up menu then click the Submit button For more information about the system configuration feature refer to section System Config on page 259 Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Submit button After you have defined the number of power supplies installed in the rack and the rack protection mode click on the Submit button to save the changes Power Supply 1 Status Displays the current status of power supply 1 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 If the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Power Supply 2 Status Displays the current status of power supply 2 as one of the following e available 0
93. the El interface This is an error counter that records word errors in the CRC4 The counter is disabled during loss of sync This number is accumulating in the 1001MC Note Alarm counters severity level is controlled by the Line Down Indica tiom level The following options are available none Only Syslog message will be sent warning Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Warning and web page warning counter will be incremented error Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Error the web page error counter will be incremented and an SNMP trap message will be sent The Clear Counter button This button clears all alarm counters Model 3088RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 203 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management CRC4 Error Alarm Threshold crc4Threshold The valid setting for the threshold is 0 to 255 By setting a threshold the CRC4 Alarm counter will not issue the error warning Syslog and SNMP Trap message unless the accumulating CRC4 Error Counter is greater than the threshold The Record Current Configuration button will store the setting of the alarm threshold Input Mode mode3088RC The following settings are available onLine 0 e superVisoryMode 1 To make configuration changes to the NetLink E1 NTUs you must first set this bit to superVisoryMode 1 When the Input Mode is set to superVisoryModel the Modify Configura
94. the download progresses When the download is complete if you are also going to download the latest 1095 RC Key software go to step 8 Otherwise go to step 12 Remove the card from the rack chassis Click on the Download 1095RC Key button to download the 1095RC Key software Note Do not install the unit into the rack until you have selected the soft ware that you want to download Select the View Status hyperlink see figure 53 Slide the card into the chassis You will see the download status updated in the window as the download progresses Remove the card from the rack and return DIP switches S2 6 and S 7 to their original positions Note The front panel LEDs on the NetLink modem will flash when the download is complete Return to the modem configuration page and verify the proper configuration for your modem Congratulation The software has been successfully upgraded Using the Download page to upgrade 1095RC software 112 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Creating and modifying global configuration templates Model 1095RC rack cards can be configured globally by templates you create If you use this capability you have the option to globally configure some or all Model 1095RC modems in multiple racks or those in just one rack Note Due to the many different applications that are supported care must be taken when setting the configuration of your modems that you avoid using combinations
95. the log The errors for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the errors even after the number is cleared The error count listed in the Model 1001MC column is the sum of all errors for the system including the individual modems Local User Id localUserID User supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Local Model Code localModelCode This column displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address The Model Code is also a hyperlink into the configuration page for the NetLink modem and its remote unit The model code information is passed to the Model 1001MC after the card is placed online The Model 1001MC is auto sensing meaning that when a card is found or lost the information will automatically be updated in the sys tem You are not required to setup the Model Code information for each slot When a card is removed from the system the Model Code will be erased and an error or warning will be displayed for the slot this depends on the settings in the Slot Configuration page Remote User Id remoteUserID Note This feature is not supporte
96. the log The warning for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the warnings even after the number is cleared The warning count listed in the Model 1001MC column is the sum of all warnings for the system including the individual modems Errors errorCount This field displays the errors that are associated with each modem installed in the system When errors are present this field will be highlighted in red and the number of errors will be listed For more information on the cause of the error you should view the System Log Errors will be highlighted in red in the log The errors for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the errors even after the number is cleared The error count listed in the Model 1001MC column is the sum of all error s for the system including the individual modems Local User Id localUserID User supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Local Model Code localModelCode This column displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address The Model Code is also a hyper
97. two modems Protected You can protect individual rack cards from being globally configured by setting the pop up menu from nor mal 0 to protected 1 After you have set the protection option if you are finished making changes to the cur rent rack card click on the Submit button located at the right side of the rack card s row in the table to save the changes Note Setting the protection to normal 0 will enable the rack card to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Note After submitting the protection setting you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Local Circuit ID localCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed within the Configure Cards page or from the Slot Configuration page After clicking the Sub mit Query button to input the string to the management system you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed from the Configure Cards web page or from t
98. waminafl Submit Query Z Z z fume P a e _ Z V A e Figure 72 Slot Configuration Page Starting from the HOME page to access the Slot Configuration page for the 2701RC click on the following links Home menu Configure Cards menu View Rack rack number X in the Card Address column for the 2701RC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 72 the 2701 RC was installed in slot 4 Figure 73 on page 140 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 139 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management View Rack 1 1001MC Configure Cards Information System Lo System Log SNMP MIB System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 73 Web page navigation to Slot Configuration Page System Level z Modem Infor Information mation Rack X Record Information Hard Reset For more information about items on the Slot Configuration page see Slot Configuration page MIB variables description on page 153 Modem Information Rack X page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Modem Information Rack X page Starting from the HOME page click on the following links Home menu gt Configure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number Slots Available totalConfigSlots Displays the number of configurable slots a
99. 01 rack from global configuration Do the following to protect a Model 1001 rack Creating and modifying global configuration templates 155 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management l Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page see figure 74 pe io System Level Information HOME About 1001 MC System Overview Impo ore Apply 1095 System Configuration None Created Apply Configuration Configure Cards System Info Apply 1095 System Test Mode oiin z Apply Test Mode DownLoad Apply 2701RC System Configuration 0 zl Apply Configuration System Log Apply 2701RC System Test Mode ofi 2 Apply Test Mode SNMP System Confi Total Slots Available 28 System Contig Help Total Cards Installed 11 Z 25 e z Q P ad Z le io e Figure 74 System Level Information page Power Supplies Installed 3 Total System Warnings D Total System Errors 0 Update Clear All System Alarms Rack 1 Top Level Rack 1 Enable enabled 1 Submit Query View Rack 1 Address Range 1 15 Total Slots Available 15 Total Cards Installed 10 Power Supplies Installed 1 Power Supply 1 Status Status available 0 Total Errors 0 Total Warnings 0 Apply 1095 Rack Configuration None Created gt Apply Configuration Apply 1095 Te
100. 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 03 08 08 08 08 03 08 03 04 04 04 04 04 03 04 04 03 08 03 08 03 08 03 08 00 00 00 00 feonfigData 6 0x01 00 00 00 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 03 03 03 03 08 03 08 03 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 03 03 08 08 08 03 08 08 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 08 08 08 08 208 08 08 03 04 04 04 04 04 03 04 0 4 08 08 03 08 03 03 08 08 00 00 00 00 Figure 115 Typical access server flash memory configuration data To save the displayed data as a text file select the Save option on your browser see figure 116 For example under Netscape select File gt Save As A dialog box will display enabling you to save the contents of the export parameters to a text file Select the location where you want the file stored type a file name and click Save http 192 49 110253 seve config tt WRARERERRERERRTRRHRTATMAERTARRARRARTRATARAT RA nh m mes mmm Flash configuration data for 1001MC The data below is the of your configurable Pils save As option c Mme voccm agaa file can be reloaded You may edit and comm but do not modify any do not put an at sy START CONFIGURATION D e conc 5 04 04 04 04 30 8 fconfigData 9 03 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 oo o 00 Figure 116 Saving the access server flash memory configuration data as a text file Import Export 234 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Import Configurat
101. 094 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description 83 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description The Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page enables you to update the configuration of the 1094ARC NetLink HDSL modems that are installed in the system After making changes to the configuration on this page select Back to return to the Model 1094 Configuration Slot page then select onLine as the Input Mode and finally select Submit Query to send the new information to the Model 1001MC over the network Note Ifthe NetLink HDSL modems are not connected and changes made to the remote configuration will be lost after the units link up All parameters in the Local column can be changed at any time The following sections describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page Card Address nmsSlotID Displays the address of the selected NetLink HDSL modem Line Status lineStatus1094 This variable displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 In this mode the units are linked up and ready to send data testMode 3 Processor Mode processorMode1094 This variable displays the status of the processor running on the NetLink HDSL There are four values that are significant to you normal 0 When the pr
102. 1 13 Import Export Total Slots Available 13 Configure Cards System Info Total Cards Installed 11 DownLoad Power Supplies Installed 2 System Log Power Supply 1 Status available 0 SNMP Power Supply 2 Status System Config RT available 0 Hel Total Errors 221 Total Warnings 0 Apply 1095 Rack Configuration None Created Apply Configuration Apply 1095 Test Mode off 1 Apply Test Mode Apply 2701RC Rack Configuration Example 0 Apply Configuration Apply 2701RC Test Mode l off 1 Apply Test Mode Rack Protection Mode normal D Apply Protection Clear Alarms Clear Rack 1 Alarms Figure 82 System Level Information page Rack section 2 Locate the rack section of the System Level Information page that you will configure in figure 82 Rack 1 Top Level is being modified 3 Use the Apply Rack Configuration pop up menu see figure 82 to select the template you want to apply 4 Click the Apply Configuration button The template has been applied Creating and modifying global configuration templates 166 Chapter 8 Model 2707RC management Chapter contents A O OTE Soo TOROS 169 NN SEID HIH oer e re tU eM UIT UE UE A 169 E eese totem ET m TEES 169 Dip theModemlniormanon ESTE RTT IN 170 Displaying the Model 2707 R Configuration Slop page no SEU eee seen ceeee eter ices 172
103. 1095RC you wish to manage gt Modify Configuration you first have to change input mode from onLine to super VisoryMode Figure 47 on page 98 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page see Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description on page 107 Configuration and management 97 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 1001MC Configure System Level Cards Information System Information System Log Login HOME Record Information Hard Reset SNMP MIB System Log Modi System Log RAM System Log Flash 6 Model 1095RC management View Rack 1 Cord Slot Address Configuration Modem Infor mation Rack X D Modem Configuration E Local Model Code View Rack 8 Supervisory Submit Query Modify Configuration Next Configuration Figure 47 Web page navigation to Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page Configuration and management 98 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Displaying the Slot Configuration page The Slot Configuration page see figure 48 is used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats that slot in the case of errors or warnings Patton Electronics Home Page SLOT CONFIGURATION PAGE HOME Card Address 1 About 1001MC Local Model Code
104. 2 Respond to RDL request enabled U y enabled 0 TM from DTE enabled 0 y enabled 0 y Enable Switches enabled 1 y enabled 1 y Test Mode off 1 y off SubmitQuery Figure 24 Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page for the 1092ARC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Local Model Code for the 1092ARC you wish to manage gt Modify Configuration you first have to change input mode from onLine to superVisory Mode Figure 25 on page 55 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page see Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description on page 63 Configuration and management 54 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 1001MC Configure System Level Cards Information System Information System Log Login HOME Record Information Hard Reset SNMP MIB System Log Modi System Log RAM System Log Flash 4 Model 1092ARC management View Rack 1 Cord Slot Address Configuration Modem Infor mation Rack X D Modem Configuration E Local Model Code View Rack 8 Supervisory Submit Query Modify Configuration Next Configuration Figure 25 Web page navigation to Model 1092 Co
105. 255 255 0 Gateway 209 49 110 1 Save these settings y n Y 5 After entering the information the system will prompt you to save the IP settings Type Y to save the new settings 6 The Model 1001MC will prompt you for changes to the hardware revision that your unit requires as follows Hardware Initialization Current Hardware Revision B Change Hardware Revision y n n Note In most cases you should select N to keep the current revision The hardware revision should only be changed if you are upgrading to the latest firmware release Booting the Model 1001MC 38 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 3 Getting started Note To RESET to factory configuration the user must type e three times anytime during the boot sequence upon power up The console will display the following messages Are you sure you want to erase current configuration y n y If y is entered the current configuration will be erased and the factory default configuration will be restored Are you sure you want to erase current configuration y n n If 7 is entered the boot sequence will continue without any changes to configuration 7 Turn power off and on again reboot the system with the new settings After your system reboots log into the box using a standard web browser from your network 8 Disconnect the cable from the rear panel RS 232 configuration port of the 1001MC 9 Ifyou are installing a daisy chain cable to the RS 232 configuration por
106. 5ohm 0 75 ohm e bo 120ohm 1 120 ohm FP Switches frntSwitch This selects if the front panel toggle switches used for loopbacks and pattern generators are enabled 1 or dis abled 0 H W Test mode testModeSetind This read only variable displays any test mode invoked from the toggle switches and DTE test mode lines If the unit is in a test mode this option will be highlighted in blue S W Test mode testModeSet2707RC This is used to invoke test modes through the NMS The only valid options for the 2707RC are off 0 lal 4 Local loopback Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page MIB variables description 184 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Loop Timeout loopTo This selects the amount of time that the unit will remain in test mode when the remote test mode is invoked If the responding unit is not taken out of test mode within this time period the unit will automatically time out and return to normal data mode Test Mode from DTE testModeDTE When enabled the 2707RC will respond to the LL signal coming from the DTE Config Type configType The following options are available e switch config 0 The 2707RC is using the DIP switch control for its configuration software config 1 The 2707RC is using the software control for its configuration User Id UserID Displays the user supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is st
107. A O e E 287 Warranty Service and Returned Merchandise Authorizations RMAs edere TENET 287 VETE T T 287 Mco E T TOO E RO ERE CONO E UNT 287 0 T eem A N S N Oe Pee 287 Returmioncreditpolicy ce e rece UTE 288 IND numbers Ne E E ER EE EE 288 Shipping eet MI E 288 286 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 12 Contacting Patton for assistance Introduction This chapter contains the following information e Contact information describes how to contact Patton technical support for assistance e Warranty Service and Returned Merchandise Authorizations RMAs contains information about the RAS warranty and obtaining a return merchandise authorization RMA Contact information Patton Electronics offers a wide array of free technical services Ifyou have questions about any of our other products we recommend you begin your search for answers by using our technical knowledge base Here we have gathered together many of the more commonly asked questions and compiled them into a searchable database to help you quickly solve your problems Online support available at www patton com e E mail support e mail sent to support patton com will be answered within 1 business day Telephone support standard telephone support is available Monday through Friday from 8 00 A M to 5 00 P M EST 8 00 to 17 00 UTC 5 Monday through Friday by calling 1 301 975 1007 Warranty Service and Returned Merchandise Authorizations RMAs
108. A centre prm o e e RR ida EH EPICUREI HERD RETE CO sedan daa 206 Model 3088RC Configuration page MIB variables description eerte 206 DSL Link St tedlmng5tatus9088 2 tet aos 206 DSL nkState dSLSyncState23088 ootesteent TO ERREUR ceret Se Pre EN OEKER BETIS R 206 Software Versi n soft VersionS 088 RC coe as 206 Configuration Type c nfig Type conil 207 Unit Configuration table voi ai en pe e a e ra Mat i ined 207 Clock Mode cloekMode30898RQ oca 207 DTE Rate dteRate308SRQ sica c rrt rc tr e eterne teen reete cree aeo eee eeu eiae enne reb rx Da Fed oculis 207 TX Clock Invert teClockInvett3088RQ A Cot tereti rebut ets 207 DSL Link Enable dslEinkEnable3088RC 3 5 3 nter te tette ra rte rore creek eb eR 207 Line Probe ImeProbe3088RQ cusco 207 Line Coding lineCoding30898RG TTT 207 Line Buld Out MieBuldO a is 207 Tx Clock Timing o Bio M 208 Software Test Mode testModeSet3088RC esee ener taona aha Rana Ranna baa 209 RDL Response v54L00p tic ecco tette tere etre te trei A pep ve RUN 209 PRP Swale eS CLE WVU 0 cu irse aene ds laa toas 209 Slot Configuration page MIB variables descriptions 209 Card Address nmsSlotD arar a a aa aa dai tdci 209 Local Model Code localMModelCode 4 diia 209 View Rack X hyperlink siii linia is 209 Card Identification Information ii ibas 209 Local User Id He TT Hp as 209 Remote User Id remote User si cec e te to acces roe tet he eit ee
109. After logging in the system displays the HOME page see figure 107 Patton Electronics Home Page Pe Electronics To HOME 4 About 1001 MC s ZH no iR Software Version 2 3 1 e Configure Cards Software Date Code Apr 15 2003 09 47 20 z ME System Info Box Name Support Unit E DownLoad Box Contact Test Unit SUE System Log S a4 SNMP Box Location Support Desk T System Config Running Since Last Boot 85 days 0 hrs 7 min 38 sec r s STATUS OF Support Unit OQ Q Total System Slots Available 115 e Total Active Slots 5 Total System Warnings 0 Total System Errors IMMEDIATE ACTIONS Figure 107 HOME page HOME The HOME page displays a quick overview of the system including error and warning indications software information box names number of modems installed and so on On the left side of the HOME page is the Navigation View The list on the left side of the screen allows you to navigate to any page from this point The navigation page will always be available to you so you can change from one page to the next The Record Current Configuration button lets you store configuration changes made to the box Note Ifconfiguration changes are not stored into memory they will be lost if the unit is powered down Introduction 225 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference The Hard Reset button forces the 1001 MC to perform a reset This
110. C K and a 1095RC in the rack system and a IM1 K and a 1095 standalone at the remote site If you are using any other interface cards do not use the exter nal external 4 configuration Note When your are using the external external 4 clock mode settings you must have the Framing Mode set to slotted for the local and remote units Notes on framing mode settings The Framing Mode Setting notifies the card of the type of interface it will be connected to When you are using an IM2RC K with a 1095RC rack card the system administrator should set the Local Clock Mode to external either external receiveRecover 1 or external external 4 and the Local Framing Mode to slotted When you are using an IM1 K and a 1095 standalone at the remote site the system administrator should set the Clock Mode to external external 4 and the Remote Framing Mode to slotted Illegal configuration messages If you are receiving an invalid configuration indication after creating a configuration it is resulting from an illegal combination of variables In most cases the cause of the problem has to do with the Framing Mode vari able Patton DSL modems should only be set to the slotted mode when you are using an IM2RC K with the 1095RC or an IMI K with the 1095 standalone unit Also if you are using a IM2RC K or IMI K interface card the 1095 1095RC must always be set to the external clock mode Review the table below for a list of valid configurations that can be used with
111. C v Running test mode diagnotics Test mode diagnostics can be performed as follows On the entire system Io test the entire system go to the System Level Information page and locate the Sys tem Overview section Select the desired test from the Apply System Test Mode pop up menu then click on the Apply Test Mode button to initiate the test Onan individual rack To test a rack go to the System Level Information page and locate the Top Level rack section for the rack you will be testing Select the desired test from the Apply Test Mode pop up menu then click on the Apply Test Mode button to initiate the test Note An analyzer ParaScope 3000 WAN Analyzer or equivalent will help you to isolate the problem Maintenance Periodic maintenance Consult the rack chassis user manual for information on preventative maintenance such as cleaning the chassis air cooling vents to remove accumulated dust Calibration The Model 1001MC requires no calibration Replacing the Model 1001MC If you isolate a problem to the Model 1001MC replace the front and rear cards as follows 1 Remove the replacement Model 1001MC front and rear cards from their shipping container and place them near the chassis in which the malfunctioning Model 1001MC is located Note The Model 1001MC is hot swappable so it is not necessary to deac tivate the rack chassis before replacing the cards Maintenance 284 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 11 Tro
112. C web pages This allows easy service of the power supplies Switch S3 allows a decimal address to be assigned to a link The following rules apply to setting the address 3 1 is the LSB and S3 8 is the MSB e Patton Electronics suggests that you set your addresses starting with address 1 at the far left of your rack farthest away from the power supplies and increment the numbers by one as you go from left to right Set ting the addresses in this manner will make configuration easier as you start using the web page manage ment An example of this is below 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 NMS PS2 PSI Installing NetLink modem cards 30 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Figure 7 shows the bit setting to configure the address Table 9 shows examples of address settings Hexadecimal Decimal Least significant bit LSB Address Address m significant bit MSB ON p ES E BD A On binary 0 TOME En P 9 Off binary 1 123456738 ON 0x02 2 2 ll m ln 12345678 mmm mmm 0x10 16 16 la E 12345678 ON a 0xB5 181 181 BB BE 12345678 Figure 8 Bit setting to configure the address Table 10 Examples of address settings Hex Address Decimal Address 3 8 S3 7 S3 6 S3 5 S3 4 S3 3 S3 2 S3 1 0x01 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 0x02 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON Ox10 16 ON ON ON
113. C with its last set of stored parameters As these fields are updated in the Model 1001MC the yellow highlighting will disap pear signifying that the information has been updated After the local and remote units are linked the units will begin updating the remote information in the table and Line Status set to datamode 2 e Ifa rack card is installed in the rack without a customer premise unit connected the remote information will be left as either none or highlighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified The following sections define the MIB variables that are shown in the Configuration Status table Configuration Status configStatus270 1 RC This is the title of the status table and displays the configuration status of the rack card The following status can be displayed Negotiating 0 The 1001MC is receiving the rack card s configuration for the first time Static 1 The 1001MC is showing the updated and correct configuration for the 2701 RC ImplementingChanges 2 The 1001MC is updating configuration changes to the 2701RC Local Model Code localModelCode remoteModelCode These variables display the local and remote models codes for the units that were found in the specified address Model 2701RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 146 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Line Format lineFormat The following status variables can be displayed e u
114. CHE EHE NEUE 239 SPEAR aa 243 System Inforo ninio PEE Ret Eee tete aee ee e iui ici 246 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Contents 1 1 1 t Download cosine 249 gb M 251 System Los Modify s ioi tme cere tt het OE iia 252 System Log Volatile Meno 2 aient m da i a 256 System Log Non Volatile Mendaro e di 257 UM it ib 258 Systemi Con ii AA AAA a 259 gt T H 275 Troubleshooting and maintenance mcommmmssmsmmmmammmsrmmmmmmmrrmrrrre 276 IO UC ii AAA A cach Siena E AE 277 Troubleshooting the TOQUMC Pack Cards aii tenere rie cett 277 Troubleshooting network malfunctions ui ia 278 1001 MC test mode diagnostics ita 282 Maintenance 284 Contacting Patton for assistance M 286 ITS viii PEE 287 Contact TT TTT 287 Warranty Service and Returned Merchandise Authorizations RMAs eec 287 About this guide This guide describes installing and operating a Patton Electronics 1001MC NetLink SNMP Management Card This section describes the following Who should use this guide see Audience How this document is organized see Structure Typographical conventions and terms used in this guide see Typographical conventions used in this docu ment on page 7 Audience This guide is intended for use by qualified systems administrators and network engineers to configure and manage th
115. DE PATTON Ma ElectronicsTo Model 1001MC NetLink SNMP Management Card Operations Guide I K NetLink NMS Power 60 09 10 6 9 ro Li G G PPP Poll amp Fault Sales Office 1 301 975 1000 Technical Support 1 301 975 1007 E mail support patton com WWW www patton com Document Number 022021U Rev F Part Number O7M1001MC Revised May 19 2008 Patton Electronics Company Inc 7622 Rickenbacker Drive Gaithersburg MD 20879 USA tel 1 301 975 1000 fax 1 301 869 9293 support 1 301 975 1007 url www patton com e mail support patton com Copyright Statement Copyright O 2008 Patton Electronics Company All rights reserved Trademark Statement The terms NetLink KiloModem and MegaLink I are trademarks of Patton Electronics Company All other trademarks presented in this document are the property of their respective owners Notices The information contained in this document is not designed or intended for use as critical components in human life support systems equipment used in hazardous environments or nuclear control systems Patton Electronics Company disclaims any express or implied warranty of fitness for such uses The information in this document is subject to change without notice Patton Elec tronics assumes no liability for errors that may appear in this document Any software described in this document is furnished under license and may be used or copied only i
116. Info Unit Configuration DownLoad System Log Line Format fame7041 2 Clock Mode intemaCLK 1 SNMP x DTE Rate 11792 Line Coding code HDB3 0 2 System Config Help CRC Framing disabled 0 CAS Multi Framing disabled 0 Line Build Out tbo 1200hm Tx Clock Timing intemal 2 HW Test Mode ofl Software Test Mode off 1 z RDL Response Tanki FP Switch enabled T T Pattern Select fivel 1 y Loop Timeout no imeout 3 z RDL Type _ v4 2 Config Type software config t Test Mode DTE disabled o User ID ID 1Local Clear Changes Set Default Configuration Figure 70 Model 2701 Configuration page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 2701 Configuration page for the 2701RC click on the fol lowing links Home menu Configure Cards menu View Rack rack number model2701RC xxx x in the Local Model Code column for the 2701 RC you wish to manage Modify Configuration you first have to change input mode from onLine to superVisoryMode Figure 71 on page 138 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Model 2701 Configuration page see Model 2701 Configuration page MIB variables description on page 149 Configuration and management 137 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 1001MC Configure System Level Cards Information System Information Syst
117. MC Model 3088RC Configuration page MIB variables description The Model 3088RC Configuration page enables you to update the configuration of the 3088RC NetLink E1 NTU modems that are installed in the system After making changes to the configuration on this page select Back to return to the Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page then select onLine as the Input Mode and finally select Submit Query to send the new information to the Model 1001MC over the network Starting from the HOME page click on the following links Home menu gt Configure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number gt model3088RC xxx x in the Local Model Code column gt change input mode to Supervisory gt Modify Configura tion Note Ifthe NetLink El NTU modems are not connected and changes made to the remote configuration will be lost after the units link up All parameters in the Local column can be changed at any time The following sections describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 3088RC Configuration Configuration page DSL Link State lineStatus3088 This variable displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed success 1 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data deactivated 2 in progress 3 DSL Link State dSLSyncState3088 This variable displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed acquiring s
118. MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed from the Configure Cards web page or from the Slot Configuration page Submit button Click the Submit button to input the changes to the management system After clicking the Submit button you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Note After submitting the remote circuit ID information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Model 2701RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 2701 RC Configuration Slot X page See figure 68 on page 135 Starting from the HOME page click on the following links Home menu gt Config ure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number gt model2701RC xxx x in the Local Model Code column Model 2701RC Configuration Slot nmsSlotlD Displays the address of the NetLink E1 G 703 G 704 NTU The address is defined by the DIP switch setting of S3 and S4
119. MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Input Mode mode2 01RC 2 il ide 146 Model 2701 Configuration Slot page Configuration Status table description ss 146 Configuration Status configStatus2701 RGQ t rre tre iitd 146 Local Model Code localModelCode remoteModelCode eee 146 Line Format lineFormat ds 147 Clock Mode elocl Mode 7 OU RC ici add lbs 147 DTE Raten dteRate27 OU T 147 Line Coding line Coding 70URC iii ci ti dodo 147 CRCA Framing GIC T 147 GAS Mul raming Cas MB tion ee niei 147 Line Build Out ime Bud Ut dra cil 147 Tx Clock Timing txClock 2 3 ida ito inci a 147 SW HW Test Mode testModeSetInd ccccecscscssscscssssscssssescssccscssseccssscecsscssssssescsescessssesessssesesesesesssesees 147 SW Test Mode teseModeSet2701BQ c eeteetpec ii 148 RDL Response v54 Loop epit rtt dc 148 EP Swrtches frhtSWwitch obere dede beet ich D DEDE iia 148 Pattern Select patternSelect minoica nr 148 Loop Time Out loop 0 zelda 148 RIDE type dll ype picaro iii dio ibi 149 Configuration Type config TYDE mitin ii 149 TM fron DTE trestModeDTE ii di 149 Software Version softVersion2 01R Oia tics 149 Reser Duttofi iii bd 149 Model 2701 Configuration page MIB variables description eicere e rentrer eL eese tuor epis 149 Line Status lineStatus27 0 ERG i34 ricette rra ch ra hee dt e iba ED EE Re a Rete aee eds 149 Software Version softVer
120. MP workstation to configure and monitor multiple Patton NetLink cards racks and their connected standalone units ka Qu NetLink NMS Power 09 09 10 0 9 ro L G G ppp Poll Fault Figure 1 Model 1001MC NetLink Management Card The management card has the following features e Connects to the SNMP workstation via a 10Base T Ethernet RJ 45 connection e Uses a standard web browser Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator for example to configure the HTTP HTML management screens Supports generic network management software and MIB walking tools Functions as an SNMP proxy agent for Patton NetLink rack cards and their remote standalone units FLASH upgradeable through FTP connection e User selectable traps on a per card basis Compatible with the following rack cards Model 1092ARC KiloModem 2 or 4 wire Baseband Modem with 2B1Q Encoding Model 1094ARC NetLink 1 152 Mbps HDSL Modem Model 1095RC NetLink 2 wire 2 Mbps mDSL Modem Model 2701RC G 703 G 704 Network Termination Unit NTU Model 2707RC G 703 NTU Model 2710RC T1 FT1 CSU DSU Model 2715RC G 703 G 704 NTU Introduction 11 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 1 Introduction Model 3088RC G SHDSL V 35 M34 Model 3088RC G SHDSL X 21 DB15 Model 3088RC G SHDSL El Dual BNC amp RJ 45 Model 3088RC G SHDSL Ethernet BR RJ 45 Note Your specific model of 1001MC may not support all of the models listed above The 1001MC front a
121. Making configuration changes co your REN NTU S a 173 Displaying the Model 2707RG Configuration Configuration page ote 174 Wisplavingsthe A ico 176 Modem Information par e eene TUNER TUE 177 HA ios 177 Modems Installed Car E E 177 Number of Power Supplies ackoxPowerSupplies TUA RITUUM 177 PaccProtecHon viodeweeet EE E 1077 Submit OOOO 178 Bower Supp TEE 178 Bower Supply 2S E 178 Clear Race ed ee e EUN E PEE RIUM EU 178 reb De esse S LOCI eet EUREN eL EE 178 lea I T 178 Nares GwarnineC outils a ese T eeu aN ETE NEST TESTS 179 Errors error ount bsc eor cocer e c oen mea Ie eU EEC ECT e aM TU TON ONO 179 ad O Une ee eee ee 179 ocaliModelBode local Mo dd Ed ne ee ener 179 Remote Usemid Ta O 179 Remote ModelCodelremoteModel Code ide 179 Protected Io 180 IE ES H E AOT La e o A A MEHR 180 Se aT ETS HIST Ee STE DN e EE UTE E 180 Subnntbuttolee T pry rea e errr ENSURE EUROS 180 Model 2707 RG Configuration Slot pace MIBvariables description e e eee 181 Model 2707 RE Configuration Slot inms Slob eer E E wees rete eeee 181 kine Status neta a AE A EE A A E 181 Input Mode ANO E E ETT dee T EMEN 181 Model 2707RC Configuration Slot X page Configuration Status table description sss 181 Confiouraton Status contas cats ains 182 Model Code localModelCode remoteModelCode mrenea anenee eae aea ee e 182 ETE RES S T AAE P E ce E E E A unter oe eas EE eels 182 Auca Mode cdo Md A sere cess eee eae anc a an ene Es SL eC 182 DEA
122. Mode1095 Displays the status of the processor running on the NetLink mDSL There are four values that are significant to you e normal 0 When the processor is in normal 0 mode the NetLink mDSL modem is monitoring itself and sending the status information to the Model 1001MC internalProcessing 1 When the processor is in the internalProcessing 1 mode it is either busy down loading code to the internal DSP or setting the data pump negotiating 2 When the processor is in the negotiating 2 mode the card was just brought online and the NetLink mDSL is setting up the configuration parameters within the Model 1001MC lineDown 3 At startup all of the fields will be highlighted in yellow signifying that they are not verified parameters As the NetLink mDSL sets up the parameters the highlighting disappears signifying that the display matches the set ting of the card Previous Card button Click the Previous Card button to display the rack card configuration in the next occupied slot in descend ing order Note Clicking on the Previous Card button before you have clicked the Submit button to save any changes will delete those changes Refresh Current Page button Clicking the Refresh Current Page button displays updated configuration information Next Card button Click the Next Card button to display the rack card configuration in the next occupied slot in descending order Note Clicking on the Next Card button
123. ON 7 ON OFF OFF ON 8 OFF ON ON ON 9 OFF ON ON OFF A OFF ON OFF ON B OFF ON OFF OFF C OFF OFF ON ON D OFF OFF ON OFF E OFF OFF OFF ON F OFF OFF OFF OFF Table 8 Examples of address settings Address in Hex Dec S1 1 0x01 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 0x02 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON Ox10 16 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OxB5 181 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF Hardware setup for a Model 2701RC The following must be done to configure your Model 2701RC hardware for use with the Model 1001MC net work management station Connect frame ground to signal ground see section Configuring frame ground Set the system address see section Setting the 2701 RC system address When you are finished install the Model 2701RC front card and rear I O card using the installation proce dures in the manual that came with the modem Configuring frame ground The Model 1001MC uses an internal bus to communicate with the NetLink modems installed in your system The Model 2701RC rear I O card must have frame ground GND connected to signal GND through a 100 ohm resistor This is done by configuring a jumper on the modems rear I O card Refer to the installation manual that came with the rack card for more information on this jumper setting Installing NetLink modem cards 26 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Setting the 2701RC system address The manual that was shipped with your NetLink
124. P HTML web pages on the Model 1001MC The diagram below shows how all of the web pages are linked together Following figure 105 there is a brief description of each page System Level Information Record Information Model 1095 amp 2701 Global Configuration System Config Figure 105 1001MC command map Connect to 209 168 1512 as Nane Password Realm 1001MC L Remember Password Figure 106 1001MC login window Login After typing the IP address into your web browser as the URL the Model 1001MC will present the login screen see figure 106 The Model 1001MC has two levels of password protection superuser and monitor The Model 1001MC has two levels of password protection e superuser he superuser password level lets you view statistics and make configuration changes to the sys tem To log in as a superuser type the word superuser all lower case as the username and password Introduction 224 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference monitor The monitor level password enables you to view statistics but it will not let you make any config uration changes To log into the system at the monitor level type monitor all lower case for the username and password Note The superuser and monitor passwords are set in the unit as the default passwords For proper security make sure that during your initial setup you change the passwords
125. Powered up 2 time 0 days 0 hrs Omin 2 sec lan laninit c Using stored ethernet settings OdaysO hrs 0 min2sec lanNanconf c Rev B PCB fi davs N hrs O min 2 see lanlanconf e Rev R PCR Figure 124 System Log Non Volatile Memory System Config Help Ld zZ E z m O E lt x O Z e O Q e Erase Flash Messages syslogFlashClear Clicking on this button clears messages listed on the page This function can also be performed from the Sys log Modify page Note When message are erased they cannot be recovered System Log Non Volatile Memory 257 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference SNMP SE SNMP Support Page The SNMP Support Page see figure 125 is where you can download the MIBs used by the 1001MC You will need the MIBs if you will be using an SNMP Network Management Station and a standard SNMP software package or MIB walking tool to manage your Patton NetLink System instead of the built in NetLink NMS HTTP HTML management pages Patton Electronics Home Page SNMP Support Page HOME The following hyperlink can be used to download the mibs used by the 1001MC About 1001MC corporate mib Configure Cards products mib_ System Info The following hyperlink to the Patton Electronics Website can be used to DownLoad download the product specific mibs used by the 1001MC System Log 1001MC Product Mibs Page SNMP System Config Help Figure 125 SNMP Support
126. RC NetLink G SHDSL network termination unit NTU using the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS internal HTTP HTML web engine and a standard web browser This chapter is meant to be used in addition to the manual that came with your unit NetLink NMS description Specifically designed for use in the Patton NetLink system when the NetLink G SHDSL NTU is coupled with the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS and the Patton Model 1001 rack system the modem is fully SNMP manage able SNMP management can be performed on both the local and remote units using a standard SNMP network management station NMS or by using a standard web browser and the Model 1001 MC s built in web server You can view and change configuration variables view statistical variables and view error and warning indica tions Configuration and management This section describes the configuration and management of your NetLink G SHDSL NTUS using a Model 1001MC NetLink NMS with built in HTTP HTML web server If you plan to manage your units using a standard network management station you can download the Patton Enterprise MIBs either through the SNMP web page on the Model 1001MC or obtain them from the Patton web site at www patton com The following pages are used to configure and manage the Model 3088RC Modem Information Rack X page This page displays a list of the cards that are installed in your system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems see section Dis
127. RC rack card the system administrator should set the Local Clock Mode to external either external receiveRecover 1 or external external 4 and the Local Framing Mode to slotted When you are using an IM1 K and a 1095 standalone at the remote site the system administrator should set the Clock Mode to external external 4 and the Remote Framing Mode to slotted Illegal configuration messages If you are receiving an invalid configuration indication after creating a configuration it is resulting from an illegal combination of variables In most cases the cause of the problem has to do with the Framing Mode vari able Patton DSL modems should only be set to the slotted mode when you are using an IM2RC K with the 1095RC or an IMI K with the 1095 standalone unit Also if you are using a IM2RC K or IMI K interface card the 1095 1095RC must always be set to the external clock mode Review the table below for a list of valid configurations that can be used with the 1095 1095RC Local Clock Mode Local Framing Mode Remote Clock Mode Remote Framing Mode Internal Normal Receive Recover Normal External Normal Receive Recover Normal External Slotted Receive Recover Normal External Slotted External Slotted Receive Recover Normal Internal Normal Receive Recover Normal External Normal a Denotes a unit that must have an IM2RC K or IMI K installed System Config 264 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Procedure for creating a tem
128. Refer to section Applying a template on page 125 to activate the template Patton Electronics Hi Pi 22 Global Configuration Menu gt HOME D FAN Aboutiooimc Create New Configuration Configure Cards GN System Info Model 1095 Configuration s DownLoad mil System Log Modify Configuration AB SNMP 2M System Config Modify Configuration CONFIG 1 0 Modify Configuration EN Help E Delete Configuration ie Delete Model 1095 Configuration io Figure 62 Global Configuration Menu page Deleting a template Do the following to delete a template Note When a template configuration is deleted it cannot be recovered 1 Select a template from the Delete Configuration pop up menu see figure 62 2 Click the Delete Configuration button Applying a template This section describes how to apply a global configuration to all Model 1095RC rack cards other than those that meet one of the following exceptions Model 1095RC rack cards installed in Model 1001 racks that have had the Rack Protection Mode option set to protected 1 will not be configured if a global template is applied see section Protecting a Model 1001 rack from global configuration on page 114 for more information Creating and modifying global configuration templates 125 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Model 1095RC rack cards that have had the Protected option set to protected 1 will not be configu
129. Refer to the installation manual that came with the rack card for more information on this jumper setting Hardware setup for a Model 2715RC The following must be done to configure your Model 2715RC hardware for use with the Model 1001MC net work management station Connect frame ground to signal ground see section Configuring frame ground When you are finished install the Model 2715RC front card and rear I O card using the installation proce dures in the manual that came with the modem Configuring frame ground The Model 1001MC uses an internal bus to communicate with the NetLink modems installed in your system The Model 2715RC rear I O card must have frame ground GND connected to signal GND through a 100 ohm resistor This is done by configuring a jumper on the modems rear I O card Refer to the installation manual that came with the rack card for more information on this jumper setting Hardware setup for a Model 3088RC The following must be done to configure your Model 3088RC hardware for use with the Model 1001MC net work management station Connect frame ground to signal ground see section Configuring frame ground Set the system address see section Setting the 2701 RC system address When you are finished install the Model 3088RC front card and rear I O card using the installation proce dures in the manual that came with the modem Configuring frame ground The Model 1001MC uses an internal bus to commun
130. Reset For more information about items on the Slot Configuration page see Slot Configuration page MIB variables description on page 185 Modem Information page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Modem Information page Slots Available totalConfigSlots Displays the number of configurable slots available in the rack Modems Installed rackXCardsInstalled Displays the number of modem cards installed in the rack that the system has found Number of Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies This is where you specify the number of power supplies installed in the rack this value determines the addressing range for the rack In the case of a redundant power supply system you should set this variable to 2 this will inform the Model 1001MC that there should be 2 power supplies in the system Rack Protection Mode If you want to protect all Model 2707RC rack cards installed in the current rack from being globally config ured select protected 1 from the pop up menu then click the Submit button For more information about the system configuration feature refer to section System Config on page 259 Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Modem Information page MIB variables description 177 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Submit button Af
131. Supply 2 Status available 0 Clear System Alarms Card Address Line Status Warnings Exrors Local User Id Local ModelCode Remote User Id Remote ModelCode Local Circuit ID Remote 0 0 0 0 V Test model 1000MC None None None None 1 startup l 0 0 Local model 1095RC D Remote modell095A 1 Tech Bench l E 2 startup 1 0 o Local model 1095RC Remote model 109542 Figure 56 Modem Information Rack 1 page System Level 5 Modem Information Information Configure Cards Information System Loi Y SNMP MIB System Log Flash System Model 1095 Config Global Configuration Figure 57 Web page navigation to Modem Information Rack 1 page System Log Record Information Creating and modifying global configuration templates 116 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management 2 Locate the card address see figure 56 on page 116 of the Model 1095RC you want to protect 3 Set the Protected pop up menu see figure 56 on page 116 to protected 1 Note Setting the Protected option to normal 0 will enable the Model 1095RC to receive new configurations through the global configura tion command Click the Submit button The rack card is now protected Creating a template This section describes how to create a global configuration template The Patton Model 1095 enables the Model 1001MC system administr
132. Supply 2 Status rackXPower2Down Displays the current status of power supply 2 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 If the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Clear Rack X Alarms clearAlarms Click on this button to clear alarms for the current rack Note The System Log will still display the errors after the Clear Rack X Alarms button is clicked Note The following information describes each column of the modem table Each table heading is a hyperlink to a help page that contains information about the column Card Address nmsSlotID This variable defines the address of the card The Model 1001MC will poll the cards using the addresses listed in the Card Address column If a modem is found with the same address it will be displayed in that row The address of the card is set up using the DIP switches on the card The address is also a hyperlink to the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page This page can be used to set slot specific information about the card Line Status lineStatus The line status column on each View Rack page shows the current line status of each card Keep in mind that the more cards the 1001MC is managing the longer it will take for the line status field to update Displays the status of the line The
133. Total Warnings 0 Apply Configuration Apply 1095 Test Mode Patton Electronics Comt Apply Test Mode Apply 2701RC Rack Configuration None Created w Apply Configuration Figure 99 System Level Information page Apply 2701RC Test Mode of Apply 3088 Rack Configuration 0 Apply 3088 Test Mode none 0 v Rack Protection Mode normal 0 v Clear Alarms 2 Use the Rack Protection Mode pop up menu see figure 99 to select protected 1 Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration com mand Creating and modifying global configuration templates 212 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management 3 Click the Apply Protection button The rack is now protected Protecting a selected Model 3088RC rack card from global configuration Do the following to protect a single Model 3088RC rack card 1 Starting from the HOME page click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 choose the rack you want to protect in the example rack 1 was selected 2 Locate the card address see figure 55 on page 119 of the Model 3088RC you want to protect 3 Set the Protected pop up menu see figure 55 on page 119 to protected 1 Note Setting the Protected option to normal 0 will enable the Model 3088RC to receive new configurations through the global configura
134. a aana tenens sette sena 66 Line Down Indication ineDowhnlndication be 66 48 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management Introduction This chapter describes managing a Model 1092ARC NetLink iDSL modem using the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS internal HTTP HTML web engine and a standard web browser This chapter is meant to be used in addition to the manual that came with your unit NetLink NMS description Specifically designed for use in the Patton NetLink system when the NetLink iDSL is coupled with the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS and the Patton Model 1001 rack system the modem is fully SNMP manageable SNMP management can be performed on both the local and remote units using a standard SNMP network man agement station NMS or by using a standard web browser and the Model 1001MC 5 built in web server You can view and change configuration variables view statistical variables and view error and warning indications Configuration and management This section describes the configuration and management of your NetLink iDSL modems using a Model 1001MC NetLink NMS with built in HTTP HTML web server If you plan to manage your units using a standard network management station you can download the Patton Enterprise MIBs either through the SNMP web page on the Model 1001MC or obtain them from the Patton web site at www patton com The following pages are used to configure and manage the Model 1092ARC Modem Information page
135. ace the changes into the 1001MC temporary memory If you decide that you do not want your changes implemented you can select the Clear Changes button Select the Back hyperlink to return to the Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page 6 Change the Input Mode back to onLine and select the Submit Query button When the unit returns to the online state the 3088RC will begin implementing the configuration changes Note The variables that you changed are now highlighted in yellow After the 3088RC processes the new information the highlighting will be removed For more information about items on the Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page see Model 3088RC Con figuration Slot X page MIB variables description on page 201 Configuration and management 194 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Displaying the Model 3088RC Configuration page The Model 3088RC Configuration page see figure 95 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 3088RC and the remote CPE box Patton Electronics Home Page Model 3088 Global Configuration HOME s Warming Please review your configuration before submitting it to the system Wegal con E About 1001MC syncronization Follow the hyperlink for more information on configuration options Configu EXE Import Export yam Configure Cards Modify Configuration Name J Submit Query System Info P DownLoad Valid Configuration lt
136. address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page see section Slot Configuration on page 243 for more information Local Model Code localModelCode This column displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address The Model Code is also a hyperlink into the configuration of the NetLink modem and its remote unit The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page see section Slot Configu ration on page 243 for more information Remote User Id remoteUserID User supplied string that defines the unit at the end of the link The string is stored in non volatile flash within the unit If the unit is moved the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page see section Slot Configuration on page 243 for more information Modem Information Rack X 241 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Remote Model Code remoteModelCode This column displays the model code of the NetLink modem at the far end of the link Protected You can protect individual rack cards from being globally configured by setting the pop up menu from nor mal 0 to protected 1 After you have set the protection option if you are finished making chang
137. al CLK 2 provided by DTE External Transmit Clock signal DSL Link Enable dslLinkEnable3088RC enable 0 disable 1 Line Probe lineProbe3088RC Enables or disables the Line Probe feature to negotiate the optimal rate for current line conditions enable 0 disable 1 Annex Type annexType3088RC Sets the DSL annex type annexA 0 annexB 1 Creating and modifying global configuration templates 215 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management SW Test Mode testModeSet3088RC This displays any test mode invoked through the NMS See next configuration for information about invoking test modes through the NMS This option will be highlighted in blue if the unit is in test mode none 0 No test mode in process lal 1 Local loopback test rdl 2 Remote loopback FP Switch Front Panel disabled 0 disables the toggle switches on the front panel of the 3088RC rack card enabled 1 enables the ability to use the front panel toggle switches Response to Test Mode refers to the initiation of loopbacks via one of the DTE signals disabled 0 no loopbacks can be initiated by a DTE signal enabled 1 Loopbacks can be initiated by a DTE signal Refer to section Applying a template on page 217 to activate the template Modifying a template This section describes how to modify a global configuration template Patton Electronics Delete Configuration N HomePage Global Co
138. alled in the 1095RC at the rack and an IMI K installed in the 1095 standalone unit at the remote site When setting a unit for the external clock mode the unit must have an external clock source in order to make a link When using either an IM2RC K or an IMI K the K module will always provide the external clock for System Config 267 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference the unit so it is not necessary to have a G 703 G 704 link available When using any other type of serial inter face make sure that an external clock is provided by the DTE equipment or the modems will not link Notes on clock mode settings The Clock Mode Setting determines the source of timing for the link Most applications will use one of the following configurations internal receiveRecover 0 external receiveRecover 1 There are special situations which would require the use of the external external 4 clock mode setting This setting should only be used when the application has an IM2RC K and a 1095RC in the rack system and a IM1 K and a 1095 standalone at the remote site If you are using any other interface cards do not use the exter nal external 4 configuration Note When your are using the external external 4 clock mode settings you must have the Framing Mode set to slotted for the local and remote units Notes on framing mode settings The Framing Mode Setting notifies the card of the type of interface it will be connecte
139. and modifying global configuration templates 158 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management The first table is the Channel Assignment section for activating the DSO time slots you need see figure 77 The two options for each channel are Active 0 nactive 1 Patton Electronics Home Page Model 2701 RC Global Configuration HOME About 1001MC Import Export Modify Configuration Name test Submit Query Configure Cards System Info Channel Assignment DownLoad System L mum j e Channel 1 Channel 2 active 0 Channel 3 active 0 System Config Channel 4 active 0 Channel 5 active 0 Channel 6 active 0 Help Channel 7 active 0 Channel 8 ac ve y Channel 9 active Channel 10 active d E Channel 11 active 0 Channel 12 active o E Channel 13 active 0 E Channel 14 active 0 Channel 15 active o E Channel 16 active 0 Channel 17 active 0 Channel 18 actve 0 y Channel 19 active 0 Channel 20 actve 0 Channel 21 actve 0 y Channel 22 acive Channel 23 actve 0 Channel 24 actve 0 y Channel 25 active 0 Channel26 active 0 5 Channel 27 active 0 Channel 28 active 0 Channel 29 active 0 E Channel 30 active 0 Channel 31 active 0 E Channel 32 active 0 Figure 77 Channel Assignment table Creating an
140. ar cards or interface modules that do not have loop back ability from the DTE such as the IM2RC IA Ethernet rear card this variable must be set to disable 1 In most situations if a DTE test mode is required it should be enable only during the time that the test is needed HW Test Mode testModelnd 1094 remotetestModelnd 1094 These read only variables notify you that the specified unit has been placed into a test mode through the hard ware This could have been done either through the front panel switches or from the DTE if the TM from DTE is enabled When a test mode is displayed the field will be highlighted in blue to give you quick notification SW Test Mode testModeSet 1094 remotetestModeSet 1 094 These variables notify you that the specified unit has been placed into a test mode through the management station The management can place a unit into a test mode within the Model 1094A Update Configuration page explained in more detail below Software Rev softVersion 1 094 remotesoftversion 1094 These read only MIB variables display the current version of code that is running in the NetLink HDSL modems Check the Download page to see if the Model 1001MC has a newer version of code available for downloading Through the download web page you can update the software that is running in the NetLink HDSL rack card You can also update the software in the NetLink stand alone unit through the front panel control port on the unit Model 1
141. ariable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem reports a line down sce nario Three choices are available Error Warning None Note Line Down Indication must be set to error 2 line up and line down SNMP trap messages to be sent Using the Download page to upgrade 1095RC sofrware Do the following to download new software into your NetLink modem 1 Remove the card that you wish to upgrade from the rack chassis 2 Make a note of the settings of DIP switches S2 6 and S2 7 3 Set DIP switches S2 6 and S2 7 to the OFF position Using the Download page to upgrade 1095RC software 111 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management 4 10 11 12 13 If you are upgrading Model 1095RC software click on the Download 1095RC Software button see figure 52 Otherwise go to step 8 to download the latest version of the 1095RC Key software Current Software Available Model 1095RC 2 3 90 Model 1094ARC 2 1 1 Download 1094ARC Software 1O9SRCKey 210 Figure 52 Download 1095RC software button Note Do not install the unit into the rack until you have selected the soft ware that you want to download Select the View Status hyperlink see figure 53 View Status Tn arder ta dawnload new cnde inta vanr Netlink modems follow these ten Figure 53 View Status link location Slide the card into the chassis You will see the download status updated in the window as
142. at came with each rack card for information on using front panel LEDs to troubleshoot problems Otherwise if you are not already at the System Level Information page go to the HOME page and click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page Look at the Top Level rack information for each rack to see if any are also showing warnings or errors see figure 141 on page 280 Troubleshooting network malfunctions 278 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 11 Troubleshooting and maintenance 3 If no Top Level racks are showing warnings or errors go to section Using the System Log to check for net work problems on page 282 to review the System Log Non Volatile Memory page for information on what may have caused the problem Otherwise click on the View Rack X link where X is the number of the rack showing warnings or errors in the example shown in figure 141 on page 280 you would click on View Rack 1 Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Loq SNMP System Confiq Help e Zz ti 2 s c E lt as wd O Zz e V Q 2 e Electronics To Software Version 2 5 0 Software Date Code Oct 5 2001 12 30 33 Box Name SNMP Mgr Box Contact Contact Info Box Location Unknown Location Running Since Last Boot 2 days 20 hrs 43 min 58 sec STATUS OF SNMP Mgr Total System Slots Available 30 Tota
143. ate the software in the NetLink stand alone unit through the front panel control port on the unit For more information regarding software downloads for standalone units visit the Patton Electronics web site at www patton com Next Configuration table This table shows the configurable MIB variables for the set of units There are column for the local and remote units In some cases a single variable applies to both the local and remote unit In this case a single configura tion field is made available in the Local column and the Remote column is made a read only field After changes are made select the Submit Query button at the bottom of the table and then place the Input Mode back to onLine 0 in the Model 1094 Configuration page The following sections explain the MIB variables that are shown in the Next Configuration table DTE rate dteRate 1094 This variable displays the DTE rate for the link Because the NetLink HDSL modems are symmetrical same rate in both direction there is only MIB variable that defines the DTE rate The Customer Premise box will automatically update its configuration to the DTE rate that is set here Clock Mode Local Remote This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink modems The display shows the Local clock mode rack card and then the remote clock mode as a single variable in the Local column The Remote column displays a read only field showing the remote units clocking mode This was done to avoi
144. ation of your modems There are several illegal combinations of variables that could cause problems with the modems if implemented incorrectly Be sure to read the following information before creating a template Configuration rules Things to keep in mind when creating a template see section Configuration rules on page 267 Notes on clock mode settings see section Notes on clock mode settings on page 268 Notes on framing mode settings see section Notes on framing mode settings on page 268 Illegal configuration messages see section Illegal configuration messages on page 268 After reviewing the rules and notes go to section Procedure for modifying a template on page 269 to learn how to modify a template Configuration rules Keep in mind the following when modifying a template Ifyou have an IM2RC K G 703 G 704 Rear Card installed with a 1095RC in your rack the unit must have the Local Clock Mode set to external and the Framing Mode set to slotted Ifyou have an IM1 K G 703 G 704 Quick Connect Module installed with your 1095 at the remote site the units must have the Clock Mode set to external external and the Framing Mode for both the local and remote units must be set to slotted Ifyou have any other interface connected to your 1095RC or your 1095 modems the Framing Mode must be set to normal The system administrator should only set the Clock Mode to external external 4 if there is an IM2RC K inst
145. ator to configure the units for a wide variety of applications Due to the many different applications that are supported care must be taken when setting the configuration of your modems There are several illegal combinations of variables that could cause problems with the modems if implemented incorrectly Be sure to read the following information before creating a template Configuration rules Things to keep in mind when creating a template see section Configuration rules on page 117 Notes on clock mode settings see section Notes on clock mode settings on page 118 Notes on framing mode settings see section Notes on framing mode settings on page 118 Illegal configuration messages see section Illegal configuration messages on page 118 After reviewing the rules and notes go to section Procedure for creating a template on page 119 to learn how to create a template Configuration rules Keep in mind the following when creating a template Ifyou have an IM2RC K G 703 G 704 Rear Card installed with a 1095RC in your rack the unit must have the Local Clock Mode set to external and the Framing Mode set to slotted Ifyou have an IM1 K G 703 G 704 Quick Connect Module installed with your 1095 at the remote site the units must have the Clock Mode set to external external and the Framing Mode for both the local and remote units must be set to slotted e Ifyou have any other interface connected to your 1095RC or you
146. atus down 1 SNMP Power Supply 2 Status down 1 System Config Help Clear Rack 1 Alarms Cardi sg Tine Stang Aiarigs Eora taca ir ld Local ModelCode Remote nm ld Renom ModelCodi L4 Z G P Z e w Ke Ka EE e e Z L La MV Q e 0 0 lo lo SNMP Mgr Model 1001MC None None sk 0 0 10 None none 0 None paas 2 startup 1 0 lo None Imodel3088RC 12 None SRI GNU 3 0 0 10 None none 0 None none 0 Figure 91 Modem Information page for the Model 3088RC Starting from the HOME page to access the Modem Information Rack X page for the 3088RC click on the fol lowing links Home menu gt Configure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number Figure 92 on page 192 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Modem Information Rack X page see Displaying the Slot Configuration Page on page 197 Configuration and management 191 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management View Rack 1 Cad Slot ar 0 K ibd Configuration Configure System Level Emir Cards Information Cow Rack 3 mation Rack X System 1 Modem FA w Mode Configuration View Rack 8 System Log Modi Record Information SNMP MIB System Log RAM Hard Reset System Log Flash Figure 92 Web page navigation to Modem Information page E is He 16 E CAJA Login HOME System Log
147. atus table description es 106 Model Code localModelCode remoteModelCode sss 106 DTE rate te Rate liO95 utenti secti cene rect sete a erede eu cioe e del ie calices eed 106 Clock Mode Local 22 1 2 9 2 reete E ET Ebo B re Eee eee env UT EE ao dE EE EDe Reg 106 Tx Data Sample Point txdEdge1095 remotetxdEdge1095 eese 106 TM From DTE dteTM1095 remotedteTM 1095 cccscscscessssssssesssessssesesescesssssssesssesssssscsesesssesseseneeeesess 107 Frans Mode danna ida 107 HW Test Mode testModeInd1095 remotetestModeInd1095 sss 107 SW Test Mode testModeSet1095 remotetestModeSet1095 sss 107 Software Rev softVersion1095 remotesoftversion1095 sese 107 Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description ees 107 Card Address ms ii 108 Line Scatus lueStatusT095 indi den 108 Processor Mode BtocessorModell95 caidas 108 Local Soteware Rev softVersionl095 sii ona nidad o E Ie alioli 108 Remote Software Rev remotesoftversion1095 esses ener nenne nennen nenen 108 Back hyperlinke skate Ert ptit e ide rei tee ree Ede eee de e Reina 108 Next Configuration table cui 109 DTE Tate id EO it iii iia 109 Clock Mode Local R mote miii ia ica 109 Tx Data Sample Point txdEdgel095 remotetxdEdge1095 eee 109 TM From DTE dteTM1095 remotedteT M1095 sss 109 Framing Mode ipte ed red a a EON TE de bee E 109 Test Mode testModeSet1095 rem
148. ay choose to refresh certain web configuration pages at various rates or no automatic refresh The following pages are refreshed at the rate selected 1095RC configuration page 1094RC configuration page 2701RC configuration page 2707RC configuration page iDSL configuration page e Rack view page The user s selection of auto refresh rates are e none 0 no auto refresh The user must refresh the web page manually rate5sec 5 5 seconds between auto refreshing e ratelOsec 10 10 seconds e ratel5sec 15 15 seconds rate30sec 30 30 seconds e ratel min 60 1 minute rate2min 120 2 minutes e rate3min 180 3 minutes e rateSmin 300 5 minutes System Information 248 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Web Background Enabled boxBackgroundFlag The Model 1001MC contains a background image that can be used while viewing the web pages You can choose to enable or disable the background image then click on the Submit button to apply the change The two options are e disableGraphics 0 there is no background image The background is white enableGraphics 1 the background image is visible Patton Electronics Home Page DOWNLOAD HOME View Status About 1001MC In order to download new code into your NetLink modems follow these steps Configure Cards 1 Remove the card that you wish to upgrade from the chassis 2 Set dipswitch S2 6 and S2 7 both to the OFF
149. aying the Model 2701 Conhguraton page enoaan e E E E 137 Dr ne IAE o 139 Modem Information Rack X page MIB variables description o see e eE sere areas 140 Slots Available total Conna Slot e a ee co e E T EDT T RTI SUIS 140 E ST SR TTS RTS E TIS H 140 Number of Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies merrer ean a a E E 140 IackcProtectiongvioderacs xb rotected teme Nereus a er cee UA 140 Submit e DOI 141 Power Supply a S ITS GII eee E TRE IEEE erent eee 141 POE rack RE ecce RE eT Tr 141 TERA TE E oe 141 Car 2 HIST 141 Er oa 141 KST T unity OE raster 142 EA AO eee e aM USURIS ES 142 Lc serlo Serre eem C 142 RocaltWodeli acder ocal Le LS T eU RT 142 Remote Usd HR ES 142 Remote Mode Code TT 0 EL STT L UT TETUER 142 Protected 5 e Te NIMIUM D M Ue 143 Trocal EDA La T T RST esee eee A ET 143 Remote Circuit O ee ETE RT 143 SubmnEbuttohe e UU USES CERE ER 143 Modsl2700RGGon surauon Slot X pace NIB variablesidesctlptioD eere tUe 143 Model 2 70IRC Configuranon Slot nms SloribD menee e E 143 EES ETATS E T AA EEE A E E EAEE TAERA AEA OEE EAA AT o 144 Alarm counters eee e EE E E E E EE E EA E E E er creer eee eee ery ere 144 KOSKIOS ATAT e e A T 144 SE EE we eon eee ee eee re A A re rar ey ee A ne ee en 145 FapiCount linelDownGnt veces merde ere AET 145 GREA Miro GtesBtran EANES A E O Rue ce Ee ATO UN 145 Me Clear Counter Dutton eera eee e E E E AE E E E 145 CERCA Error Alarm Threshold erc4 Threshold croeer ee e EE E E ens 146 Model 1001
150. b browser This chapter is meant to be used in addition to the manual that came with your unit NetLink NMS description Specifically designed for use in the Patton NetLink system when the NetLink G 703 NTU is coupled with the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS and the Patton Model 1001 rack system the modem is fully SNMP manageable SNMP management can be performed on both the local and remote units using a standard SNMP network man agement station NMS or by using a standard web browser and the Model 1001MC s built in web server You can view and change configuration variables view statistical variables and view error and warning indications Configuration and management This section describes the configuration and management of your NetLink G 703 NTUs using a Model 1001MC NetLink NMS with built in HTTP HTML web server If you plan to manage your units using a standard network management station you can download the Patton Enterprise MIBs either through the SNMP web page on the Model 1001MC or obtain them from the Patton web site at www patton com The following pages are used to configure and manage the Model 2707RC Modem Information Rack X page This page displays a list of the cards that are installed in your system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems see section Displaying the Modem Information page on page 170 Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page This page along with the Model 2707RC Configura
151. b page or from the Slot Configuration page Submit button Click the Submit button to input the changes to the management system After clicking the Submit button you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Note After submitting the remote circuit ID information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Modem Information page MIB variables description 60 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management Model 1092 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 1092 Configuration Slot page Model 1092A Model 1092 Configuration Slot nmsSlotID Displays the address of the NetLink iDSL modem The address is defined by the DIP switch setting of S1 on the rack card The remote standalone unit has no address specified but uses that address of the rack card that it is connected to Line Status lineStatusiDSL Displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 testMode 3 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data Processor Mode proces
152. before you have clicked the Sub mit button to save any changes will delete those changes View Rack X hyperlink Click on this link to display the Modem Information Rack X page The Modem Information Rack page displays an overview of the NetLink rack that is being managed For more information refer to section Modem Informa tion Rack X on page 239 Model 1095 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description 105 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Input Mode mode1095 The following settings are available onLine 0 superVisoryModel To make configuration changes to the NetLink mDSL modems you must first set this bit to superVisoryModel When the Input Mode is set to superVisoryMode1 the Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear on the web page next to the Refresh Current Page hyperlink Select the Modify Configuration hyperlink The Model 1095RC Configuration Next Configuration page will appear see section Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description on page 107 for more information After making configuration changes to the NetLink mDSL modems in the Model 1095RC Update Configura tion page return to this page and place the Input Mode variable back to onLine 0 This will notify the Model 1001MC that the configuration has completed and will cause it to copy the new configuration into the NetLink mDSL configuration space If this is not done the NetLink mDSL will n
153. ble displays the DTE rate for the link Because the NetLink mDSL modems are symmetrical same rate in both direction there is only one MIB variable that defines the DTE rate Clock Mode Local Remote This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink modems The display shows the Local clock mode rack card and then the remote clock mode Tx Data Sample Point bxdEdge 1 095 remotetxdEdge 1095 This variable defines the sampling point that is used by the NetLink mDSL modems to read data from the DTE In most situations it should always be set to normal 0 In high speed applications there are situations that would require an inverted 1 sampling point Model 1095 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description 106 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management TM From DTE dteTM 1 095 remotedteTM 1095 These MIB variables define whether you would like the modems to accept test mode requests from the DTE that is connected In normal applications this should be set to disable 1 When the application is using rear cards or interface modules that do not have loop back ability from the DTE such as the IM2RC IA Ethernet rear card this variable must be set to disable 1 In most situations if a DTE test mode is required it should be enable only during the time that the test is needed Framing Mode This bit defines the mode of operation of the interface For standard serial interfaces Framing Mode should be set to normal 3 Pl
154. bmit Query button When the unit returns to the online state the 1092A will begin implementing the configuration changes Note The variables that you changed are now highlighted in yellow After the 1092A processes the new information the highlighting will be removed For more information about items on the Model 1092 Configuration Slot page see Model 1092 Configura tion Slot page MIB variables description on page 61 Configuration and management 53 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management Displaying the Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page The Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page see figure 24 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 1092A and the remote CPE box When the page displays the unit is set to the onLine state and the current configuration is displayed Patton Electronics Home Page Model 1092 Configuration SH HOME Card Address 11 ZH About 1001MC Line Status dataMode 2 Configure Cards Processor Mode normal 0 pag System Info Local Software Rev 2 0 2 M DownLoad Remote Software Rev 0 0 0 um System Log Back NOTE After making configuration pages you must set the unit back to onLine mode to 55 SNMP implement change i ay System Config A Help Next Configuration E O Local Remote Q SA e DTE Rate rate32k 0 y rate32k 0 E Clock Mode Local Remote l intematreceiveRecover 0 receiveRecover
155. cessor is in the negotiating 2 mode the card was just brought online and the NetLink iDSL is setting up the configuration parameters within the Model 1001MC lineDown 3 Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description 63 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management At startup all of the fields will be highlighted in yellow signifying that they are not verified parameters As the NetLink iDSL sets up the parameters the highlighting disappears signifying that the display matches the set ting of the card Local Software Rev softVersioniDSL These read only MIB variable displays the current version of code that is running in the NetLink iDSL rack card modem You should check the download web page to see if the Model 1001MC has a newer version of code available for downloading Through the download web page you can update the software that is running in the NetLink iDSL rack card Remote Software Rev remotesoftversioniDSL These read only MIB variable displays the current version of code that is running in the NetLink iDSL Cus tomer Premise modem You can update the software in the NetLink stand alone unit through the front panel control port on the unit For more information regarding software downloads for standalone units visit the Patton Electronics web site at www patton com Next Configuration table This table shows the configurable MIB variables for the set of units There are co
156. changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information SNMP and HTTP Password Information Superuser Password boxSnmpMasterPassword This password will allow full access rights to the box read write Change the password by typing the new password into the Superuser Password and Superuser Password Verification fields then click the Submit button System Information 247 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Note After submitting the new superuser password you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information User Password boxSnmpMonitorPassword This password will allow monitor access rights to the box read only Change the password by typing the new password into the User Password and User Password Verification fields then selecting the Submit button Note After submitting the new password you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Background Information boxBackgroundFlag The Model 1001MC contains a background image that can be used while viewing the web pages You can choose to enable or disable the background image then click on the Submit button to apply the change Web Page Refresh Rate BoxWebRefreshRate The user m
157. circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms resetStatus Selecting this push button erases the alarms errors and warning associated with the specified slot Note The errors and warning will still be listed in the System Log Hardware Reset resetStatus Selecting this push button will force the associated modem to perform a hardware reset Card Lost Indication cardLostlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem is removed from the man agement system Three choices are available e None 0 e Warning 1 e Error 2 Line Down Indication lineDownlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem reports a line down sce nario Three choices are available e None 0 e Warning 1 e Error 2 Note Line Down Indication must be set to error 2 line up and line down SNMP trap messages to be sent Slot Configuration page MIB variables description 154 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Creating and modifying global configuration templates Model 2701RC rack cards can be configured globally by templates you create If you use this capability you have the option to globally configure some or all Mod
158. cludes errors to verify that the modems can detect the errors rdl remote loopback The remote loopback test checks the performance of the local and remote NetLink modems Any data sent to the remote NetLink modem in this test mode will be echoed returned back to the originating device i e characters typed on the keyboard of a terminal will appear on the terminal screen see figure 145 NetLink Modem NetLink Modem Receive Serial Internal Recover Serial Device Clocking Clocking Device len 1 S a E B AL C O b DL lL Es RDL Initiated Figure 145 Remote loopback diagram e rdlWith511 remote loopback with 511 This test functions the same way as the rdl test but it adds a 511 pattern from the BER generator 1001MC test mode diagnostics 283 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 11 Troubleshooting and maintenance rdlWith511er remote loopback with 511 and errors This test functions the same way as the rdlWith511 test but itadds a 511 pattern from the BER generator that includes errors to verify that the modems can detect the errors Note Refer to table 17 to see which 1001MC diagnostics tests are sup ported by the NetLink modems Table 17 Model 1001MC test mode diagnostics supported by Netlink modem rack cards five11 fiveller lal lalWith511 lalWith51ler rdi rdlWith511 rdiWith51 1er 1092ARC v v v v v v v v 1094ARC v v v v v v v v 1095RC v v v v v v v v 2701RC v v v v v v v v 2707R
159. code that is running in the NetLink mDSL Cus tomer Premise modem You can update the software in the NetLink stand alone unit through the front panel control port on the unit For more information regarding software downloads for standalone units visit the Patton Electronics web site at www patton com Back hyperlink After making modifications click the Back hyperlink thereby returning the unit to onLine mode to implement the changes Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description 108 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Next Configuration table This table shows the configurable MIB variables for the set of units There are column for the local and remote units In some cases a single variable applies to both the local and remote unit In this case a single configura tion field is made available in the Local column and the Remote column is made a read only field After changes are made select the Submit Query button at the bottom of the table and then place the Input Mode back to onLine 0 in the Model 1095 Configuration page The following sections explain the MIB variables that are shown in the Next Configuration table DTE rate dteRate 1095 This variable displays the DTE rate for the link Because the NetLink mDSL modems are symmetrical same rate in both direction there is only MIB variable that defines the DTE rate The Customer Premise box will automatically update its
160. d an illegal configuration of the NetLink HDSL modems For instance both units CAN NOT be set to internal clock The options list all pos sible clocking combinations Tx Data Sample Point txdEdge 1 095 remotetxdEdge 1 095 This variable defines the sampling point that is used by the NetLink mDSL modems to read data from the DTE In most situations it should always be set to normal 0 In high speed applications there are situations that would require an inverted 1 sampling point TM From DTE dteTM 1 09A4 remotedteTM 1 094 These MIB variables define whether you would like the modems to accept test mode requests from the DTE that is connected In normal applications this should be set to disable 1 When the application is using rear cards or interface modules that do not have loop back ability from the DTE such as the IM2RC IA Ethernet rear card this variable must be set to disable 1 In most situations if a DTE test mode is required it should be enable only during the time that the test is needed Test Mode testModeSet 1 094 remotetestModeSet 1094 These variables allow you to place the NetLink HDSL rack card into test modes For more information on the test modes please see the NetLink HDSL Test Modes section below Submit Query button After making configuration changes select the Back link then select onLine and finally select Submit Query This will submit all the configuration information to the Model 1001MC After this the
161. d by Model 270XRC network termina tion units NTUs Remote Model Code remoteModelCode Note This feature is not supported by Model 270XRC network termina tion units NTUs Modem Information Rack X page MIB variables description 142 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Protected disableGlobalConfig You can protect individual rack cards from being globally configured by setting the pop up menu from nor mal 0 to protected 1 After you have set the protection option if you are finished making changes to the cur rent rack card click on the Submit button located at the right side of the rack card s row in the table to save the changes Note Setting the protection to zormal 0 will enable the rack card to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Note After submitting the protection setting you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Local Circuit ID localCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed within the Configure Cards page or from the Slot Configuration page After clicking the Sub mit Query button to input the string to the management system you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001
162. d by each rack in the system Replace the X shown in the variable name with the appropriate rack number to label the specific variable name i e rack2Enable System Level Information 236 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Rack X Enable rackXEnable This is where you can enable or disable a rack for use by the system You will almost always want to have the rack enabled but it can be useful to disable a rack if Your system configuration has fewer rack cards than will fill the number of installed racks in which case all un installed racks should be disabled The 1001MC will not poll the address range for a rack that is dis abled so this will shorten the time needed to poll the system You would like to remove cards from the rack without generating an alarm Disabling the rack prevents it from sending alarms to the 1001MC View Rack X hyperlink Click on this link to display the Modem Information Rack X page The Modem Information Rack page displays an overview of the NetLink rack that is being managed For more information refer to section Modem Informa tion Rack X on page 239 Address Range Displays the addresses in groups of 15 that will be polled for the defined rack for example the address range for rack 1 would be 1 15 rack 2 would be 16 30 and so on Total Slots Available rackXSlotsAvailable Displays the number of slots available for the rack based on the number of power supplies in
163. d detector are turned on Loop Timeout loopTo This selects the amount of time that the unit will remain in test mode when the remote test mode is invoked If the responding unit is not taken out of test mode within this time period the unit will automatically time out and return to normal data mode Model 2701 Configuration page MIB variables description 152 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management RDL Type rdlType This displays the selected remote loopback type that will be used when initiating a remote loopback Available options are csu l e v54 2 Config Type configType The following options are available e switch config 0 The 2701RC is using the DIP switch control for its configuration software config 1 The 2701RC is using the software control for its configuration Test Mode from DTE testModeDTE When enabled the 2701RC will respond to LL and RDL signals coming from the DTE Note Only applies to 2701 RC rack cards with an X 21 or V 35 interface Slot Configuration page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Slot Configuration page From the Modem Infor mation page the address column creates a list of hyperlinks to the Slot Configuration page associated with the spec ified address The Slot Configuration page can be used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors
164. d modifying global configuration templates 159 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management The second part is the Unit Configuration section see figure 78 for the configuration of the E1 link parame ters There are 16 configurable parameters What follows is a description of them with the available options for each Unit Configuration Line Format frame G703 0 y Clock Mode Jintemal CLK 1 gt DTE Rate 2048 Line Coding code HDB3 0 lt CRC Framing disabled y CAS Multi Framing disabled 0 y Line Build Out lbo 1200hm 1 Tx Clock Timing imtemal El Yad Loop enabied v EP Switch enabled E Pattern Select very In Band Loops enabled 1 y Loop Timeout time outSmin 0 RDL Type v54 2 Contig Type software config 1 Test Mode DTE disabled 0 lt Submit Query Figure 78 Unit Configuration section of the web management table e Line Format frame G703 0 This is called either Clear Channel or Transparent mode The DTE Rate is always 2 408 Mbps and the Channel Assignment table does not affect the configuration when this option is cho sen frame G704 1 This is channelized mode When selected the Channel Assignment table directly determines the DTE Rate DTE Rate There are no configurable options for this parameter however it is affected by two configurable parame ters the Line Format and the Channel
165. d remote units are linked the units will begin updating the remote information in the table and Line Status set to datamode 2 e Ifa rack card is installed in the rack without a customer premise unit connected the remote information will be left as either none or highlighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified The following sections define the MIB variables that are shown in the Configuration Status table Configuration Status configStatus3088RC This is the title of the status table and displays the configuration status of the rack card The following status can be displayed Negotiating 0 The 1001MC is receiving the rack card s configuration for the first time Static 1 The 1001MC is showing the updated and correct configuration for the 3088RC ImplementingChanges 2 The 1001MC is updating configuration changes to the 3088RC Local Model Code localModelCode remoteModelCode These variables display the local and remote models codes for the units that were found in the specified address Model 3088RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 204 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management DTE Rate dteRate3088RC This variable displays the DTE rate for the link This is the Nx64 kbps data rate selected by the number of acti vated channels Clock Mode clockMode3088RC This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink E1 modems The following status variables ca
166. d to When you are using an IM2RC K with a 1095RC rack card the system administrator should set the Local Clock Mode to external either external receiveRecover 1 or external external 4 and the Local Framing Mode to slotted When you are using an IM1 K and a 1095 standalone at the remote site the system administrator should set the Clock Mode to external external 4 and the Remote Framing Mode to slotted Illegal configuration messages If you are receiving an invalid configuration indication after creating a configuration it is resulting from an illegal combination of variables In most cases the cause of the problem has to do with the Framing Mode vari able Patton DSL modems should only be set to the slotted mode when you are using an IM2RC K with the 1095RC or an IMI K with the 1095 standalone unit Also if you are using a IM2RC K or IMI K interface card the 1095 1095RC must always be set to the external clock mode Review the table below for a list of valid configurations that can be used with the 1095 1095RC Local Clock Mode Local Framing Mode Remote Clock Mode Remote Framing Mode mena External Normal Receive Recover Normal External Slotted Receive Recover Normal External Slotted External Slotted Receive Recover Normal Internal Normal Receive Recover Normal External Normal a Denotes a unit that must have an IM2RC K or IMI K installed System Config 268 Model 1001MC Operati
167. de off 0 fivel1 2 511 is the pattern that is used when the pattern generator and detector are turned on fiveller 3 511 with errors is the pattern that is used when the pattern generator and detector are turned on lal 4 Local loopback e lalWith511 5 Local loopback with pattern generator set to output 511 pattern e lalWith511er 6 Local loopback with pattern generator set to output 511 pattern with errors rdl 7 Remote digital loopback e rdlWith511 8 Remote digital loopback with pattern generator set to output 511 pattern rdlWith511er 9 Remote digital loopback with pattern generator set to output 511 pattern with errors Total Slots Available totalConfigSlots Displays the number of configurable slots available in the system Total Cards Installed totalActiveSlots Displays the number of cards the system has found Power Supplies Installed boxPowerSupplies Displays the number of power supplies installed in the system Total System Warnings boxWarningNumber Displays the number of warnings that have been generated by the system Total System Errors boxErrorNumber Displays the number of errors that have been generated by the system Clear All System Alarms clearAlarms Click on this button to clear alarms for the entire system Note The System Log will still display the errors after the Clear All Sys tem Alarms button is clicked Rack X Top Level The following variables are use
168. del 1001MC column is the sum of all errors for the system including the individual modems Local User Id localUserID User supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Local Model Code localModelCode This column displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address The Model Code is also a hyperlink into the configuration page for the NetLink modem and its remote unit The model code information is passed to the Model 1001MC after the card is placed online The Model 1001MC is auto sensing meaning that when a card is found or lost the information will automatically be updated in the sys tem You are not required to setup the Model Code information for each slot When a card is removed from the system the Model Code will be erased and an error or warning will be displayed for the slot this depends on the settings in the Slot Configuration page Remote User Id remoteUserID Note This feature is not supported by Model 270XRC network termina tion units NTUs Remote Model Code remoteModelCode Note This feature is not supported by Model 270XRC network termina tion units NTUs Modem Informa
169. dentification information such as model codes and user IDs Figure 117 shows the Modem Information page a description of each variable follows Patton Electronics Home Page MODEM INFORMATION RACK 1 HOME Slots Available 15 LE About 1001MC Modems Installed 15 z Configure Cards Number of Power Supplies 1 pay System Info Rack Protection Mode noma SH DownLoad Submit Query gt System Log S System Cont Power Supply 1 Status available 0 28 Help Power Supply 2 Status notnstalled 2 a hr Clear Rack 1 Alarms Card Address LineStatus Warmngs Errors Local User Id Local ModelCode Remote User Id Remote ModelCode Protected Local c Model 0 0 0 RM261C Model 1001MC None None None None Demo 2 M startup 1 10 0 None SEEN None nonc normal 0 test offic r 2ARO 2 startup 1 0 0 None CSS None Ga noma ARC 3 startup 1 10 0 None modell 092ARC None gone normal 0 L x Figure 117 Modem Information page Slots Available totalConfigSlots Displays the number of configurable slots available in the rack Modems Installed rackXCardsInstalled Displays the number of modem cards installed in the rack that the system has found Number of Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies This is where you specify the number of power supplies installed in the rack this value determines the addressing range for the rack In the case of a redundant power supply
170. displays the DTE rate for the link This is the Nx64 kbps data rate selected by the number of acti vated channels Line Coding lineCoding2707RC The following status variables can be displayed AMI line coding HDB3 line coding Line Build Out lineBuildOut This displays the selected line build out either 75 ohm or 120 ohm FP Switches frntSwitch This displays if the front panel toggle switches used for loopbacks and pattern generators are enabled or disabled H W Test mode testModeSetind This displays any test mode invoked from the toggle switches and DTE test mode lines This option will be highlighted in blue if the unit is in test mode S W Test mode testModeSet2707RC This displays any test mode invoked through the NMS See next configuration for information about invoking test modes through the NMS This option will be highlighted in blue if the unit is in test mode Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page MIB variables description 182 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Loop Time Out loopTo This displays the amount of time that the unit responding to a Remote Loop command will remain in test mode when the RL test mode is invoked If the unit is not taken out of test mode by the menu within this time period the unit will automatically time out and return to normal data mode The timeout does not apply for loops selected via the front panel switches TM from DTE testModeDTE This displays
171. ds System Info DownLoad System Log SNMP System Config Help Z e zZ m lt x O Z m T V Q lt Patton Electronics SLOT CONFIGURATION PAGE Card Address 1 Local Model Code model 2707R0 X21 1 View Rack 1 Card Identification Information Local User ID user 1 Remote User ID None Clear Local 10 Clear Remote 1D Card Identification Information Local Circuit ID User 1 Clear Local Circuit ID Submit Remote Circuit ID remote test Submit Clear Remote Circuit 1D Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms Hardware Reset Card Lost Indication Line Down Indication 4b gt Figure 89 Slot Configuration page Starting from the HOME page to access the Slot Configuration page for the 2707RC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Card Address for the 2707RC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 89 the 2707RC was installed in slot 1 Figure 90 on page 177 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 176 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management View Rack 1 1001MC Configure Cards Information System Lo System Log SNMP MIB System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 90 Web page navigation to Slot Configuration page System Level Modem Infor Information mation Rack X Record Information Hard
172. dule installed with your 1095 at the remote site the units must have the Clock Mode set to external external and the Framing Mode for both the local and remote units must be set to slotted Ifyou have any other interface connected to your 1095RC or your 1095 modems the Framing Mode must be set to normal The system administrator should only set the Clock Mode to external external 4 if there is an IM2RC K installed in the 1095RC at the rack and an IMI K installed in the 1095 standalone unit at the remote site When setting a unit for the external clock mode the unit must have an external clock source in order to make a link When using either an IM2RC K or an IMI K the K module will always provide the external clock for Creating and modifying global configuration templates 121 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management the unit so it is not necessary to have a G 703 G 704 link available When using any other type of serial inter face make sure that an external clock is provided by the DTE equipment or the modems will not link Notes on clock mode settings The Clock Mode Setting determines the source of timing for the link Most applications will use one of the following configurations e internal receiveRecover 0 external receiveRecover 1 There are special situations which would require the use of the external external 4 clock mode setting This setting should only be used when the application has an IM2R
173. e 16 E CAJA Login HOME System Log Modify Configuration Next Configuration Configuration and management 51 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Displaying the Model 1092 Configuration Slot page The Model 1092 Configuration Slot page see figure 22 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 1092A and the remote CPE box When the page displays the unit is set to the onLine state and the cur rent configuration is displayed 4 Model 1092ARC management Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Config Help Model 1092 ARC Configuration Slot 11 Line Status Processor Mode normal 0 dataMode 2 Previous Card Refresh Current Page Next Card Input ModefonLine 0 Submit Query Configuration Status static 1 Local Remote Model Code model1092ARC 2 nO DTE Rate rate32k 0 rate32k 0 Clock Mode Local Remote internal receiveRecover 0 receiveRecover 2 Respond to RDL request enabled 0 enabled 0 TM from DTE enabled 0 enabled 0 Enable Front Panel Switches enabled 1 enabled 1 HW Test Mode oR o1 SW Test Mode o off1 IINE lane lana Figure 22 Model 1092 Configuration Slot page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 1092 Configuration Slot page for the 1092ARC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Local_Mode
174. e you can update the software that is running in the NetLink mDSL rack card You can also update the software in the NetLink stand alone unit through the front panel control port on the unit Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description The Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page enables you to update the configuration of the 1095RC NetLink mDSL modems that are installed in the system After making changes to the configuration on this page select Back to return to the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page then select onLine as the Input Mode and finally select Submit Query to send the new information to the Model 1001MC over the network Note Ifthe NetLink mDSL modems are not connected and changes made to the remote configuration will be lost after the units link up All parameters in the Local column can be changed at any time Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description 107 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management The following sections describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page Card Address nmsSlotID Displays the address of the selected NetLink mDSL modem Line Status lineStatus 1095 This variable displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 In this mode the units are linked up and ready t
175. e 0 e superVisoryMode 1 To make configuration changes to the NetLink E1 NTUs you must first set this bit to superVisoryMode 1 When the Input Mode is set to superVisoryModel the Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear Select the Modify Configuration hyperlink The Model 2701 Configuration page will appear see section Model 2701 Configuration page MIB variables description on page 149 for more information After making config uration changes to the NetLink E1 NTUs in the Model 2701 RC Configuration page return to this page by clicking on the Back hyperlink and place the Input Mode variable back to onLine 0 This will notify the Model 1001MC that the configuration has completed and will cause it to copy the new configuration into the NetLink E1 NTU configuration space If this is not done the NetLink E1 NTU will not recognize the config uration changes that were made Model 2701 Configuration Slot page Configuration Status table description The Configuration Status table shows the configuration for the set of units There are columns for the local and remote units If a field is highlighted in yellow it signifies one of two possible conditions e Ar sarr up the Model 1001MC will display a default configuration for the card and all fields will be high lighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified During the negotiation phase the NetLink El NTU modem will update the configuration in the Model 1001M
176. e Model 1001MC network management station Connect frame ground to signal ground see section Configuring frame ground Set the system address see section Setting the 1094ARC system address When you are finished install the Model 1094ARC front card and rear I O card using the installation proce dures in the manual that came with the modem Configuring frame ground The Model 1001MC uses an internal bus to communicate with the NetLink modems installed in your system The Model 1094ARC rear I O card must have frame ground GND connected to signal GND through a 100 ohm resistor This is done by configuring a jumper on the modems rear I O card Refer to the installation manual that came with the rack card for more information on this jumper setting Setting the 1094ARC system address The manual that was shipped with the 1094RC defines switch S1 as Address This switch sets the address of the modem in the NetLink system Each card in the chassis is given a unique address through the setting of switch S1 Note Standalone units use the address of the rack card that they are con nected to Polling overview The Model 1001MC sends poll messages along the internal bus looking for cards installed in the system Once a card is found it is placed online and communication with the management station can begin If the address of the NetLink modem is not configured or does not match the address range of the rack that it is installed in th
177. e Model 1001MC may not recognize the card The address range that is polled is determined by the configuration of the system The system administrator must make sure that the software configuration within the Model 1001MC matches the hardware configuration of the system Polling rack 1 and daisy chained racks The Model 1001MC uses the number of power supplies in the sys tem to determine what the address range of the individual racks will be The number of power supplies installed in each rack is entered on the Modem Information page If the system is set for two power supplies installed the 1001MC will automatically set the number of slots available displayed on the Modem Informa tion page in the chassis to 13 If the system is set for a single power supply installed the 1001MC will auto matically set the number of slots available in the chassis to 15 Using this information the Model 1001MC will poll the specified address range in each rack Thus in a single power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from address 1 to address 15 Note The 1001MC is always address 0 The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 16 In a redundant power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from Installing NetLink modem cards 22 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation address 1 to address 13
178. e Patton Electronics Model 1001MC and NetLinkTM modems Knowledge of basic networking con cepts is assumed Structure This guide contains the following chapters Chapter 1 on page 10 introduces the Model 1001MC and provides an overview of the management window Chapter 2 on page 15 describes how to install the Model 1001MC Chapter 3 on page 36 describes how to boot the Model 1001MC install cables set up the address range for NetLink modems log into the HTTP HTML administration pages and save HTTP HTML object changes Chapter 4 on page 47 describes how to manage a 1092ARC NetLink modem Chapter 5 on page 67 describes how to manage a 1094ARC NetLink modem Chapter 6 on page 89 describes how to manage a 1095RC NetLink modem Chapter 7 on page 129 describes how to manage a 2701 RC NetLink modem Chapter 8 on page 167 describes how to manage a 2707RC NetLink modem Chapter 9 on page 187 describes how to manage a 3088RC G SHDSL NTU rack card Chapter 10 on page 220 is the 1001MC NMS HTTP HTML web page reference Chapter 11 on page 276 contains troubleshooting and maintenance information Chapter 12 on page 286 contains information on contacting Patton technical support for assistance About this guide Model 1001MC Operations Guide Typographical conventions used in this document This section describes the typographical conventions and terms used in this guide General conventions The procedures described in th
179. e for equipment returned without a Return Authorization Introduction 287 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 12 Contacting Patton for assistance Return for credit policy Less than 30 days No Charge Your credit will be issued upon receipt and inspection of the equipment 30 to 120 days We will add a 20 restocking charge crediting your account with 80 of the purchase price Over 120 days Products will be accepted for repairs only RMA numbers RMA numbers are required for all product returns You can obtain an RMA by doing one of the following Completing a request on the RMA Request page in the Support section at www patton com By calling 1 301 975 1000 and speaking to a Technical Support Engineer e By sending an e mail to returns patton com All returned units must have the RMA number clearly visible on the outside of the shipping container Please use the original packing material that the device came in or pack the unit securely to avoid damage during shipping Shipping instructions The RMA number should be clearly visible on the address label Our shipping address is as follows Patton Electronics Company RMA xxxx 7622 Rickenbacker Dr Gaithersburg MD 20879 4773 USA Patton will ship the equipment back to you in the same manner you ship it to us Patton will pay the return shipping costs Warranty Service and Returned Merchandise Authorizations RMAs 288
180. e line There are three possible values that can be displayed linedown 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data testMode 3 Alarm counters For the four alarm counters you may choose to do numerous actions upon detecting errors nothing incre ment the counter upon each occurrences of the error send an SNMP trap or send a Syslog message The choice is determined by configuring the Line Down Indicator on the Slot Configuration Page The following table clarifies what the parameter will do Increment the Alarm Counter Send a Syslog message Send an SNMP trap on the web page None v Warning v v Error v v v LOS losAlarm Displays the number of times Loss of Sync on the El line is detected It is incremented when synchronization to the El stream is lost This number is accumulating in the 1001MC Note Alarm counters severity level is controlled by the Line Down Indica tion level The following options are available none Only Syslog message will be sent warning Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Warning and web page warning counter will be incremented e error Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Error the web page error counter will be incremented and an SNMP trap message will be sent Model 3088RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 202 Model 1001MC Operations
181. e the local circuit ID information click on the Clear Local Circuit ID button then click on the Submit button Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile Flash within the Model 1001MC Note The remote circuit ID is only used with Patton xDSL rack cards Slot Configuration 244 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference To configure the remote circuit ID type the ID into the Remote Circuit ID text box then click the Submit but ton located next to the Remote Circuit ID text box to save the changes Note After submitting the card identification information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Clear Remote Circuit ID button If you want to delete the remote circuit ID information click on the Clear Remote Circuit ID button then click on the Submit button Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms resetStatus Selecting this push button erases the alarms errors and warnings associated with the specified slot Note Errors and warnings will still be listed in the System Log Hardware Reset resetStatus Selecting this button will force the current rack card modem to perform a hardware reset Card Lost Indication cardLostlndication This variable lets you choose what type of indication will be made if a modem is rem
182. ease refer to the user manual that came with the Model 1095RC for more information Note Framing mode was introduced into the Model 1095RC modems at software revision 2 2 0 If you have a modem with a software revision earlier than this it will ignore the framing mode bit On the 1001MC web page the bit will always be highlighted in yellow showing that the bit is not being updated Contact Patton Electronics for software upgrades for your units if you require this feature HW Test Mode testModelnd 1 095 remotetestModelnd 1 095 These read only variables notify you that the specified unit has been placed into a test mode through the hard ware This could have been done either through the front panel switches or from the DTE if the TM from DTE is enabled When a test mode is displayed the field will be highlighted in blue to give you quick notification SW Test Mode testModeSet1095 remotetestModeSet 1 095 These variables notify you that the specified unit has been placed into a test mode through the management station The management can place a unit into a test mode within the Model 1095RC Update Configuration page explained in more detail below Software Rev softVersion 1 095 remotesoftversion 1095 These read only MIB variables display the current version of code that is running in the NetLink mDSL modems Check the Download page to see if the Model 1001MC has a newer version of code available for downloading Through the download web pag
183. eed E eee eye eee 30 Sete add A ac 40 Introduction to the intemal A ML management pagesi ean aaae e 41 Logemeintothe HI TERE ENI administrationi papes ea n e I MI T E IEEE 41 PRPP TNI and S NME object ormat erea e e E E NT E 42 Saving PE PR TNI obec an a A E E EA E E CO PESTO 42 mae a E T 42 PTTL RATML oe 42 Ponie n TIE 44 Ze RHH Le 44 SOT E eese ed M OPE e eere 45 ST E ML A EE 45 ar 45 SNMP eae a A A E A AE EE OO 45 A os 45 REO rotar Eo T EN 45 A T EOS TINI M 46 36 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 3 Getting started Introduction To complete this section you will need the following a VI 100 terminal or terminal emulator a null modem cable an IP address for your box a subnet mask for your box the IP address of the default gateway for your LAN Booting the Model 1001MC Note Ifyouare starting the Model 1001MC for the first time you must log in via the rear panel RS 232 configuration port and set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway Note The configuration port on your 1001MC is a DTE which requires a null modem or equivalent cable when connecting to a terminal Using personal computer communications software Procomm Windows Terminal BitCom PC Any where etc set the configuration of your communications software to the following parameters Data rate 19 200 bps Async character format 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity Terminal emulation V 1 100 or similar terminal emulation
184. el 2701 RC NTUs in multiple racks or those in just one rack This section contains the following information to help you configure and use templates Protecting individual Model 1001 racks and 2701RC rack cards from global modification You may not want all racks or NTUs to be modified when you apply the global template so section Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 2701 RC NTUs from global modification describes how to protect individual 1001 racks and 2701 RC NTUs from being globally configured Creating a template see section Creating a template on page 158 e Modifying a template see section Modifying a template on page 163 Deleting a template see section Deleting a template on page 164 Applying a template see section Applying a template on page 164 Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 2701RC NTUs from global modification This section describes how to protect 1001 racks and 2701 RC NTU cards from being modified when a global modification is applied This is useful if you are setting all but a few cards to the same configuration You may protect an entire rack or only selected individual rack cards To protect an entire Model 1001 rack see the section Protecting an entire Model 1001 rack from global configuration on page To protect a selected Model 2701RC rack card see section Protecting a Model 2701RC rack card from global configuration on page Protecting an entire Model 10
185. elected the Submit Query button if you decide not to implement these changes select the Clear Changes button This will set the configuration back to the settings that were there when this page was entered Set Default Configuration Selecting this button will place the default configuration into the Next Configuration table Slot Configuration page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Slot Configuration page From the Modem Information page the address column creates a list of hyperlinks to the Slot Configuration page associated with the specified address The Slot Configuration page can be used to set slot specific information related to the sys tem and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors and warning Card Address nmsSlotID Displays the address of the card Local Model Code localModelCode Displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address View Rack X hyperlink Click on the View Rack X link to display the Modem Information Rack X window see section Modem Infor mation Rack X on page 239 for more information Card Identification Information Local User Id localUserlD User supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the ne
186. em Log Login HOME Record Information Hard Reset SNMP MIB System Log Modi System Log RAM System Log Flash 7 Model 2701RC management View Rack 1 Card Slot Address Configuration Modem Infor mation Rack X D Modem Configuration E Local Model Code View Rack 8 Supervisory Submit Query Modify Configuration Next Configuration E lt gt lt gt D Figure 71 Web page navigation to Model 2701 Configuration page Configuration and management 138 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Displaying the Slot Configuration Page The Slot Configuration Page see figure 72 is used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats that slot in the case of errors or warnings Patton Electronics SLOT CONFIGURATION PAGE Home Page HOME Card Address 4 About 1001 MC Local Model Code model2701RC ETH 1 1 Import Export View Rack 1 gur E Configure Cards Card Identification Information System Info DownLoad Local User ID ID_1Local System Log Remote User ID None Submit Query SNMP Clear Local ID Clear Remote ID System Config Help Card Identification Information Local Circuit ID Test Local Submit Query Clear Local Circuit ID Remote Circuit ID Test Remote Submit Query Clear Remote Circuit ID Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms Hardware Reset Card Lost Indication errarf2 z Line Down Indication
187. en if you have no other IP addressing entries to make click the Submit button Gateway boxGateway This parameter defines the current gateway for the network Type the address into the text box then if you have no other IP addressing entries to make click the Submit button Note After submitting the IP addressing information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Box Contact Information Box Location boxLocation User defined string that represents the location of the box This variable is displayed on the HOME page Type the box location into the text box then if you have no other box contact entries to make click the Sub mit button Box Name boxName User defined string that represents the name of the box This variable is displayed on the HOME page Type the box name into the text box then if you have no other box contact entries to make click the Submit button Box Contact boxContact User defined string that represents the contact for the box This variable is displayed on the HOME page Type the box contact information into the text box then if you have no other box contact entries to make click the Submit button Note After submitting the box contact information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration
188. ently have in the system Browse Submit Query Figure 114 Import Export main window Export Configuration Note The exported configuration file is a text format file Do not try however to edit the operating characteristics contained in the file Note The parameters that will be exported are the power up settings as they are stored in flash memory and may not be the current operating parameters To ensure that you export the most current parameters go to HOME then click on the Record Current Configuration button under Immediate Actions Import Export 233 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference To export the flash configuration click on the Export Flash link on the Import Export main page The Model 1001MC will display text configuration information resembling that shown in figure 115 spese joke ehe doko spo jo joke koe ok oook Flash configuration data for 1001 MC The data below is the current hexadecimal representation of your configurable data inthe system Selectthe File Save As option to save the data to a file This file can be reloadedinto your system at a later date Y ou may edit and comm ent the top portion of this file but do not modify any data after the at symbol Also do not put an at symbol in the comment area START CONFIGURATION DATA a fconfigData 5 0x01 00 00 00 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 03 03 03 03 08 08 08 08 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 03 03 03 03 03 08 08 08
189. es into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Unix Facility Specify the minimum priority for a message that will be sent to Flash storage The following options are available e disable 0 e user 1 mail 2 e daemon 3 e auth 4 syslog 5 lpr 6 news 7 uucp 8 cron 9 e authpriv 10 e ftp 11 local0 16 e locall 17 local2 18 local3 19 e local4 20 local5 21 local6 22 local7 23 Select the facility setting from the pop up menu then click the Submit button Note After submitting the change you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the config uration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information System Log Modify 255 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Maintenance Maintain Flash Storage syslogFlashClear This variable is used to notify you about the status of the flash storage area The following options are available syslogFlashOK 0 syslogFlashFull 1 If the flash storage area is full this variable will read syslogFlashFull e syslogFlashClear 2 The flash storage area can be erased by setting this variable to syslogFlashClear and selecting the Submit Query button System Log Volatile Memory System Log Volatile System og log Volatile The System Log Volatile Memory page see figure 123 contains a log of messages that have been sent to the RAM
190. es to the cur rent rack card click on the Submit button located at the right side of the rack card s row in the table to save the changes Note Setting the protection to normal 0 will enable the rack card to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Note After submitting the protection setting you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Local Circuit ID localCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed from the Configure Cards page or from the Slot Configuration page see section Slot Config uration on page 243 for more information After you have set the local circuit ID if you are finished making changes to the current rack card click on the Submit button located at the right side of the rack card s row in the table to save the changes Note After submitting the local circuit ID information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed from the Configure Cards page or from the Slot Configuration
191. ew Rack 1 1001MC Configure Cards Information System Lo System Log SNMP MIB System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 27 Web page navigation to Slot Configuration page System Level z Modem Infor Information mation Rack X Record Information Hard Reset For more information about items on the Slot Configuration page see Slot Configuration page MIB variables description on page 65 Modem Information page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Modem Information page Slots Available totalConfigSlots Displays the number of configurable slots available in the rack Modems Installed rackXCardsInstalled Displays the number of modem cards installed in the rack that the system has found Number of Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies This is where you specify the number of power supplies installed in the rack this value determines the addressing range for the rack In the case of a redundant power supply system you should set this variable to 2 this will inform the Model 1001MC that there should be 2 power supplies in the system Rack Protection Mode Note For Model 1095RC only If you want to protect all Model 1095RC rack cards installed in the current rack from being globally config ured select protected 1 from the pop up menu then click the Submit button For more information about the system configuration feat
192. fers a wide array of free technical services If you have questions about any of our other products we recommend you begin your search for answers by using our technical knowledge base Here we have gathered together many of the more commonly asked questions and compiled them into a searchable database to help you quickly solve your problems Online support available at www patton com E mail support e mail sent to support patton com will be answered within 1 business day Telephone support standard telephone support is available Monday through Friday from 8 00 A M to 5 00 P M EST 8 00 to 17 00 UTC 5 Monday through Friday by calling 1 301 975 1007 Additional References 8 About this guide Model 1001MC Operations Guide Service All warranty and non warranty repairs must be returned freight prepaid and insured to Patton Electronics All returns must have a Return Materials Authorization number on the outside of the shipping container This number may be obtained from Patton Electronics Technical Services at Tel 1 301 975 1007 E mail support patton com URL http www patton com Note Packages received without an RMA number will not be accepted 9 Technical support Chapter 1 introdu Chapter contents introduced leelo Model 1001MC management overview 10 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 1 Introduction Introduction The Model 1001MC NetLink SNMP Management Card see figure 1 enables an SN
193. fication that there is a problem 2 Verifying that the problem exists 3 Checking the Home About 1001MC or System Level Information pages to see if errors or warnings are listed see section Checking 1001MC web pages for warnings or errors 4 Reviewing the System Log Non Volatile Memory page for information on what may have caused the problem see section Using the System Log to check for network problems on page 282 5 Checking rack card LEDs to see if one is displaying a fault condition refer to the user manual that came with each rack card for information on using front panel LEDs to troubleshoot problems 6 Performing diagnostics tests with an external analyzer to isolate the problem see section 1001MC test mode diagnostics on page 282 If you require more help refer to chapter 12 Contacting Patton for assistance on page 286 Checking 1001MC web pages for warnings or errors Do the following 1 After verifying the existence of a network problem check one of the following 1001 MC web pages to see if errors or warnings are listed Note Warnings are highlighted in yellow and errors are highlighted in red Home page see figure 139 on page 279 About 1001MC page see figure 140 on page 279 System Level Information page see figure 141 on page 280 2 Ifno warnings or errors are listed check rack card front panel LEDs to see if one is displaying a fault con dition refer to the user manual th
194. figuration a alos 243 EET EE ESETE oTa l D D E A E oa cios 243 Local Model Code UocalModel Codi ici in dicas 243 View Rak X hyperlink oett apa e il A cas 243 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Card Identification formation ci ias 243 Local ser ld localUserID 2 2 2 deett ettet ret rete tdeo EE iia 243 Clear Local ID b tton 2 5 o en eet etre ERR TEE Rte E 244 Remote User Id remoteUserl D 25 0 reete A ie en ed 244 Clear Remote ID button 244 Local Circate ID local Circulo rte Ee ettet eee oet reor DR 244 Clear Local Circuit TD Du ttofh 2 erre dia 244 Remote CircuitlD remoteCitetitID 5 2 lia 244 Clear Remote Circuit ID button cuina an ia REPE Ee EET Te ciones 245 Alaro Information na ite eeu HER ie iit ute e 245 Clear Slot Alarms resetStatHs iere e eei iia tae 245 Hardware Reset eset Stats isc dea is 245 Card Lost Indication cardLostIndication iii iii 245 Line Down Indication lineDownludication osta eter teet rette errato nono daratan ngo iiio 245 SystelnInfoPBatlg iia et aeos ene sede eae ee eX Eee ense etae e Rev te ev abe Nanita 246 Current System Information ee eee te inline iia 246 IP Address DoxlpAddress iii etude ced tse tete ctt Deuce s Opern atte Ee re APUL dS 246 IP Mask Boxlp Mash narnia ert ddp tdi E PR ERE EPA RR LER ere RS 246 Current Gateway boxGateway 1 ea esee dp ee 246 Moduyine the IP addressing c ce erret triana 247 IP Address
195. figuration in the Model 1001MC with its last set of stored parameters As these fields are updated in the Model 1001MC the yellow highlighting will disappear signi fying that the information has been updated After the local and remote units are linked the units will begin updating the remote information in the table and Line Status set to datamode 2 e Ifa rack card is installed in the rack without a customer premise unit connected the remote information will be left as either none or highlighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified The following sections define the MIB variables that are shown in the Configuration Status table Model Code localModelCode remoteModelCode These variables display the local and remote models codes for the units that were found in the specified address DTE rate dteRate 1094 This variable displays the DTE rate for the link Because the NetLink HDSL modems are symmetrical same rate in both direction there is only one MIB variable that defines the DTE rate Clock Mode Local Remote This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink modems The display shows the Local clock mode rack card and then the remote clock mode TM From DTE dteTM1094 remotedteTM 1094 These MIB variables define whether you would like the modems to accept test mode requests from the DTE that is connected In normal applications this should be set to disable 1 When the application is using re
196. fo DownLoad System Loq SNMP System Confiq Help Figure 59 Model 1095 Global Configuration page Model 1095 Global Configuration Warning Please review your configuration before submitting it to the system Illegal configurations could cause links to lose syncronization Follow the hyperlink for more information on configuration options Configuration Information Modify Configuration Name test Valid Configuration Local Remote DTE Rate rate64k 3 Clock Mode Local Remote internal receiveRecover 0 receiveRecover 2 I Tx Data Sample Point normal TM from OTE Tanant Framing Mode normal 119 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management 2 Use the Local DTE Rate pop up menu to select local DTE rate You have the following choices rate64k 3 rate640k 12 rate1280k 22 rate1856k 32 ratel28k 4 rate704k 13 rate1344k 23 rate1920k 33 ratel92k 5 rate768k 14 ratel408k 24 rate1984k 34 rate256k 6 rate832k 15 ratel472k 25 rate2048k 35 rate320k 7 rate896k 16 rate1536k 26 rate2112k 36 rate384k 8 rate960k 17 ratel600k 28 rate2176k 37 rate448k 9 ratel024k 18 ratel664k 29 rate2240k 38 rate5 12k 10 ratel088k 19 ratel728k 30 rate2304k 39 rate576k 11 ratel216k 21 ratel792k 31
197. form software upgrades on the NetLink rack card modems installed in the system New software for the modems can be obtained from Patton Electronics and uploaded into the 1001MC system via a file transfer protocol FTP connection For more information refer to section Down load on page 249 System Log The System Log page displays Syslog messages Syslog messaging is a reporting tool used in the Model 1001MC to log run time operations There are several levels of messages and you can set the system to report only messages above a certain level For more information refer to section System Log on page 251 SNMP The SNMP web page enables you to download the Patton Enterprise MIBs for the Model 1001MC These MIBs are required if you plan to manage the system using a network management station NMS instead of the web page manager For more information refer to section SNMP on page 258 System Config The System Config web page is where Model 1095RC rack cards can be configured globally by templates you create If you use this capability you have the option to globally configure some or all Model 1095RC modems in multiple racks or those in just one rack For more information refer to section System Config on page 259 Help The Help Menu page provides hyperlinks to help pages located within the 1001MC For more information refer to section Help on page 275 Saving HTTP HTML object changes 45 Model 1001MC Operations G
198. formation FAN About 1001MC i El Configure Cards h v System Overview i System Info Apply System Configuration e iun Apply System Test Mode e SNMP Total Slots Available X 15 38 System Config Total Cards Installed 5 E Help Power Supplies Installed 1 E Total System Wamines 0 O Total System Errors 0 O Update gt s s Rack 1 Top Level Rack 1 Enable enabled 1 J Submit View Rack 1 Address Range X o 1 15 Total Slots Available 15 Total Cards Installed 5 Power Supplies Installed c 1 Total Errors i 0 Total Warnings L a YT L 0 Apply Rack Configuration CONFIG 1 0 Apply Test Mode Rack Protection Mode Clear Alarms Rack 2 Top Level Figure 65 System Level Information page 2 Locate the rack section of the System Level Information page that you will configure in figure 65 Rack 1 Top Level is being modified 3 Use the Apply Rack Configuration pop up menu see figure 65 to select the template you want to apply 4 Click the Apply Configuration button The template has been applied Creating and modifying global configuration templates 128 Chapter 7 Model 2701RC management Chapter contents A E E E Ora ESOO TOR 132 NN od 132 EA T EN eee eot E ET m TEES 132 Dip e ee TE EET TIAS 133 Displaying the Model 70URC Configuration Slot page ene EURO CUENTOS EUER 135 Making configuration changes to your MRE NetLimk NTU Tee a 136 Displ
199. g Volatile Memory page see figure 124 contains a log of messages that have been sent to the flash storage are using the Min Priority for Flash Storage variable in the Syslog Modify page Messages stored here will be saved even if the box reboots This page will show warnings highlighted in yellow and errors high lighted in red When an error or warning is displayed somewhere in the web pages this page will give a descrip tion of the error warning All information on this page is read only except a single push button at the top of the page which is described in more detail below Patton Electronics Home Page SYSTEM LOG Non Volatile Memory HOME System Up Time 0 days 0 hrs 27 min 46 sec About 1001MC 1 Configure Cards System Info DownLoad Time Message System Log SNMP e 0 days 0 hrs 0 min3 sec box boxmib c Enable Rack 1 0 days 0 hrs O min 7 see box rack c Card Found Address 11 0 days 0 hrs 2 min 13 sec box rack c Card Found Address 01 0 days 0 hrs 2 min 30 sec box rack c Card Found Address 02 0 days 0 hrs 2 min 34 sec func270 T fune2701 c Line Up A ddress 01 0 days 0 hrs 2 min 52 sec func270 T func2701 c Line Up A ddress 02 0 days 0 hrs 3 min 13 sec box rack e C ard Found Address 08 0 days 0 hrs 3 min 52 sec box rack c Card Found Address 09 0 days 0 hrs 38 min 24 sec funcidslfuncidsl c Line Up Address 11 0 days 0 hrs 38 min 52 sec funcidslfuncidsl c Line Down Address 11 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 2 sec System
200. g and modifying global configuration templates IES DE 114 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management 1001MC Configure Cards Information System Log System Log RAM SNMP MIB System Log Flash System Model 1095 Config Global Configuration Figure 55 Web page navigation to System Level Information page System Level Information System Log Modi Record Information Hard Reset 2 Use the Rack Protection Mode pop up menu see figure 54 to select protected 1 Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration command 3 Click the Apply Protection button The rack is now protected Creating and modifying global configuration templates 115 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Protecting a Model 1095RC rack card from global configuration Do the following to protect a single Model 1095RC rack card l Starting from the HOME page click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 choose the rack you want to protect in the example shown in figure 56 rack 1 was selected Figure 57 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system MODEM INFORMATION RACK 1 Card Display Type istPopOnly 0 Max Slots Available 13 Number of Power Supplies IB Submit Query Power Supply 1 Status available 0 Power
201. gal combinations of variables that could cause problems with the modems if implemented incorrectly Be sure to read the following information before creating a template Configuration rules Things to keep in mind when creating a template see section Configuration rules on page 263 Notes on clock mode settings see section Notes on clock mode settings on page 264 Notes on framing mode settings see section Notes on framing mode settings on page 264 Illegal configuration messages see section Illegal configuration messages on page 264 After reviewing the rules and notes go to section Procedure for creating a template on page 265 to learn how to create a template Configuration rules Keep in mind the following when creating a template Ifyou have an IM2RC K G 703 G 704 Rear Card installed with a 1095RC in your rack the unit must have the Local Clock Mode set to external and the Framing Mode set to slotted Ifyou have an IM1 K G 703 G 704 Quick Connect Module installed with your 1095 at the remote site the units must have the Clock Mode set to external external and the Framing Mode for both the local and remote units must be set to slotted e Ifyou have any other interface connected to your 1095RC or your 1095 modems the Framing Mode must be set to normal The system administrator should only set the Clock Mode to external external 4 if there is an IM2RC K installed in the 1095RC at the rack and an IMI K
202. ge System Level Information System Log Modi Record Information Hard Reset 2 Use the Rack Protection Mode pop up menu see figure 126 to select protected 1 Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration command 3 Click the Apply Protection button The rack is now protected System Config 261 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Protecting a Model 1095RC rack card from global configuration Do the following to protect a single Model 1095RC rack card 1 Starting from the HOME page click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 choose the rack you want to protect in the example shown in figure 128 rack 1 was selected Figure 129 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Patton Electronics Home Page MODEM INFORMATION RACK 1 HOME Slots Available 15 Ce About 1001MC Modems Installed 15 5 Configure Cards Number of Power Supplies fi Pay System Info Rack Protecnon Mode nomm al 0 EH DownLoad Submit Query gt System Log TAE SNMP Power Supply 1 Status available 0 A System Config t 2 Help Power Supply 2 Statusnotinstalled 2 A m Clear Rack 1 Alarms E Card Address LneStatus Warmngs Errors Local User Id Local ModelCode Remote User Id Remote ModelCode Protected Loca
203. guration Next Configuration page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page for the 1094ARC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Local Model Code for the 1094ARC you wish to manage gt Modify Configuration you first have to change input mode from onLine to superVisory Mode Figure 33 on page 75 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page see Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description on page 84 Configuration and management 74 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 1001MC Configure System Level Cards Information System Information System Log Login HOME Record Information Hard Reset SNMP MIB System Log Modi System Log RAM System Log Flash 5 e Model 1094ARC management View Rack 1 Cord Slot Address Configuration Modem Infor mation Rack X D Modem Configuration E Local Model Code View Rack 8 Supervisory Submit Query Modify Configuration Next Configuration Figure 33 Web page navigation to Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page Configuration and management 75 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management Displaying the Slot Configuration page The Slot Configuration page see figure 34 is
204. h Current Page hyperlink Select the Modify Configuration hyperlink The Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page will appear see section Model 2707RC Configuration Con figuration page MIB variables description on page 183 for more information After making configuration changes to the NetLink E1 NTUs in the Model 2707RC Configuration page return to this page and place the Input Mode variable back to onLine 0 This will notify the Model 1001MC that the configuration has com pleted and will cause it to copy the new configuration into the NetLink El NTU configuration space If this is not done the NetLink El NTU will not recognize the configuration changes that were made Model 2707RC Configuration Slot X page Configuration Status table description The Configuration Status table shows the configuration for the 2707RC card If a field is highlighted in yellow it signifies one of two possible conditions e Ar sarr up the Model 1001MC will display a default configuration for the card and all fields will be high lighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified During the negotiation phase the NetLink El NTU modem will update the configuration in the Model 1001MC with its last set of stored parameters As these fields are updated in the Model 1001MC the yellow highlighting will disap pear signifying that the information has been updated After the local and remote units are linked the units will begin upda
205. hat are installed in the system After making changes to the configuration on this page select Back to return to the Model 1092 Configuration Slot page then select onLine as the Input Mode and finally select Submit Query to send the new information to the Model 1001 MC over the network Note Ifthe NetLink iDSL modems are not connected and changes made to the remote configuration will be lost after the units link up All parameters in the Local column can be changed at any time The following sections describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page Card Address nmsSlotID Displays the address of the selected NetLink iDSL modem Line Status lineStatusiDSL This variable displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 In this mode the units are linked up and ready to send data testMode 3 Processor Mode processorModeiDSL This variable displays the status of the processor running on the NetLink iDSL There are four values that are significant to you e normal 0 When the processor is in normal 0 mode the NetLink iDSL modem is monitoring itself and sending the status information to the Model 1001MC internalProcessing 1 When the processor is in the internalProcessing 1 mode it is either busy down loading code to the internal DSP or setting the data pump negotiating 2 When the pro
206. he system configuration feature refer to section System Config on page 259 Modem Information page MIB variables description 101 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Submit button After you have defined the number of power supplies installed in the rack and the rack protection mode click on the Submit button to save the changes Power Supply 1 Status Displays the current status of power supply 1 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 If the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Power Supply 2 Status Displays the current status of power supply 2 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 lf the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Clear Rack X Alarms clearAlarms Click on this button to clear alarms for the current rack Note The System Log will still display the errors after the Clear Rack X Alarms button is clicked Note The following info
207. he Model 2701RC Configuration page 3 Make your configuration changes or select the Set Default Configuration button Select the Submit Query button to place the changes into the 1001MC s temporary memory If you decide that you do not want your changes implemented you can select the Clear Changes button Select the Back hyperlink to return to the Model 2701 Configuration Slot page 6 Change the Input Mode back to onLine and select the Submit Query button When the unit returns to the online state the 2701 RC will begin implementing the configuration changes Note The variables that you changed are now highlighted in yellow After the 2701RC processes the new information the highlighting will be removed For more information about items on the Model 2701 Configuration Slot page see Model 2701 RC Config uration Slot X page MIB variables description on page 143 Configuration and management 136 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Displaying the Model 2701 Configuration page The Model 2701 Configuration page see figure 70 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 2701RC and the remote CPE box Paiton Electronics Home L I l Tag Channel 14 active Channel 30 fective 2 Channel 15 actve m Channel 31 Taan 2 HOME About THEE Channel 16 acivell Channel 32 azan Impo ort Submit Query Configure Cards System
208. he Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Note After submitting the remote circuit ID information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Modem Information page MIB variables description 180 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page Model 2707RC Configuration Slot nmsSlotlD Displays the address of the NetLink E1 G 703 NTU The address is defined by the DIP switch setting of 3 and S on the rack card Line Status lineStatus Displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed linedown 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data testMode 3 Input Mode mode2707RC The following settings are available onLine 0 e superVisoryMode 1 To make configuration changes to the NetLink E1 NTUs you must first set this bit to superVisoryMode 1 When the Input Mode is set to superVisoryMode 1 the Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear on the web page next to the Refres
209. he Slot Configuration page Submit button Click the Submit button to input the changes to the management system After clicking the Submit button you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Note After submitting the remote circuit ID information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Model 1095 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page Model 1095RC Model 1095 Configuration Slot nmsSlotlD Displays the address of the NetLink mDSL modem The address is defined by the DIP switch setting of S1 on the rack card The remote standalone unit has no address specified but uses that address of the rack card that it is connected to Model 1095 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description 104 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Line Status lineStatus1095 Displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 testMode 3 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data Processor Mode processor
210. he following to make configuration changes to your NetLink modem Note You must be logged in as superuser to perform the following procedure 1 With the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page displayed change the Input Mode see figure 44 to super VisoryMode The Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear 2 Click on the Modify Configuration hyperlink to display the Model 1095RC Next Configuration page 3 Make your configuration changes or select the Set Default Configuration button Select the Submit Query button to place the changes into the 1001MC temporary memory If you decide that you do not want your changes implemented you can select the Clear Changes button Select the Back hyperlink to return to the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page 6 Change the Input Mode back to onLine and select the Submit Query button When the unit returns to the online state the 1095RC will begin implementing the configuration changes Note The variables that you changed are now highlighted in yellow After the 1095RC processes the new information the highlighting will be removed For more information about items on the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page see After submitting the remote circuit ID information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more informa tion on page 104 Configuration and management 96 Model 1001MC O
211. he highlighting will be removed For more information about items on the Model 1094 Configuration Slot page see Model 1094 Configura tion Slot page MIB variables description on page 81 Configuration and management 73 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 Model 1094ARC management Displaying the Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page The Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page see figure 32 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 1094A and the remote CPE box When the page displays the unit is set to the onLine state and the current configuration is displayed Patton Electronics O Home Page Model 1094 Configuration E HOME Card Address 11 Z About 1001MC Line Status dataMode 2 gt Configure Cards Processor Mode normal 0 Zz System Info Local Software Rev 2 0 2 DownLoad Remote Software Rev 0 0 0 p System Log Back NOTE After making configuration pages you must set the unit back to onLine mode to SNMP implement change ja System Config M Help Next Configuration Z C e Local Remote Q z PARSONS e DTE Rate rate32k 0 y rate32k 0 Clock Mode Local Remote intemal receiveRecaver 0 y receiveRecover 2 Respond to RDL request enabled 0 y enabled 0 TM from DTE enabled 0 y enabled 0 y Enable Switches enabled 1 y Jenabled 1 y Test Mode off 1 off 1 Submit Query Figure 32 Model 1094 Confi
212. he pattern generator and detector are turned on Loop Time Out loopTo This displays the amount of time that the unit responding to a Remote Loop command will remain in test mode when the RL test mode is invoked If the unit is not taken out of test mode by the menu within this time Model 2701RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 148 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management period the unit will automatically time out and return to normal data mode The timeout does not apply for loops selected via the front panel switches RDL type rdlType This displays the selected remote loopback type that will be used when initiating a remote loopback The two loopback types are CSU and RDL Configuration Type configType This displays if the 2701RC is using the DIP switch control or software control for its configuration TM from DTE testModeDTE This displays if the 2701 RC responds to the LL and RDL signals coming from the DTE Software Version softVersion270 1RC This displays the software version of code in the 2701RC Reset button Software reset the E carrier function card on its next poll from 1001MC Model 2701 Configuration page MIB variables description The Model 2701 Configuration page enables you to update the configuration of the 2701 RC NetLink El NTU modems that are installed in the system After making changes to the configuration on this page select Back to return to the Model 2701 Conf
213. his will inform the Model 1001MC that there should be 2 power supplies in the system Rack Protection Mode If you want to protect all Model 1095RC rack cards installed in the current rack from being globally config ured select protected 1 from the pop up menu then click the Submit button For more information about the system configuration feature refer to section System Config on page 259 Modem Information page MIB variables description 78 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Submit button After you have defined the number of power supplies installed in the rack and the rack protection mode click on the Submit button to save the changes Power Supply 1 Status Displays the current status of power supply 1 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 lf the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red e notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Power Supply 2 Status Displays the current status of power supply 2 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 lf the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status lis
214. hpat 11 Model 2701 Configuration page MIB variables description 151 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management rdl csuWithpate 12 rdl remote 13 Software Test Mode testModeSet2701RC This is used to invoke test modes through the NMS Available options are off 1 No test mode in process e pat 2 Pattern generator 511 turned on pate 3 HPattern generator with errors 511 E turned on lal 4 Local loopback test e JalWithpat 5 Local loopback test with 511 pattern generator JalWithpate 6 Local loopback test with 511 E pattern generator with errors rdl 7 Remote loopback test from V54 rdl Withpat 8 Remote loopback test with 511 from V54 rdl Withpate 9 Remote loopback test with errors 51 1E from V54 RDL Response v54Loop The following options are available e enabled 1 The unit will respond to a V 54 loop up command e disabled 0 The unit will ignore a V 54 loop up command FP Switches frntSwitch This selects if the front panel toggle switches used for loopbacks and pattern generators are enabled 1 e disabled 0 Pattern Select patternSelect The following options are available e qrss 0 QRSS is the pattern that is used when the pattern generator and detector are turned on e fivel1 1 511 is the pattern that is used when the pattern generator and detector are turned on e two047 2 2047 is the pattern that is used when the pattern generator an
215. iDSL These read only variables notify you that the specified unit has been placed into a test mode through the hard ware This could have been done either through the front panel switches or from the DTE if the TM from DTE is enabled When a test mode is displayed the field will be highlighted in blue to give you quick notification SW Test Mode testModeSetiDSL remotetestModeSetiDSL These variables notify you that the specified unit has been placed into a test mode through the management station The management can place a unit into a test mode within the Model 1092A Update Configuration page explained in more detail below Model 1092 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description 62 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management Software Rev softVersioniDSL remotesoftversioniDSL These read only MIB variables display the current version of code that is running in the NetLink iDSL modems Check the Download page to see if the Model 1001MC has a newer version of code available for downloading Through the download web page you can update the software that is running in the NetLink iDSL rack card You can also update the software in the NetLink stand alone unit through the front panel con trol port on the unit Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description The Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page enables you to update the configuration of the 1092ARC NetLink iDSL modems t
216. iables description on page 110 Displaying the Download page The Download page see figure 50 is where you can download the latest version of 1001MC and 1095RC software Patton Electronics Home Page DOWNLOAD HOME View Status About 1001MC In order to download new code into your NetLink modems follow these steps Configure Cards 1 Remove the card that you wish to upgrade from the chassis 2 Set dipswitch S2 6 and S2 7 both to the OFF position System Info 3 Select the type of download you would like using the buttons below DownLoad 4 Select the View Status hyperlink on the top of the page System Log 5 Slide the card into the chassis You will see the download status updated SNMP in the window as the download progresses Sion Confi 6 When the download is complete remove the card from the rack and return asta L nnus switches S2 6 and S2 7 to their original position Help 7 Retum to the modem configuration screen and verify the proper configuration for your modem NOTE Do not install the unit in the rack until you have selected the software that you want to download NOTE The Front panel LEDs on the NetLink modem will flash when the download is complete Current Software Available Model1095RC 2 3 90 Download 1095RC Software Model 1094ARC 2 1 1 1095RC Key 2 1 0 1001MC CONFIGURATION MENL Figure 50 Download page Configuration and management 100 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management
217. icate with the NetLink modems installed in your system The Model 3088RC rear I O card must have frame ground GND connected to signal GND through a 100 ohm resistor This is done by configuring a jumper on the modems rear I O card Refer to the installation manual that came with the rack card for more information on this jumper setting Setting the 3088RC system address The manual that was shipped with your NetLink El unit specifies switch S3 for the card address in the NetLink System Each card in the chassis is given a unique address through the setting of switch S3 Installing NetLink modem cards 29 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Note Standalone units use the address of the rack card that they are con nected to Polling overview The Model 1001MC sends poll messages along the internal bus looking for cards installed in the system Once a card is found it is placed online and communication with the management station can begin If the address of the NetLink modem is not configured or does not match the address range of the rack that it is installed in the Model 1001MC may not recognize the card The address range that is polled is determined by the configuration of the system The system administrator must make sure that the software configuration within the Model 1001MC matches the hardware configuration of the system Polling rack 1 and daisy chained racks The Model 1001MC uses the number of powe
218. ication If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Local Model Code localModelCode This column displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address The Model Code is also a hyperlink into the configuration page for the NetLink modem and its remote unit The model code information is passed to the Model 1001MC after the card is placed online The Model 1001MC is auto sensing meaning that when a card is found or lost the information will automatically be updated in the sys tem You are not required to setup the Model Code information for each slot When a card is removed from the system the Model Code will be erased and an error or warning will be displayed for the slot this depends on the settings in the Slot Configuration page Remote User Id remoteUserID User supplied string that defines the Customer Premise box at the far end of the link The string is stored in non volatile flash within the CP unit If the unit is moved you ID will move to the new slot making it useful for hardware identification The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Remote Model Code remoteModelCode This column displays the model code of the Customer Premise NetLink modem at the far end of the link This information is communicated from
219. iebue tete d eepee ver e sete cg 63 Processor Mode processorModelDSL i i iet ee ne tete raet teret ito neben bar dr rS e PEL n EE pere Ra AE 63 Local Software Rev soft Versioni DSL ied eee tertie ie es creed dcbet de te eee CE ete Pea pad 64 Remote Software Rev remotesoftversioniDSL see 64 Next Confipuradoii tablecos teda tede o Putri MESI TE 64 DEE ate dera joris Ren M MID ED E M Rd 64 Clock Mode Locale Remate cid 64 TM From DTE dteTMiDSL remotedteTMiDSL sse 64 Test Mode testModeSetiDSL remotetestModeSeti DSL sss 64 Submit QUE DUTON A last d 65 Clear Changes sisi t e E blicas 65 Set Default Configuration ii petet te eed e Pese eds 65 Slot Configuration page MIB variables destripar is rete e Perd ER E 65 Card Address mimsSlol iii 65 Local Model Code localMModelGQode mi 2 6 2 7 Ieri ii ette erbe seed e Pee e isis 65 View Rack X hyperlinls seize eure bete tp dio a 65 Card Identification Information ias tto rh ore ree n ete an rie eru i reset Pea TO 65 Local User Id 6 Ga seri iia 65 Remote User Id remote UseclD ic ccccccedccscsessacuectenQicctethewssensebectecevsccenselesaientscusedevdeavebessetersectocestscecdeesdses 65 Local Circuit ID loca a 66 Remote Circuit ID E e e E H O 5 3 2 2 anaran ea E I ER OEA IEN 66 Alarm Information canta acia 66 Clear Sloe Alarms reseuStatuls dali a idad 66 PHardware Reset res tStabus ii 66 Card Lost Indication cardLostIndication eee eere aahaa dayanan ian
220. if the 2707RC responds to the LL and RDL signals coming from the DTE Configuration Type configType This displays if the 2707RC is using the DIP switch control or software control for its configuration Software Version softVersion2707RC This displays the software version of code in the 2707RC Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page MIB variables description The Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page enables you to update the configuration of the 2707RC NetLink El NTU modems that are installed in the system After making changes to the configuration on this page select Back to return to the Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page then select onLine as the Input Mode and finally select Submit Query to send the new information to the Model 1001MC over the net work Note Ifthe NetLink El NTU modems are not connected and changes made to the remote configuration will be lost after the units link up All parameters in the Local column can be changed at any time The following sections describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page Line Status lineStatus2707RC This variable displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed lineDown 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data testMode 3 Software Version softVersion2707RC This read only MIB variable
221. igate to any page from this point The navigation page will always be available to you so you can change from one page to the next The Record Current Configuration button lets you store configuration changes made to the box Note Ifconfiguration changes are not stored into memory they will be lost if the unit is powered down The Hard Reset button forces the 1001MC to perform a reset This will not reset the individual cards in the rack only the 1001MC If you would like to perform a hardware reset on the individual cards refer to the Slot Configuration page For more information refer to section HOME on page 228 About 1001MC The About 1001MC page gives a more in depth overview of the system that presented on the HOME page This page also provides contact information about Patton Electronics For more information refer to section About 1001 MC on page 231 Saving HTTP HTML object changes 44 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 3 Getting started Configure Cards Clicking on the Configure Cards hyperlink displays the System Level Information page This page is the starting point for the configuration and management of your Patton NetLink modems This page enables you to quickly identify potential problems and view statistics on a per rack basis You can also disable racks from this level For on page 249 more information refer to section Download Note Model 1094RC and 1095RC only The Download page enables you to per
222. iguration Slot page then select onLine as the Input Mode and finally select Sub mit Query to send the new information to the Model 1001MC over the network Starting from the HOME page dick on the following links Home menu gt Configure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number gt model2701RC xxx x in the Local Model Code column change input mode to Supervisory Modify Configuration Note Ifthe NetLink El NTU modems are not connected and changes made to the remote configuration will be lost after the units link up All parameters in the Local column can be changed at any time The following sections describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 2701 Configuration Con figuration page Line Status lineStatus270 1RC This variable displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed e startup 1l e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data testMode 3 Software Version softVersion2701RC This read only MIB variable displays the current version of code that is running in the NetLink El rack card modem Model 2701 Configuration page MIB variables description 149 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Configuration Type configType This displays if the 2701RC is using the DIP switch control or software control for its configuration Channel Assignment dsoEnableCh 1 dsoEnableCh3 1
223. igure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Local Model Code for the 2707RC you wish to manage gt Modify Configuration you first have to change input mode from onLine to super VisoryMode Figure 88 on page 175 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page see Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page MIB variables description on page 183 Configuration and management 174 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 1001MC Configure System Level Cards Information System Information System Log Login HOME Record Information Hard Reset SNMP MIB System Log Modi System Log RAM System Log Flash 8 Model 2707RC management View Rack 1 Card Slot Address Configuration Modem Infor mation Rack X D Modem Configuration E Local Model Code View Rack 8 Supervisory Submit Query Modify Configuration Next Configuration Figure 88 Web page navigation to Model 2707RC Configuration Next Configuration page Configuration and management 175 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Displaying the Slot Configuration page The Slot Configuration page see figure 89 is used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats that slot in the case of errors or warnings Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Car
224. ile Memory and Mod ify Non Volatile Memory web pages See section System Log on page 251 for more information about the System Log page Introduction 227 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Syslog Modify The Syslog Modify web page allows you to setup the configuration for the Syslog messaging system You can set variables such as the IP address of a Syslog Daemon and priority levels for each of the messaging facilities see section System Log Modify on page 252 for more information Syslog Volatile Memory The Syslog Volatile Memory page displays Syslog messages that have been sent to the Volatile Memory sec tion of the messaging system The messages stored here will be lost if the system is re booted see section Sys tem Log Volatile Memory on page 256 for more information Syslog Non Volatile Memory The Syslog Non Volatile Memory page displays Syslog messages that have been sent to the Non Volatile Memory section of the messaging system The messages stored here will be stored in Flash memory and will be available if the system is re booted or power is lost see section System Log Non Volatile Memory on page 257 for more information SNMP The SNMP web page enables you to download the Patton Enterprise MIBs for the Model 1001MC These MIBs are required if you plan to manage the system using a network management station NMS instead of the web page manage
225. ing options are available normal 3 slotted 1 For standard serial interfaces Framing Mode should be set to normal 3 Please refer to the user manual that came with the Model 1095RC for more information Note Framing mode was introduced into the Model 1095RC modems at software revision 2 2 0 If you have a modem with a software revision earlier than this it will ignore the framing mode bit On the 1001MC web page the bit will always be highlighted in yellow showing that the bit is not being updated Contact Patton Electronics for software upgrades for your units if you require this feature Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description 109 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Test Mode testModeSet 1095 remotetestModeSet 1 09 5 These variables allow you to place the NetLink mDSL rack card into test modes For more information on the test modes please see the NetLink mDSL Test Modes section below Submit Query button After making configuration changes select the Back link then select onLine and finally select Submit Query This will submit all the configuration information to the Model 1001MC After this the information is stored in volatile RAM until you place the Input Mode to onLine 0 This will tell the 1001MC to copy all of the configuration information into the NetLink mDSL configuration space Clear Changes Once configuration changes have been made and you have s
226. ings warningCount This field displays the warnings that are associated with each modem installed in the system When warnings are present this field will be highlighted in yellow and the number of warnings will be listed For more infor mation on the cause of the warning you should view the System Log Warnings will be highlighted in yellow in the log The warning for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the warnings even after the number is cleared The warning count listed in the Model 1001MC column is the sum of all warnings for the system including the individual modems Errors errorCount This field displays the errors that are associated with each modem installed in the system When errors are present this field will be highlighted in red and the number of errors will be listed For more information on the cause of the error you should view the System Log Errors will be highlighted in red in the log The errors for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the errors even after the number is cleared The error count listed in the Model 1001MC column is the sum of all error s for the system including the individual modems Local User Id localUserID User supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem and is useful for hardware identif
227. ion To import a configuration file into the access server type the complete path and filename for the configuration file you wish to load or click on the Browse button to select the desired file then click on the Submit Query button see figure 114 on page 233 Upon successfully importing the file the access server will display Configuration Load Complete indicating that the new operating parameters have been loaded into flash memory Click on HOME under the Configuration Menu then click on the Hard Reset button under Immediate Actions Note Do not select Record Current Configuration after importing configuration parameters System Level Information Configure Cards System lava Information Clicking the Configure Cards hyperlink on the HOME page displays the System Level Information page Figure 113 displays a portion of the information page for the NetLink system being managed The System Level Information page contains statistical information about the entire system and explains how that information is broken down among the racks Each rack can be enabled or disabled from this level When a rack is disabled the 1001MC stops polling the addresses contained in the specified rack The 1001MC ability to stop polling is use ful when installing less than eight racks or when taking cards offline in order to perform servicing The modems installed in the system will continue to operate at the last setting provided This page also allows you
228. ion page enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 2701RC and the remote CPE box see section Displaying the Model 2701 RC Configuration Slot page on page 135 Model 2701 Configuration page This page along with the Model 2701 Configuration Slot page enables you to update configuration of modems installed in the system see Displaying the Model 2701 Configu ration page on page 137 Slot Configuration Page This page can be used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors or warnings see section Displaying the Model 2701 RC Con figuration Slot page on page 135 Note Forinformation about other Model 1001MC pages refer to chapter 10 HTTP HTML web page reference on page 220 Introduction 132 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Displaying the Modem Information page The Modem Information page see figure 66 displays the cards installed in the system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems Patton Electronics MODEM INFORMATION RACK 1 Home Page a a RES HOME Slots Available 15 About 1001MC Modems Installed 10 Import Export Number of Power Supplies fi Configure Cards Rack Protection Mode normality 1 System Info Submit Query DownLoad System Log Power Supply 1 Status available 0 SNMP Power Supply 2 Status notlnstalled 2 System Config Help Clear Rack 1 Ala
229. iq Help Model 1095 Global Configuration Warning Please review your configuration before submitting it to the system Illegal configurations could cause links to lose syncronization Follow the hyperlink for more information on configuration options Configuration Information Modify Configuration Name test Valid Configuration Local Remote DTE Rate rate64k 3 Clock Mode Local Remote internal receiveRecover 0 B receiveRecover 2 Tx Data Sample Point TM from DTE Ie Framing Mode Figure 61 Model 1095 Global Configuration page Creating and modifying global configuration templates 123 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management 2 Use the Local DTE Rate pop up menu to select local DTE rate You have the following choices rate64k 3 rate640k 12 rate1280k 22 rate1856k 32 ratel28k 4 rate704k 13 rate1344k 23 rate1920k 33 ratel92k 5 rate768k 14 ratel408k 24 rate1984k 34 rate256k 6 rate832k 15 ratel472k 25 rate2048k 35 rate320k 7 rate896k 16 rate1536k 26 rate2112k 36 rate384k 8 rate960k 17 ratel600k 28 rate2176k 37 rate448k 9 ratel024k 18 ratel664k 29 rate2240k 38 rate5 12k 10 ratel088k 19 ratel728k 30 rate2304k 39 rate576k 11 ratel216k 21 ratel792k 31 3 Use the L
230. is manual use the following text conventions Convention Garamond blue type Table 1 Text conventions Meaning Indicates a cross reference hyperlink that points to a figure graphic table or section heading Clicking on the hyperlink jumps you to the ref erence When you have finished reviewing the reference click on the Go to Previous View bution 4 in the Adobe Acrobat Reader toolbar to return to your starting point Futura bold type Indicates the names of menu bar options Italicized Futura type Indicates the names of options on pull down menus Futura type Indicates the names of fields or windows Garamond bold type Indicates the names of command buttons that execute an action lt gt Angle brackets indicate function and keyboard keys such as lt SHIFT gt lt CTRL gt lt C gt and so on Are you ready All system messages and prompts appear in the Courier font as the system would display them dir Bold Courier font indicates where the operator must type a response or command Model 1001MC Operations Guide About this guide Mouse conventions The following conventions are used when describing mouse actions Table 2 Mouse conventions Convention Meaning Left mouse button This button refers to the primary or leftmost mouse button unless you have changed the default configuration Right mouse button This button refers the secondary or rightmost mouse b
231. k XErorNumber usina te et eph tt ez eerte eee ia is 237 Total Warnings tackxX Warming Num bet i 20er rtt Perte iret petere re PO HR E ANE 237 Apply Rack Configuration 2 2 diee ope UE De ded in adds 237 Apply Test Mode etate eed ti ent tese esi s 238 Rack Protection T nee hm e tour itat muto e rf eb erae s 238 Clear Rack X Alarms elearA agms as 238 Modem Information Rack inicia e Een Pati i ER iata 239 Slots Available rotalComnfieSlots iia iros 239 Modems Installed raekXGCardsInstalled cuina ricardo eerte it bees ete reve 239 Number of Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies eerte nennen 239 Rack Protection Mode ete petas ci en eee tee EE a 240 Submit DItO 5 n eh e Rh eiiim bed m n eR oo EET RO but peer E 240 Power Supply l Status noia 240 Power Supply 2 8 tasa odia ota 240 Clear Rack X Alarms clearA latins naci T 240 Card Address nms Slot DY iia 240 O ANA 241 Warnings tsi Count psi A 241 Brrors etroyCOWDE ceu aes reset ee diles 241 Local User Id doslUs 0 HE ca eite eee eite ete tiber ee EE Seta Pe Ee EO ERE ER ORE NUS 241 Local Model Code localModelGode x 3 2 9 t t eti terre ii 241 Remote User Id semoteUserID dida a ES 241 Remote Model Code remoteModelCode eee n eene ronca ee i 242 licor MR P R 242 Local Circuit ID local Cire DOY pi id 242 Remote Circuit ID remoteCirculttI I 5 2 dintel 242 Submit button cio apa la 242 Slot Con
232. ke configuration changes to the Model 2707RC and the remote NTU When the page displays the unit is set to the onLine state and the current configuration is displayed Figure 85 Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page for the 2707RC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Local Model Code for the 2707RC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 85 the 2707RC was installed in slot 1 Figure 86 on page 173 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 172 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management System Level Information Modem Infor mation Rack X Modem Configuration System Log ail odi System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 86 Web page navigation to Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page Information Hard Reset Making configuration changes to your 2707RC NetLink NTU Do use the following to make configuration changes to your NetLink NTU Note You must be logged in as superuser to perform the following procedure 1 With the Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page displayed change the Input Mode see figure 85 to superVisoryMode The Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear 2 Click on the Modify Configuration hyperlink to display the Model 2707RC Configuration page 3 Make your configura
233. l 2707RC on page 28 e Model 2710RC see section Hardware setup for a Model 2710RC on page 29 Model 2715RC see section Hardware setup for a Model 2715RC on page 29 Model 2088RC see section Hardware setup for a Model 3088RC on page 29 Hardware setup for a Model 1092ARC The following must be done to configure your Model 1092ARC hardware for use with the Model 1001MC network management station Connect frame ground to signal ground see section Configuring frame ground Set the system address see section Setting the 1092ARC system address on page 20 When you are finished install the Model 1092ARC front card and rear I O card using the installation proce dures in the manual that came with the modem Configuring frame ground The Model 1001MC uses an internal bus to communicate with the NetLink modems installed in your system The Model 1092ARC rear I O card must have frame ground GND connected to signal GND through a Installing NetLink modem cards 19 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation 100 ohm resistor This is done by configuring a jumper on the modems rear I O card Refer to the installation manual that came with the rack card for more information on this jumper setting Setting the 1092ARC system address The manual that was shipped with the 1092ARC defines switch S2 as Address This switch sets the address of the modem in the NetLink system Each card in the chassis is given a
234. l Active Slots Total System Errors Figure 139 Home page displaying warnings and errors Home Page HOME About 1001 MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Log SNMP System Config Help L d e z O E lt x T Z e Q i9 e Patton Electronics MODEL 1001MC System Information Software Version 2531 Software Date Code Apr 15 2003 09 47 20 Running Since Last Boot 0 days 0 hrs 7 min 59 sec CPU Idle 89 Total System Errors 13 Contact Information Patton Electronics Co Phone 301 975 1000 7622 Rickenbacker Drive Fax 301 869 9293 Gaithersburg Maryland 20879 E mail support patton com WWW http fwmww patton com Figure 140 About 1001MC page displaying warnings and errors Troubleshooting network malfunctions 279 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 11 Troubleshooting and maintenance CAN ek wien NRA System Overview USES b E oe pty configuration pei re gt AnPiyTestMode Total Slots Available RES d Total Cards Installed 1001 MC CONFIGURATION MENU Apply Protection Clear Rack 1 Alarms Enable disablea o submit Clear Rack 2 Alarms Figure 141 System Level Information page displaying warnings and errors Troubleshooting network malfunctions 280 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 11 Troubleshooting and maintenance 4 Make a
235. l C Model 0 0 0 0 RM261C Model 1001MC None None None None Demo 11 en 10 0 None S None zal normal 0 test offic 1 i 1 ES ARC M 2 startup 1 10 o None medellOS2ARC None n e nomeo Figure 128 Modem Information Rack 1 page 1001MC Configure Cards Information naa System Log View Rack 8 Modi System Log System Log RAM SNMP MIB System Log Flash Model 1095 Config Global Configuration Figure 129 Web page navigation to Modem Information Rack 1 page System Level Information Information Hard Reset System Config 262 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference 2 Locate the card address see figure 128 on page 262 of the Model 1095RC you want to protect 3 Set the Protected pop up menu see figure 128 on page 262 to protected 1 Note Setting the Protected option to normal 0 will enable the Model 1095RC to receive new configurations through the global configura tion command Click the Submit button The rack card is now protected Creating a template This section describes how to create a global configuration template The Patton Model 1095 enables the Model 1001MC system administrator to configure the units for a wide variety of applications Due to the many different applications that are supported care must be taken when setting the configuration of your modems There are several ille
236. l Information page see figure 81 Patton Electronics System Level Information Home Page HOME About 1001MC System Overview uet Apply 1095 S C i i i Configure Cards pply ystem Configuration None Created y Apply Configuration System Info Apply 1095 System Test Mode off 1 Apply Test Mode DownLoad Apply 2701RC System Configuration Example D Apply Configuration System Log A E gt Apply 2701RC System Test Mode aff 1 Apply Test Mode SNMP System Config Total Slots Available 13 Help Total Cards Installed 11 Power Supplies Installed 2 Total System Warnings 0 Update Clear All System Alarms Figure 81 System Level Information page System Overview section 2 Use the Apply 2701Rc System Configuration pop up menu see figure 81 to select the template you want to apply 3 Click the Apply Configuration button The template has been applied Creating and modifying global configuration templates 165 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management To configure all Model 2701RC rack cards in just one Model 1001 rack Complete the following steps l Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page see figure 82 Patton Electronics Home Page Rack 1 Top Level HOME Rack 1 Enable enabled 1 y Submit Query View Rack 1 About 1001MC Address Range
237. l be displayed in that row The address of the card is set up using the DIP switches on the card The address is also a hyperlink to the Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page This page can be used to set slot specific information about the card Line Status The line status column on each View Rack page shows the current line status of each card Keep in mind that the more cards the 1001MC is managing the longer it will take for the line status field to update Displays the status of the line The following values can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data testMode 3 Modem Information page MIB variables description 178 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Warnings warningCount This field displays the warnings that are associated with each modem installed in the system When warnings are present this field will be highlighted in yellow and the number of warnings will be listed For more infor mation on the cause of the warning you should view the System Log Warnings will be highlighted in yellow in the log The warning for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the warnings even after the number is cleared The warning count listed in the Model 1001 MC column is the sum of all warnings for the system including the individual modems Errors errorCount This field di
238. l_Code for the 1092ARC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 22 the 1092ARC was installed in slot 11 Figure 23 on page 53 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 52 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management System Level Information Modem Infor mation Rack X Modem Configuration System Log ail odi System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 23 Web page navigation to Model 1092 Configuration Slot page Information Hard Reset Making configuration changes to your 1092ARC Netlink modem Do use the following to make configuration changes to your NetLink modem Note You must be logged in as superuser to perform the following procedure 1 With the Model 1092 Configuration Slot page displayed change the Input Mode see figure 22 to super VisoryMode The Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear 2 Click on the Modify Configuration hyperlink to display the Model 1092A Next Configuration page 3 Make your configuration changes or select the Set Default Configuration button Select the Submit Query button to place the changes into the 1001MC temporary memory If you decide that you do not want your changes implemented you can select the Clear Changes button Select the Back hyperlink to return to the Model 1092 Configuration Slot page 6 Change the Input Mode back to onLine and select the Su
239. larms errors and warning associated with the specified slot Note The errors and warning will still be listed in the System Log Hardware Reset resetStatus Selecting this push button will force the associated modem to perform a hardware reset Card Lost Indication cardLostlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem is removed from the man agement system Three choices are available Error e Warning None Line Down Indication lineDownlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem reports a line down sce nario Three choices are available Error e Warning None Note Line Down Indication must be set to error 2 line up and line down SNMP trap messages to be sent Using the Download page to upgrade 1094ARC software Do the following to download new software into your NetLink modem 1 Remove the card that you wish to upgrade from the rack chassis 2 Make a note of the settings of DIP switches S2 6 and S2 7 3 Set DIP switches S2 6 and S2 7 to the OFF position Using the Download page to upgrade 1094ARC software 87 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management 4 Click on the Download 1094ARC Software button see figure 38 Current Software Available Model 1095RC 2 3 90 Model 1094ARC 2 1 1 Download 1094ARC Software 1095RCKey 3 10 Figure 38 Download 1094ARC software button N
240. link into the configuration page for the NetLink modem and its remote unit The model code information is passed to the Model 1001MC after the card is placed online The Model 1001MC is auto sensing meaning that when a card is found or lost the information will automatically be updated in the sys tem You are not required to setup the Model Code information for each slot When a card is removed from the system the Model Code will be erased and an error or warning will be displayed for the slot this depends on the settings in the Slot Configuration page Remote User Id remoteUserID User supplied string that defines the Customer Premise box at the far end of the link The string is stored in non volatile flash within the CP unit If the unit is moved you ID will move to the new slot making it useful for hardware identification The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Remote Model Code remoteModelCode This column displays the model code of the Customer Premise NetLink modem at the far end of the link This information is communicated from the CP box over the link to the CO Rack Card unit The NetLink mDSL Modem Information page MIB variables description 59 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management rack card will then update the Model 1001MC For this reason this information will not be available until after the link is made between the two modems Protected
241. llowing choices normal 0 inverted 1 5 Use the Remote Tx Data Sample Point pop up menu to select the remote transmit data sample point You have the following choices normal 0 inverted 1 6 Configure the Local TM from DTE pop up menu using the following choices disabled 0 enabled 1 7 Configure the Remote TM from DTE pop up menu using the following choices disabled 0 enabled 1 8 Configure the Local Framing Mode pop up menu using the following choices slotted 0 System Config 266 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference normal 3 9 Configure the Remote Framing Mode pop up menu using the following choices slotted 0 normal 3 10 When you have finished setting the configuration click on the Submit button to save the changes Note Ifyou receive an invalid configuration error after creating a configura tion it is resulting from an illegal combination of variables Refer to sec tion Illegal configuration messages on page 264 for more information Refer to section Applying a template on page 271 to activate the template Modifying a template This section describes how to modify a global configuration template The Patton Model 1095 enables the Model 1001MC system administrator to configure the units for a wide variety of applications Due to the many different applications that are supported care must be taken when setting the configur
242. lots Available 104 Total Cards Installed 3 S Power Supplies Installed 16 Total System Warnings 0 Update Figure 103 System Level Information page System Overview section 2 Use the Apply 3088RC System Configuration pop up menu see figure 103 to select the template you want to apply 3 Click the Apply Configuration button The template has been applied Creating and modifying global configuration templates 218 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management To configure all Model 3088RC rack cards in just one Model 1001 rack Complete the following steps l Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page see figure 104 Patton Electronics Home Page Rack 1 Top Level gt HOME Rack 1 Enable enabled l View Rack 1 Z About 1001MC Address Range esl L8 Import Export S Lng Total Slots Available 13 vam Configure Cards e Svat m Info Total Cards Installed 3 e DownLoad Power Supplies Installed Y System Log Power Supply 1 Status TA SNMP a System Config Z Help ow E io 0 7 Apply 1095 Rack Configuration Paton Electonics Con Apply 1095 Test Mode Patton Electronics Comp Apply 2701RC Rack Configuration None Created Y Apply 2701RC Test Mode ofi 1 Y Apply 3088 Rack Configuration
243. lption e eee ete 201 Model SOS ERE Configuration Slot caos 201 ne Status neta T loa AE AEE TEN TURRIS UTC Te anes 202 Alarmicounters as 202 3E e STIS Eun O E A OE 202 HTH TT ee ME 203 Flap Count linelDownGnt veces merde IM E 203 ING Birra Che Arron irre E Rete Meet TM A 203 Uhe Clear Counter T 203 CERCA Error Alarm Threshold ad 204 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 Model 3088RC management Input Mode modes08SR Citan eie e etuer e ene UR HR e e ise 204 Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page Configuration Status table description sess 204 Configuration Status configStatus308 RO ettet street ve oe tete oro ere ERE ores ee herida 204 Local Model Code localModelCode remoteModelCode eene 204 D TIEBate dteRate3088RQ 5 3 2 oer ete Detector et kept ete eate ie DE EU e D e EE DESEE Ve pud 205 Clock Mode clockMode3088RG cuina 205 TX Clock Invert tcClockInvesrt3088RG siii A aa 205 DSL Link Enable dslLinkEnable3088RGJ isis adria drid tt ee tre Tee Ens 205 Lime Probe lineProbe3088RQ iii eroi esee cote soles Ce PER PEE HR EE EE RETE TENEO ERU a 205 Annex Type annex l ype3088RG Licet ici 205 SW Test Mode testModeSet308BR Q 8 reete a etes ee ete e be eb id 205 Front Panel Switches frontPannelSwitches3088RC e 205 Response to Test Mode responseToTestMode3088RC esee ene 206 Software Version softVersion3088 RC csetera een das 206 Reset ota a A
244. lumn for the local and remote units In some cases a single variable applies to both the local and remote unit In this case a single configura tion field is made available in the Local column and the Remote column is made a read only field After changes are made select the Submit Query button at the bottom of the table and then place the Input Mode back to onLine 0 in the Model 1092 Configuration page The following sections explain the MIB variables that are shown in the Next Configuration table DTE rate dteRateiDSL This variable displays the DTE rate for the link Because the NetLink iDSL modems are symmetrical same rate in both direction there is only MIB variable that defines the DTE rate The Customer Premise box will automatically update its configuration to the DTE rate that is set here Clock Mode Local Remote This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink modems The display shows the Local clock mode rack card and then the remote clock mode as a single variable in the Local column The Remote column displays a read only field showing the remote units clocking mode This was done to avoid an illegal configuration of the NetLink iDSL modems For instance both units CAN NOT be set to internal clock The options list all pos sible clocking combinations TM From DTE dteTMiDSL remotedteTMiDSL These MIB variables define whether you would like the modems to accept test mode requests from the DTE that is connected In n
245. management station Connect frame ground to signal ground see section Configuring frame ground When you are finished install the Model 2707RC front card and rear I O card using the installation proce dures in the manual that came with the modem Configuring frame ground The Model 1001MC uses an internal bus to communicate with the NetLink modems installed in your system The Model 2707RC rear I O card must have frame ground GND connected to signal GND through a 100 ohm resistor This is done by configuring a jumper on the modems rear I O card Refer to the installation manual that came with the rack card for more information on this jumper setting Installing NetLink modem cards 28 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Hardware setup for a Model 2710RC The following must be done to configure your Model 2710RC hardware for use with the Model 1001MC net work management station Connect frame ground to signal ground see section Configuring frame ground When you are finished install the Model 2710RC front card and rear 1 O card using the installation proce dures in the manual that came with the modem Configuring frame ground The Model 1001MC uses an internal bus to communicate with the NetLink modems installed in your system The Model 2710RC rear I O card must have frame ground GND connected to signal GND through a 100 ohm resistor This is done by configuring a jumper on the modems rear I O card
246. mation page see figure 126 Figure 127 on page 261 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system P we NA Ts T keel Figure 126 System Level Information page System Config Patton Electronics Home Page System Level Information S HOME A ASE A NE CE U QE ME UE oe s System Overview System Info App System Configuration CONFIG 1 0 ME Apply Configuration f e ire Apply System Test Mode uo SNMP Total Slots Available 15 System Config Total Cards Installed S S 1 s E Help Power Supplies Installed gt 7 Total System Warnings Total System Errors 0 O Update Z l Rack 1 Top Level Rack 1 Enable enabled 1 submit Address Range 1 15 Total Slots Available 4 15 1 Total Cards Installed 5 Power Supplies Installed 1 Total Errors 1 fo Total Warnings as ry ey i SENA UR EUN Apply Rack Configuration CONFIG 100 Apply contiguration Apply Test Mode Apply Test Mode cea Ame o 260 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference 1001MC Configure Cards Information System Log System Log RAM SNMP MIB System Log Flash System Model 1095 Config Global Configuration Figure 127 Web page navigation to System Level Information pa
247. model 1095RC 1 Confiqure Cards View Rack 1 System Info Card Identification Information E DownLoad mM System Log L TV ID gt 1 E ocal User ID Uecomm JE SNMP 24 system Config Remote User 1D None c Help Clear Local 10 Clear Remote 10 Z Card Identification Information e z a Q Local Circuit ID Uecomm 1 Clear Local Circuit ID e Remote Circuit ID remote test Submit Clear Remote Circuit 1D Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms Hardware Reset Card Lost Indication Line Down Indication 4b gt Figure 48 Slot Configuration page Starting from the HOME page to access the Slot Configuration page for the 1095RC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Card Address for the 1095RC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 48 the 1095RC was installed in slot 1 Figure 49 on page 100 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 99 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management View Rack 1 1001MC Configure Cards Information System Lo System Log z SNMP MIB System Log RAM System Log Flash System Level z Modem Infor Information mation Rack X Record Information Figure 49 Web page navigation to Slot Configuration page For more information about items on the Slot Configuration page see Slot Configuration page MIB var
248. modifying global configuration templates esee 155 Model 2707RC 167 E a NN 169 Canpfipuration and IabdpetficBE aisladas 169 Modem Information page MIB variables description te nti Ule REEL dere 177 Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page MIB variables description eerte 181 Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page MIB variables description eee 183 Slot Configuration page MIB variables description iii 185 Model KTT eT ros conosconenconosa 187 IntroductioB AE o A E D LUN CU 190 Conficutation and management cistitis 190 Modem Information Rack X page MIB variables description eerte 198 Model 3088RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description eee 201 Model 3088RC Configuration page MIB variables description eerte 206 Slot Configuration page MIB variables description IU eei tte 209 Creating and modifying global configuration templates inicie 211 HTTP HTML web page reference eere eene eene entente tenete tatnen atus tn senten einen ess enata NEE KOSS SEKSS es en sensu 220 IO T I EM 224 HOME M 228 Puce 231 Import T dM 233 System Lael See adi 235 Modem Information Rack X siria riada E e
249. n Slot page see figure 30 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 1094A and the remote CPE box When the page displays the unit is set to the onLine state and the cur rent configuration is displayed 5 e Model 1094ARC management Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001 MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Log SNMP System Config Help Model 1094ARC Configuration Slot 11 Line Status Processor Mode normal 0 dataMode 2 Previous Card Refresh Current Page Next Card Input Mode onLine 0 y Submit Query Configuration Status static 1 Local Remote Model Code model 1094ARC 2 none 0 DTE Rate rate32k 0 rate32k 0 Clock Mode Local Remote internal receiveRecover 0 receiveRecover 2 Respond to RDL request enabled 0 enabled 0 TM from DTE enabled 0 enabled 0 Enable Front Panel Switches enabled 1 enabled 1 HW Test Mode off of SW Test Mode of off 1 SH ano ann Figure 30 Model 1094 Configuration Slot page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 1094 Configuration Slot page for the 1094ARC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Local_Model_Code for the 1094ARC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 30 the 1094ARC was installed in slot 11 Figure 31 on page 73 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management
250. n accordance with the terms of such license Contents ADA A cene ier meum TUM cede roter eer SUE 6 Audience meea x E UU 6 Seu LL 6 liypecraphical conventionsiused inthis document erae e UTE ETT DTE TTE TET T 7 Additional TTI 8 ee Be S G 8 JL ARA 10 Introductiofus eret en EEUU OTT 11 Mo T HTH a 14 2 AAA AAA TEEN ITER 15 oa aaa anar 17 Insane Mo TES L HOSE eee eede e T T e ree aes 18 AA oec e eee UT E TUTTA 19 Installing O oer eue este creer ET MET E A 31 a iaa 31 Gonmectimonthe cables eere eet e UTI A E A UNT OUI 32 A UM 34 NAAA eere donee n eU erem THAM em eT UU donado rosas 25 3 Getting started eene II E UI IE IIIS 36 A RISESITSD UT INCID UE 37 Bootingthe Model MOON MG e cec E E eat ease gusty were eee eee ees 37 Installingsthe Mode OIM 2232 daisy chaimport cable eere E 30 EST TSE N TO ET BSE H H STER HEE TET T T 41 SA en an a E E 42 ST MOSCONE A E Mr E t A MP 46 4 Model 1092ARC management RAPE 47 Introduction I A A E eE 49 Conncuraton andimana TT 49 Modem Information page MIB variables descriptionze aeaaea n E EE E E p Model Ooo Contioniration slow pace MIB variables description eee aa e 61 Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description TTT 63 Slot ontiguration page ooo 65 Sy Model 1094ARC management eee E INISEEEETEUIUI E 7E ESP KEEKEEKE ESEE R S0 SEERE TREES IR SET ESSET SPEC EES 67 E n E C 69 onfieurationandmanapgemetip ee eee eee ae A A 69 Modem Information page NITBivariables descripti
251. n be dis played network CLK 0 internal CLK 1 e external CLK 2 TX Clock Invert tcClockInvert308 8RC e enable 0 disable 1 DSL Link Enable dslLinkEnable3088RC e enable 0 e disable 1 Line Probe lineProbe3088RC Enables or disables the Line Probe feature to negotiate the optimal rate for current line conditions enable 0 e disable 1 Annex Type annexlype3088RC Sets the DSL annex type e annexA 0 annexB 1 SW Test Mode testModeSet3088RC This displays any test mode invoked through the NMS See next configuration for information about invoking test modes through the NMS This option will be highlighted in blue if the unit is in test mode none 0 No test mode in process lal 1 Local loopback test rdl 2 Remote loopback Front Panel Switches frontPannelSwitches3088RC This variable allows or disallows the front panel switches to cause the unit to go into test mode enable 0 e disable 1 Model 3088RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 205 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Response to Test Mode responseToTestMode3088RC This variable allows or disallows test modes to be initiated front both the front panel or from the remote unit enable 0 e disable 1 Software Version softVersion3088RC This displays the software version of code in the 3088RC Reset button Software reset the E carrier function card on its next poll from 1001
252. n non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed from the Configure Cards web page or from the Slot Configuration page Submit button Click the Submit button to input the changes to the management system After clicking the Submit button you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Note After submitting the remote circuit ID information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Model 3088RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Model 3088RC Configuration Slot X page See figure 93 on page 193 Starting from the HOME page click on the following links Home menu gt Config ure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number gt model3088RC xxx x in the Local Model Code column Model 3088RC Configuration Slot nmsSlotlD Displays the address of the NetLink E1 G SHDSL NTU The address is defined by the DIP switch setting of S3 and S on the rack card Model 3088RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 201 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Line Status lineStatus Displays the status of th
253. n your system The Model 1095RC rear I O card must have frame ground GND connected to signal GND through a 100 ohm resistor This is done by configuring a jumper on the modems rear I O card Refer to the installation manual that came with the rack card for more information on this jumper setting Setting the 1095RC system address The manual that was shipped with the 1095RC defines switch S1 as Address This switch sets the address of the modem in the NetLink system Each card in the chassis is given a unique address through the setting of switch S1 Note Standalone units use the address of the rack card that they are con nected to Polling overview The Model 1001 MC sends poll messages along the internal bus looking for cards installed in the system Once a card is found it is placed online and communication with the management station can begin If the address of the NetLink modem is not configured or does not match the address range of the rack that it is installed in the Model 1001 MC may not recognize the card The address range that is polled is determined by the configuration of the system The system administrator must make sure that the software configuration within the Model 1001MC matches the hardware configuration of the system Polling rack 1 and daisy chained racks The Model 1001MC uses the number of power supplies in the sys tem to determine what the address range of the individual racks will be The number of power supplie
254. nd line down SNMP trap messages to be sent Slot Configuration page MIB variables description 210 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Creating and modifying global configuration templates Model 3088RC rack cards can be configured globally by templates you create If you use this capability you have the option to globally configure some or all Model 3088RC NTUS in multiple racks or those in just one rack This section contains the following information to help you configure and use templates Protecting individual Model 1001 racks and 3088RC rack cards from global modification You may not want all racks or NTUs to be modified when you apply the global template so section Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 3088RC NTUs from global modification describes how to protect individual 1001 racks and 3088RC NTUs from being globally configured Creating a template see section Creating a template on page 214 e Modifying a template see section Modifying a template on page 216 Deleting a template see section Deleting a template on page 217 Applying a template see section Applying a template on page 217 Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 3088RC NTUs from global modification This section describes how to protect 1001 racks and 3088RC NTU cards from being modified when a global modification is applied This is useful if you are setting all but a few cards to the same configuration Y
255. nd rear cards see figure 2 install into the Model 1001 R14 16 NetLink Rack Chassis see figure 3 The rack chassis accepts up to 15 cards and a 90 264 VAC or 12 24 48 VDC power supply module redundant power supply configurations can be created by replacing two rack cards with a second power supply Front Card Rear 1 0 Card c 88 NetLink NMS Power 1 Fo u Figure 2 Model 1001MC front and rear cards Introduction 12 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 1 Introduction Power supply module Figure 3 Model 1001R14 16 Rack Chassis with power supply Introduction 13 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 1 Introduction Model 1001MC management overview The Model 1001MC uses a 10Base T Ethernet port to connect to a local LAN or to any location in the world via the Internet Management can be performed using any SNMP station or web browser with the internal HTTP HTML management screens As shown in figure 4 the Model 1001MC can manage multiple racks of Patton NetLink modems using a daisy chain configuration and a 1001CC in each additionally managed rack 2810 connection to Patton 1094ARC oppo D Model 1094A L E al Model 1095 DSL connection to Patton 1095RC iie 10Base T connection to Model 1001MC Router CSU DSU e SPP CSU DSU
256. nfiguration Next Configuration page Configuration and management 55 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management Displaying the Slot Configuration page The Slot Configuration page see figure 26 is used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats that slot in the case of errors or warnings Patton Electronics Home Page SLOT CONFIGURATION PAGE HOME Card Address 1 About 1001MC Local Model Code model 1092 ARC 1 Configure Cards View Rack 1 System Info 1 Card Identification Information E DownLoad m System Log Epod DSi B Si Ls ocal User ID er ean SNMP System Config LAE None c Help Clear Local 1D Clear Remote 10 Z Card Identification Information o Local Circuit ID lise 7 Q e Remote Circuit ID remote test Submit Clear Remote Circuit iD Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms A A nezet Card Lost Indication Line Down Indication Figure 26 Slot Configuration page Starting from the HOME page to access the Slot Configuration page for the 1092ARC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Card Address for the 1092ARC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 26 the 1092ARC was installed in slot 1 Figure 27 on page 57 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 56 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management Vi
257. nfiguration Menu HOME p N eres Create New Configuration I Exp or le z d 3 2 e O 1095 Patton Electronics Comp Create Configuration yam Configure Cards A 2701RC 2707RC Create Configuration ME System Info mem 3088RC M System Log 8 SNMP Modify Configuration ll System Config Z 1095 Patton Electronics Comp 8 Help C 2701RC 2707RC None Created O sore me 1095 Patton Electronics Com Delete Configuration 2701R C 2707 RC None Created E Delete Configuration 3088RC v Delete Configuration Figure 102 Global Configuration Menu page Do the following to modify a template Creating and modifying global configuration templates 216 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management 1 Select a template from the Modify Configuration pop up menu see figure 102 then click the Modify Configuration button 2 Change the parameters requiring modification see figure 103 When you have finished changing the configuration click on the Submit button to save the changes Refer to section Applying a template on page 217 to activate the template Deleting a template Do the following to delete a template Note When a template configuration is deleted it cannot be recovered 1 Select a template from the Delete Configuration pop up menu see figure 102 on page 216 2 Click the Delete Configuration button Applying a template This section describes how to apply a global configuration to
258. nframe G703 0 Sets the line format to G 703 unframed e frame G704 1 Sets the line format to framed G 704 Clock Mode clockMode2701 RC This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink E1 modems The following status variables can be dis played network CLK 0 e jnternal CLK 1 e external CLK 2 DTE Rate dteRate2701RC This variable displays the DTE rate for the link This is the Nx64 kbps data rate selected by the number of acti vated channels Line Coding lineCoding270 1 RC The following status variables can be displayed AMI line coding e HDB3 line coding CRCA Framing crc This displays if CRC 4 framing is enabled or disabled CAS Multiframing casMF This displays if CAS multiframing is enabled or disabled Line Build Out lineBuildOut This displays the selected line build out either 75 ohm or 120 ohm Tx Clock Timing txClock This displays whether the serial transmit data coming from the DTE is clocked in using the DCE provided transmit clock or DTE provided external clock SW HW Test Mode testModeSetlnd This displays any test mode invoked from the toggle switches DTE test mode lines or from the web manage ment page This option will be highlighted in blue if the unit is in test mode In the status of the parameter SW means initiated via the web management page or HW means initiated from the toggle switches or DTE test mode interface signals on the remote standalone unit off 1 e pat 2
259. ng PC with FTP utility installed Download 249 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference 1001MC with access to the LAN Note For help type help at the FTP prompt for a list of the commands 1 Ar he C DOS prompt on the PC type the following ftp IP ADDRESS where P ADDRESS gt is the IP address of the 1001MC The 1001MC will respond with the following Connected to IP ADDRESS 220 Code download service ready User IP ADDRESS gt none 2 To download 1001MC operational code enter the username as Kz Iynage 1001MC commands are case sensitive so type it exactly as shown The 1001MC will respond with the following 331 User name okay need password Password 3 Enter the superuser password for the box the default password is superuser but it may have been changed by the system administrator in which case use the new password The 1001MC will respond with the following 230 User logged in proceed 4 The type of file being downloaded needs to be specified type the following at the prompt FTP gt type image The 1001MC will respond with the following 200 Command okay 5 Send the file by typing the following F TP send lt filename gt where filename is the full filename of the file to be downloaded including the directory for example c temp 001 MC img The 1001MC will respond with the following Response 200 Command okay 150 File sta
260. note of which rack cards or power supplies are showing errors or warnings see figure 142 Then go to section Using the System Log to check for network problems on page 282 to review the System Log Non Volatile Memory page for information on what may have caused the problem Patton Electronics Home Page MODEM INFORMATION RACK 1 gt HOME Slots Available 15 CAM About 100IMC Modems Installed TENA i Configure Cards Number of Power Supplies ft E System Info Rack Protection Mode Z DownLoad gt System Log ps eae EZ A A duc o EE C Help i Z S io Q E RS gt Card Address LineStatus Warnings Errors Local User Id Local ModelCode Remote User Id Remote 0 0 o Bal support Un Model 1001MC None None SS 1 0 0 po None none 0 None none 0 i 2 10 0 Ba H m none 0 None none 0 i 12 10 10 0 None none 0 None none 0 i 4 J0 0 10 None none 0 None none 0 5 10 0 0 None none 0 None none 0 ls lo 0 0 None none 0 None none 0 i 0 10 0 None Inone 0 None none 0 8 0 0 E None none 0 None none 0 2 0 B E None none 0 i None gt none 0 10 0 0 0 None none 0 None none 0 DEUS ke Te 2 EE Sey y i i 4111 10 10 Ha None none 0 None none 0 i 12 J0 0 10 None none 0 None rono 113 0 fo 0 None none O None none 0 h 14 0 0 0 None none 0 None none 0 i 15 0
261. o send data testMode 3 Processor Mode processorMode1095 This variable displays the status of the processor running on the NetLink mDSL There are four values that are significant to you e normal 0 When the processor is in normal 0 mode the NetLink mDSL modem is monitoring itself and sending the status information to the Model 1001MC internalProcessing 1 When the processor is in the internalProcessing 1 mode it is either busy down loading code to the internal DSP or setting the data pump negotiating 2 When the processor is in the negotiating 2 mode the card was just brought online and the NetLink mDSL is setting up the configuration parameters within the Model 1001MC lineDown 3 At startup all of the fields will be highlighted in yellow signifying that they are not verified parameters As the NetLink mDSL sets up the parameters the highlighting disappears signifying that the display matches the set ting of the card Local Software Rev softVersion1095 These read only MIB variable displays the current version of code that is running in the NetLink mDSL rack card modem You should check the download web page to see if the Model 1001MC has a newer version of code available for downloading Through the download web page you can update the software that is running in the NetLink mDSL rack card Remote Software Rev remotesoftversion 1095 These read only MIB variable displays the current version of
262. ocal Circuit ID Jem Q e Remote Circuit ID remote test Submit Clear Remote Circuit 1D Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms Haria are nezet Card Lost Indication Line Down Indication Figure 118 Slot Configuration Page Card Address nmsSlotID Displays the address of the card Local Model Code localModelCode Displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address View Rack X hyperlink Click on the View Rack X link to display the Modem Information Rack X window see section Modem Infor mation Rack X on page 239 for more information Card Identification Information Local User Id localUserlD 10 byte user supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile Flash within the NetLink modem If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot Slot Configuration 243 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference To configure the local user 1D type the ID into the Local User ID text box then click the Submit button located next to the Remote User ID text box to save the changes Note After submitting the card identification information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Clear Local ID button If you want to delete the local ID information
263. ocal Clock Mode Local Remote pop up menu to select the clock mode You have the following choices internal receiveRecover 0 external receiveRecover 1 receiveRecover internal 2 receiveRecover external 3 external external 4 4 Use the Local Tx Data Sample Point pop up menu to select the local transmit data sample point You have the following choices normal 0 inverted 1 5 Use the Remote Tx Data Sample Point pop up menu to select the remote transmit data sample point You have the following choices normal 0 inverted 1 6 Configure the Local TM from DTE pop up menu using the following choices disabled 0 enabled 1 7 Configure the Remote TM from DTE pop up menu using the following choices disabled 0 enabled 1 8 Configure the Local Framing Mode pop up menu using the following choices slotted 0 Creating and modifying global configuration templates 124 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management normal 3 9 Configure the Remote Framing Mode pop up menu using the following choices slotted 0 normal 3 10 When you have finished setting the configuration click on the Submit button to save the changes Note Ifyou receive an invalid configuration error after creating a configura tion it is resulting from an illegal combination of variables Refer to sec tion Illegal configuration messages on page 122 for more information
264. ocal loopback with pattern generator set to output 511 pattern lalWith511er 6 Local loopback with pattern generator set to output 511 pattern with errors rdl 7 Remote digital loopback e rdlWith511 8 Remote digital loopback with pattern generator set to output 511 pattern e rdIWith511er 9 Remote digital loopback with pattern generator set to output 511 pattern with errors Rack Protection Mode If you want to protect all Model 1095RC rack cards installed in the current rack from being globally config ured select protected 1 from the pop up menu then click the Apply Protection button For more information about the system configuration feature refer to section System Config on page 259 Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Clear Rack X Alarms clearAlarms Click on this button to clear alarms reported by the system for this rack Note The System Log will still display the errors after the Clear Rack X Alarms button is clicked System Level Information 238 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Modem Information Rack X Configure Cards sani laval View Racks Modem Information Information The Modem Information Rack X page displays an overview of the NetLink rack that is being managed This page will display statistical information such as errors and warnings on a per card basis and i
265. ocation This variable displays a user defined string that represents the location of the box You can change this variable in the System Info web page Running Since Last Boot boxUpTime This variable tells you how long the Model 1001MC has been running since it was last reset Total System Slots Available 15 Total Active Slots 5 Total System W arnings 0 Total System Errors Figure 110 Operating status variables Operating status variables There are four system variables which describe the immediate operating status of the NetLink modems installed in the rack These variables are shown in figure 110 and are described in the following sections Total System Slots Available totalConfigSlots This read only variable defines the largest address that the system will POLL address 1 to totalConfigSlots Any NetLink modem with an address outside of this range will not be found by the Model 1001MC Total Active Slots totalActiveSlots This read only variable defines the number of NetLink modems currently installed in the system As the Model 1001MC brings the modems online this number is incremented After a card is removed from the system this number is decrement Total System Warnings boxWarningNumber This variable defines the number of warnings that are currently outstanding in the system This number includes warnings that have been generated from the NetLink modems as well as the Model 1001MC itself If
266. ocessor is in normal 0 mode the NetLink HDSL modem is monitoring itself and sending the status information to the Model 1001MC internalProcessing 1 When the processor is in the internalProcessing 1 mode it is either busy down loading code to the internal DSP or setting the data pump negotiating 2 When the processor is in the negotiating 2 mode the card was just brought online and the NetLink HDSL is setting up the configuration parameters within the Model 1001MC lineDown 3 At startup all of the fields will be highlighted in yellow signifying that they are not verified parameters As the NetLink HDSL sets up the parameters the highlighting disappears signifying that the display matches the set ting of the card Local Software Rev softVersion 1094 These read only MIB variable displays the current version of code that is running in the NetLink HDSL rack card modem You should check the download web page to see if the Model 1001MC has a newer version of code available for downloading Through the download web page you can update the software that is running in the NetLink HDSL rack card Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description 84 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management Remote Software Rev remotesoftversion 1094 These read only MIB variable displays the current version of code that is running in the NetLink HDSL Cus tomer Premise modem You can upd
267. odel Code is also a hyperlink into the configuration page for the NetLink modem and its remote unit The model code information is passed to the Model 1001MC after the card is placed online The Model 1001MC is auto sensing meaning that when a card is found or lost the information will automatically be updated in the sys tem You are not required to setup the Model Code information for each slot When a card is removed from the system the Model Code will be erased and an error or warning will be displayed for the slot this depends on the settings in the Slot Configuration page Remote User Id remoteUserID User supplied string that defines the Customer Premise box at the far end of the link The string is stored in non volatile flash within the CP unit If the unit is moved you ID will move to the new slot making it useful for hardware identification The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Remote Model Code remoteModelCode This column displays the model code of the Customer Premise NetLink modem at the far end of the link This information is communicated from the CP box over the link to the CO Rack Card unit The NetLink mDSL Modem Information page MIB variables description 103 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management rack card will then update the Model 1001MC For this reason this information will not be available until after the link is made between the
268. odem Infor Information mation Rack X Record Information Figure 35 Web page navigation to Slot Configuration page For more information about items on the Slot Configuration page see Slot Configuration page MIB variables description on page 86 Displaying the Download page The Download page see figure 36 is where you can download the latest version of 1001MC and 1094ARC software Patton Electronics Home Page DOWNLOAD HOME View Status About 1001MC In order to download new code into your NetLink modems follow these steps Configure Cards 1 Remove the card that you wish to upgrade from the chassis 2 Set dipswitch S2 6 and S2 7 both to the OFF position System Info 3 Select the type of download you would like using the buttons below DownLoad 4 Select the View Status hyperlink on the top of the page System Log 5 Slide the card into the chassis You will see the download status updated SNMP in the window as the download progresses Sion Confi 6 When the download is complete remove the card from the rack and return asta L nnus switches S2 6 and S2 7 to their original position Help 7 Retum to the modem configuration screen and verify the proper configuration for your modem NOTE Do not install the unit in the rack until you have selected the software that you want to download NOTE The Front panel LEDs on the NetLink modem will flash when the download is complete Current Software Available
269. odem Information page for the Model 2707RC c ddress Line Status Warnings Errors Local User Id Local ModelCode Remot IC Remote 0 o 0 0 KE Test Medal 1000MC None None None None 1 startup l 0 0 Local model207RC X21 D Remote model2707 1 Tech Bench 2 startup 1 0 0 Local mod MIRCX2I Remote ads Starting from the HOME page to access the Modem Information page for the 2707RC click on the following links Configure Cards View Rack 1 Figure 84 on page 171 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Modem Information page see Displaying the Slot Configuration page on page 176 Configuration and management 170 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management View Rack 1 Cad Slot ar 0 K ibd Configuration Configure System Level sn Cards Information Cow Rak 3 mation Rack X System 1 Modem FA w Mode Configuration View Rack 8 System Log Modi Record Information SNMP MIB System Log RAM Hard Reset System Log Flash Figure 84 Web page navigation to Modem Information page E is He 16 E CAJA Login HOME System Log Modify Configuration Next Configuration Configuration and management 171 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Displaying the Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page The Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page see figure 85 enables you to ma
270. of variables that could cause problems with the modems if implemented incorrectly Those variable combinations referred to as llegal combinations are described in this chapter This section contains the following information to help you configure and use templates Protecting individual Model 1001 racks and 1095RC rack cards from global modification You may not want all racks or modems to be modified when you apply the global template so section Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 1095RC modems from global modification describes how to protect individual 1001 racks and 1095RC modems from being globally configured Creating a template see section Creating a template on page 117 Modifying a template see section Modifying a template on page 121 Deleting a template see section on page 125 Applying a template see section Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 1095RC modems from global modification This section describes how to protect 1001 racks and 1095RC modem cards from being modified when a glo bal modification is applied This is useful if you are setting all but a few cards to the same configuration Select the appropriate option from following configuration choices e Protect a Model 1001 rack see section Protecting a Model 1001 rack from global configuration on page 114 Protect a Model 1095RC rack card see section Protecting a Model 1095RC rack card from global config uration
271. on eene TII ee UIN 78 Modelit094 GonfigurauonSlatipage MIR vatiables cdeseniption dede e TENTE TETTE 81 Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description ee 84 Slot Configuration page MIB variables eene reei a E E A 86 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Contents 10 Using the Download page to upgrade 1094ARC software esee nennen emen 87 Model 1095RC management 89 TALUNO RT A A AAA A A 92 Conficuration an d managements ridad ida 92 Modem Information page MIB variables description ira lit 101 Model 1095 Configuration Slot page MIB variables descripion sss 104 Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description es 107 Slot Configuration page MIB variables deschpton ratas 110 Using the Download page to upgrade 1095RC software eese nennen nne emen 111 Creating and modifying global configuration templates eei srta an 113 Model EA eT eskort stvi vE see R VESKO SENE asise SKEE E eie Sasiia 129 Os T innen E E E DOES 132 Configuration and management mii as 132 Modem Information Rack X page MIB variables description eene 140 Model 2701RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 143 Model 2701 Configuration page MIB variables description eere nennen 149 Slot Configuration page MIB variables descripcion 153 Creating and
272. on the rack card Model 2701RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 143 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Line Status lineStatus Displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed linedown 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data testMode 3 Alarm counters For the four alarm counters you may choose to do numerous actions upon detecting errors nothing incre ment the counter upon each occurrences of the error send an SNMP trap or send a Syslog message The choice is determined by configuring the Line Down Indicator on the Slot Configuration Page The following table clarifies what the parameter will do Increment the Alarm Counter Send a Syslog message Send an SNMP trap on the web page None v Warning v v Error v v v LOS losAlarm Displays the number of times Loss of Sync on the El line is detected It is incremented when synchronization to the El stream is lost This number is accumulating in the 1001MC Note Alarm counters severity level is controlled by the Line Down Indica tion level The following options are available none Only Syslog message will be sent warning Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Warning and web page warning counter will be incremented e error Syslog message will be sent beginning with box
273. ons Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Procedure for modifying a template Patton Electronics Home P 22 Global Configuration Menu HOME 72 About 1001 MC Create New Configuration k Configure Cards e System Info Model 1095 Configuration s DownLoad mM System Log Modify Configuration PI SNMP 8 System Config Modify Configuration CONFIG 1 0 Modify Configuration T Help A Delete Configuration Q Delete Model 1095 Configuration CONFIG 1 0 Delete Configuration Q Figure 132 Global Configuration Menu page Do the following to modify a template 1 Select a template from the Modify Configuration pop up menu see figure 130 then click the Modify Configuration button The Model 1095 Global Configuration window displays see figure 131 E Z e zZ lt a ie Z e ad V i e System Config Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Loq SNMP System Confiq Help Model 1095 Global Configuration Warning Please review your configuration before submitting it to the system Illegal configurations could cause links to lose syncronization Follow the hyperlink for more information on configuration options Configuration Information Modify Configuration Name test Valid Configuration Local Remote DTE Rate rate64k 3 Clock Mode Local Remote
274. oop Time Out uo itae au RDL Type v54 2 Configuration Type software config 1 TM from DTE disabled 0 Software Version 3 5 0 Reset Card Figure 68 Model 2701RC Configuration Slot page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 2701RC Configuration Slot page for the 2701RC click on the following links Home menu gt Configure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number gt model2701RC xxx x in the Local Model Code column for the 2701RC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 68 the 2701RC was installed in slot 4 Figure 69 on page 136 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 135 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management System Level Information Modem Infor mation Rack X Modem Configuration System Log ail odi System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 69 Web page navigation to Model 2701RC Configuration Slot page Information Hard Reset Making configuration changes to your 2701RC NetLink NTU Do use the following to make configuration changes to your NetLink NTU Note You must be logged in as superuser to perform the following procedure 1 With the Model 2701 Configuration Slot page displayed change the Input Mode see figure 68 to super VisoryMode The Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear 2 Click on the Modify Configuration hyperlink to display t
275. or the 3088RC click on the following links Home menu gt Configure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number gt X in the Card Address column for the 3088RC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 97 the 3088RC was installed in slot 4 Figure 98 on page 198 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 197 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management View Rack 1 1001MC Configure Cards Information System Lo System Log SNMP MIB System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 98 Web page navigation to Slot Configuration Page System Level z Modem Infor Information mation Rack X Record Information Hard Reset For more information about items on the Slot Configuration page see Slot Configuration page MIB variables description on page 209 Modem Information Rack X page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Modem Information Rack X page Starting from the HOME page click on the following links Home menu gt Configure Cards menu gt View Rack rack number Slots Available totalConfigSlots Displays the number of configurable slots available in the rack Modems Installed rackXCardsInstalled Displays the number of modem cards installed in the rack that the system has found Number of Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies
276. ored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Slot Configuration page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Slot Configuration page From the Modem Information page the address column creates a list of hyperlinks to the Slot Configuration page associated with the specified address The Slot Configuration page can be used to set slot specific information related to the sys tem and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors and warning Note The information contained here is also available in the Model 1001MC manual and is listed here for ease of use Card Address nmsSlotID Displays the address of the card Local Model Code localModelCode Displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address View Rack X hyperlink Click on the View Rack X link to display the Modem Information Rack X window see section Modem Infor mation Rack X on page 239 for more information Card Identification Information Local User Id localUserlD User supplied string that defines the NetLink NTU installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink NTU and is useful for hardware identification If the add
277. ority for a message that will be sent to Flash storage The following options are available priorityVerbose 5 priorityDebug 10 priorityInfo 20 e priorityOddity 40 priorityService 60 e prioritySystem 80 e priorityDisable 1000 For most situations set the outputs that are being used to prioritySystem 80 For unused output mechanisms set the priority to priorityDisable 1000 Select the priority setting from the pop up menu then click the Sub mit button Note After submitting the change you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the config uration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Min Priority for RAM Specify the minimum priority for a message that will be sent to RAM The following options are available e priorityVerbose 5 e priorityDebug 10 e priorityInfo 20 e priorityOddity 40 priorityService 60 e prioritySystem 80 e priorityDisable 1000 For most situations set the outputs that are being used to prioritySystem 80 For unused output mechanisms set the priority to priorityDisable 1000 Select the priority setting from the pop up menu then click the Sub mit button Note After submitting the change you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the config System Log Modify 254 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference uration chang
278. orkstation wiring diagram 33 Connecting the cables Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Installing the RS 232 configuration daisy chain port cable The DB 25 connector is a DTE configured RS 232 port that is used to set up your IP address subnet mask and default configuration After the system is set up the configuration port can be used to connect to a Model 1001CC in a separate rack if you are daisy chaining multiple racks 2 TD driven by 1001MC 3 RD received by 1001MC 5 CTS received by 1001MC 7 SG driven by 1001MC DTR 20 Figure 13 RS 232 DTE configuration port Note The configuration port on your 1001MC being a DTE requires a null modem or equivalent cable when connecting to a terminal Using personal computer communications software Procomm Windows Terminal BitCom PC Anywhere etc set the configuration of your communications software to the following parameters Data Rate 19 200 bps e Async Character Format 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity Terminal Emulation VT 100 or similar terminal emulation LED indicators The 1001MC front card has status LEDs see figure 14 that display at a glance the current operational status of the 1001MC Electronics To Figure 14 Front card LEDs LED indicators 34 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Ethernet LED indicators The Ethernet LEDs convey transmit and receive data activity as well as the sta
279. ormal applications this should be set to disable 1 When the application is using rear cards or interface modules that do not have loop back ability from the DTE such as the IM2RC IA Ethernet rear card this variable must be set to disable 1 In most situations ifa DTE test mode is required it should be enable only during the time that the test is needed Test Mode testModeSetiDSL remotetestModeSetiDSL These variables allow you to place the NetLink iDSL rack card into test modes For more information on the test modes please see the NetLink iDSL Test Modes section below Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description 64 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management Submit Query button After making configuration changes select the Back link then select onLine and finally select Submit Query This will submit all the configuration information to the Model 1001MC After this the information is stored in volatile RAM until you place the Input Mode to onLine 0 This will tell the 1001MC to copy all of the configuration information into the NetLink iDSL configuration space Clear Changes Once configuration changes have been made and you have selected the Submit Query button if you decide not to implement these changes select the Clear Changes button This will set the configuration back to the settings that were there when this page was entered Set Default Configuration Selecting this b
280. ot recognize the configura tion changes that were made Model 1095 Configuration Slot page Configuration Status table description The Configuration Status table shows the configuration for the set of units There are columns for the local and remote units If a field is highlighted in yellow it signifies one of two possible conditions e Ar start up the Model 1001MC will display a default configuration for the card and all fields will be high lighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified During the negotiation phase the NetLink mDSL modem will update the configuration in the Model 1001MC with its last set of stored parameters As these fields are updated in the Model 1001MC the yellow highlighting will disappear signi fying that the information has been updated After the local and remote units are linked the units will begin updating the remote information in the table and Line Status set to datamode 2 e Ifa rack card is installed in the rack without a customer premise unit connected the remote information will be left as either none or highlighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified The following sections define the MIB variables that are shown in the Configuration Status table Model Code localModelCode remoteModelCode These variables display the local and remote models codes for the units that were found in the specified address DTE rate dteRate 1095 This varia
281. ote Do not install the unit into the rack until you have selected the soft ware that you want to download 5 Select the View Status hyperlink see figure 39 DOWNLOAD View Status Tn arder ta download new code inta vanr Netlink modems follow these ten Figure 39 View Status link location Slide the card into the chassis You will see the download status updated in the window as the download progresses 7 When the download is complete remove the card from the rack and return DIP switches S2 6 and S 7 to their original positions Note The front panel LEDs on the NetLink modem will flash when the download is complete 8 Return to the modem configuration page and verify the proper configuration for your modem Congratulation The software has been successfully upgraded Using the Download page to upgrade 1094ARC software 88 Chapter Model 1095RC management Chapter contents T AI rU E 92 NM descriptiones eet IM ITIN T 92 HIRIE ET N AE A E E A AE A TM 92 Displayine the Global Gonnguradon Menulpage t eee E ia 93 Displaying the Modem Information page earar o a e aida 94 Displaying the Model L095 Configuration T eoar na a a rer eee teenie cee one eee eons 95 Making configuration changes to your 1095RC Netlink moden eene 96 Displaying the Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page eere 7 Displaying the Slot ETT TE T roc ciar 99 Displayingthe Downloadi T 100 Modem Information page MIB variables desc
282. otetestModeSet1095 sss 110 Submit Query Ditto incidental loli silicio 110 e O 110 Set Default Configuration iii id 110 Slot Configuration page MIB variables description ici ana dns 110 Card Address nmsSlotl DY A 110 Local Model Gode local R a TTT 110 View Rack a T T 110 Card Identification Information incida 110 bocal User Td local Ser iii di tits 110 Remote User Id semoteUserLID iii 110 Local Circuit ID local CareuttTI o ide 111 Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuttlD coin ias 111 Alarm oO ii da 111 Clear Slot Alarmas resetStatus cistitis iii eh rer d ee ed blrea 111 Hardware Reset resis laica 111 Card Lost Indication cardLostIndication sss sss sss 111 Line Down Indication lineDownIndication eese enne nnnne entente senten 111 Using the Download page to upprade 1095RG software iet e eee e EE Ede DIR EST avras 111 Creating and modifying global configuration templates esee 113 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 1095RC modems from global modification 113 Protecting a Model 1001 rack from global configuration seen 114 Protecting a Model 1095RC rack card from global configuration eere 116 Creating template dc ence arta n erede de ib os ede e i rd eise pp e tr reta 117 Configuration tales conan oia dubai adria 117 Notes on clock modesto irc ic 118 No
283. ou may protect an entire rack or only selected individual rack cards To protect an entire Model 1001 rack see the section Protecting an entire Model 1001 rack from global configuration on page To protect a selected Model 3088RC rack card see section Protecting a Model 3088RC rack card from global configuration on page Protecting an entire Model 1001 rack from global configuration Do the following to protect a Model 1001 rack Creating and modifying global configuration templates 211 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management 1 Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page see figure 99 Patton Electronics T Apply 3088RC System Configuration 0 Apply Configuration Home P inn Apply 3088RC System Test Mode none 0 HOME Total Slots Available 104 About 1001MC CONSECT NNNM Total Cards Installed 3 Import Export Configure Cards Power Supplies Installed 16 System Info Total System Warnings 0 System Log e Update SNMP System Config Help E m zZ 2 4 x we a Z MV Q Z S Rack 1 Top Level Rack Enable ame Submit View Fac Address Range 1 13 Total Slots Available 13 Total Cards Installed 3 Power Supplies Installed 2 Power Supply 1 Status Power Supply 2 Status Total Errors 0
284. oved from the manage ment system The following options are available none 0 e warning 1 Ifa card lost situation occurs it will be displayed in yellow highlighting as a warning on the HOME System Level Information and Modem Information Rack pages error 2 If a card lost situation occurs it will be displayed in red highlighting as an error on the HOME System Level Information and Modem Information Rack pages Line Down Indication lineDownlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem reports a line down sce nario The following options are available none 0 e warning 1 If a line down situation occurs it will be displayed in yellow highlighting as a warning on the HOME System Level Information and Modem Information Rack pages e error 2 If a line down situation occurs it will be displayed in red highlighting as an error on the HOME System Level Information and Modem Information Rack pages Note Line Down Indication must be set to error 2 in order for line up and line down SNMP trap messages to be sent Slot Configuration 245 Model 1001MC Operations Guide System Information 10 HTTP HTML web page reference System Information Sri Information The System Information page see figure 119 displays the current setting for the system This page allows you to setup parameters defining password protection and the network address A description of
285. p the Model Code information for each slot When a card is removed from the system the Model Code will be erased and an error or warning will be displayed for the slot this depends on the settings in the Slot Configuration page Remote User Id remoteUserID User supplied string that defines the Customer Premise box at the far end of the link The string is stored in non volatile flash within the CP unit If the unit is moved you ID will move to the new slot making it useful for hardware identification The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Note This feature is not supported by Model 270XRC network termina tion units NTUs Remote Model Code remoteModelCode This column displays the model code of the Customer Premise NetLink modem at the far end of the link This information is communicated from the CP box over the link to the CO Rack Card unit The NetLink mDSL Modem Information page MIB variables description 179 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management rack card will then update the Model 1001MC For this reason this information will not be available until after the link is made between the two modems Note This feature is not supported by Model 270XRC network termina tion units NTUs Protected You can protect individual rack cards from being globally configured by setting the pop up menu from nor mal 0 to protected 1 After you have set the
286. page see section Slot Config uration on page 243 for more information Submit button Click the Submit button to input the changes to the management system After clicking the Submit button you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Note After submitting the remote circuit ID information you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Modem Information Rack X 242 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Slot Configuration Configure Cards dal View Racks Modem Card Address Slo Information Information Configuration The Slot Configuration page see figure 118 enables you to make slot specific configuration changes that are not product specific The following sections describe each variable Patton Electronics Home Page SLOT CONFIGURATION PAGE HOME Card Address 1 About 1001MC Local Model Code model 1092 ARC 1 Confiqure Cards View Rack 1 System Info Card Identification Information z rs DownLoad A System Log E IU ID cri L ocal User 1 er an SNMP PA System Confi Remote User ID None C Help Clear Local 1D Clear Remote 10 7 Card Identification Information O L
287. perations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management Line Status lineStatus 1094 Displays the status of the line There are three possible values that can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 testMode 3 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data Processor Mode processorMode1094 Displays the status of the processor running on the NetLink HDSL There are four values that are significant to you e normal 0 When the processor is in normal 0 mode the NetLink HDSL modem is monitoring itself and sending the status information to the Model 1001MC internalProcessing 1 When the processor is in the internalProcessing 1 mode it is either busy down loading code to the internal DSP or setting the data pump negotiating 2 When the processor is in the negotiating 2 mode the card was just brought online and the NetLink HDSL is setting up the configuration parameters within the Model 1001MC lineDown 3 At startup all of the fields will be highlighted in yellow signifying that they are not verified parameters As the NetLink HDSL sets up the parameters the highlighting disappears signifying that the display matches the set ting of the card Input Mode mode1094 The following settings are available onLine 0 superVisoryModel To make configuration changes to the NetLink HDSL modems you must first set this bit to superVisoryModel When the Input Mode is set to supe
288. perations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Displaying the Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page The Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page see figure 46 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 1095RC and the remote CPE box When the page displays the unit is set to the ozLine state and the current configuration is displayed Patton Electronics O Home Page Model 1095 Configuration E HOME Card Address 11 Z About 1001MC Line Status dataMode 2 gt Configure Cards Processor Mode normal 0 Zz System Info Local Software Rev 2 0 2 DownLoad Remote Software Rev 0 0 0 p System Log Back NOTE After making configuration pages you must set the unit back to onLine mode to SNMP implement change ja System Config M Help Next Configuration Z C e Local Remote Q z PARSONS e DTE Rate rate32k 0 y rate32k 0 Clock Mode Local Remote intemal receiveRecaver 0 y receiveRecover 2 Respond to RDL request enabled 0 y enabled 0 TM from DTE enabled 0 y enabled 0 y Enable Switches enabled 1 y Jenabled 1 y Test Mode off 1 off 1 Submit Query Figure 46 Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page for the 1095RC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Local Model Code for the
289. plate 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Home Page HOME About 1001 MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Log SNMP Help DIMC CONFIGURATION MENILI Figure 130 Global Configuration Menu page Patton Electronics Global Configuration Menu Create New Configuration Model 1095 Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration CONFIG 1 0 Modify Configuration Delete Configuration Delete Model 1095 Configuration CONFIG 1 0 Delete Configuration Note You can create as many as five templates if you need to delete a tem plate to make room for another refer to section Do the following to create a template on page 271 1 Click in the Model 1095 Configuration text box see figure 130 and type a short name 10 characters or less for the new template then click the Create Configuration button The Model 1095 Global Configuration window displays see figure 131 1001 MC CONFIGURATION MENL System Config Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Loq SNMP System Confiq Help Figure 131 Model 1095 Global Configuration page Model 1095 Global Configuration Warning Please review your configuration before submitting it to the system Illegal configurations could cause links to lose syncronization Follow the hyperlink for more information on configurati n options Configuration Information
290. playing the Modem Information page on page 191 Model 3088RC Configuration Slot X page This page along with the Model 3088RC Configuration page enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 3088RC and the remote CPE box see section Displaying the Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page on page 193 Model 3088RC Configuration page This page along with the Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page enables you to update configuration of modems installed in the system see Displaying the Model 3088RC Configuration page on page 195 Slot Configuration Page This page can be used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors or warnings see section Displaying the Model 3088RC Con figuration Slot page on page 193 Note bor information about other Model 1001MC pages refer to chapter 10 HTTP HTML web page reference on page 220 Introduction 190 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Displaying the Modem Information page The Modem Information page see figure 91 displays the cards installed in the system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems Patton Electronics MODEM INFORMATION RACK 1 i 9 09 CURIE AERIS HOME Slots Available 13 About 100 IMC Modems Installed 3 _ a port Power Supplies CA Conficure Cards Protection Mode normal 0 System Info DownLoad System Log Power Supply 1 St
291. plied string that defines the Customer Premise box at the far end of the link The string is stored in non volatile flash within the CP unit If the unit is moved the User ID will move to the new slot making it useful for hardware identification The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Slot Configuration page MIB variables description 65 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management Local Circuit ID localCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms resetStatus Selecting this push button erases the alarms errors and warning associated with the specified slot Note The errors and warning will still be listed in the System Log Hardware Reset resetStatus Selecting this push button will force the associated modem to perform a hardware reset Card Lost Indication cardLostlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem is removed from the man agement system Three choices are available Error Warning None Line Down Indication lineDownIndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem reports a line down sce nario Three choices are available
292. position System Info 3 Select the type of download you would like using the buttons below DownLoad 4 Select the View Status hyperlink on the top of the page System Log 5 Slide the card into the chassis You will see the download status updated SNMP in the window as the download progresses System Confi 6 When the download is complete remove the card from the rack and return BXSenLt emus switches S2 6 and S2 7 to their original position Help 7 Return to the modem configuration screen and verify the proper configuration for your modem NOTE Do not install the unit in the rack until you have selected the software that you want to download NOTE The Front panel LEDs on the NetLink modem will flash when the download is complete Current Software Available Model 1095RC 2 3 90 Download 1095RC Software Model 1094ARC 2 1 1 1095RC Key 2 10 Figure 120 Download page Download Download The Model 1001MC has the facilities to download new Flash software into itself and the following NetLink modems e 1094ARC see section Using the Download page to upgrade 1094ARC software on page 87 for informa tion on upgrading the Flash software e 1095RC see section Using the Download page to upgrade 1095RC software on page 111 for informa tion on upgrading the Flash software Upgrading 1001MC software via FTP download This section describes how to upgrade the Flash memory in the Model 1001MC You will need the followi
293. r HOME The HOME page is the first HTTP HTML screen that you will reach after you log into the Model 1001MC see figure 107 on page 225 From the HOME page you may monitor the current system status save any sys tem changes or reset the system without powering off the rack system Box information Software Version 235 1 Software Date Code Apr 15 2003 09 47 20 Box Name Support Unit Box Contact Test Unit Box Location Support Desk Running Since Last Boot 85 days 0 hrs 7 min 38 sec Figure 109 Box information There are six system variables which describe information about the 1001 MC These variables are shown in figure 109 and are described in the following sections Software Version boxSoftware Version This variable defines the version of the software currently running in the Model 1001MC The Model 1001MC can be software upgraded using an FTP download Software Date Code boxDateCode This variable defines the date and time the software was compiled HOME 228 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Box Name boxName This variable displays a user defined string that represents the name of the box This variable can be changed by the user in the System Info web page Box Contact boxContact This variable displays a user defined string that represents the contact for the box You can change this variable in the System Info web page Box Location boxL
294. r 1095 modems the Framing Mode must be set to normal The system administrator should only set the Clock Mode to external external 4 if there is an IM2RC K installed in the 1095RC at the rack and an IMI K installed in the 1095 standalone unit at the remote site When setting a unit for the external clock mode the unit must have an external clock source in order to make a link When using either an IM2RC K or an IMI K the K module will always provide the external clock for the unit so it is not necessary to have a G 703 G 704 link available When using any other type of serial inter face make sure that an external clock is provided by the DTE equipment or the modems will not link Creating and modifying global configuration templates 117 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Notes on clock mode settings The Clock Mode Setting determines the source of timing for the link Most applications will use one of the following configurations internal receiveRecover 0 external receiveRecover 1 There are special situations which would require the use of the external external 4 clock mode setting This setting should only be used when the application has an IM2RC K and a 1095RC in the rack system and a IM1 K and a 1095 standalone at the remote site If you are using any other interface cards do not use the exter nal external 4 configuration Note When your are using the external external 4 clock mode settings you
295. r supplies in the sys tem to determine what the address range of the individual racks will be The number of power supplies installed in each rack is entered on the Modem Information page If the system is set for two power supplies installed the 1001MC will automatically set the number of slots available displayed on the Modem Informa tion page in the chassis to 13 If the system is set for a single power supply installed the 1001MC will auto matically set the number of slots available in the chassis to 15 Using this information the Model 1001MC will poll the specified address range in each rack Thus in a single power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from address 1 to address 15 Note The 1001MC is always address 0 The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 16 In a redundant power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from address 1 to address 13 The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 14 The daisy chained racks are set up in the same manner with 13 addresses being available in a redundant system and 15 addresses being available in single supply system When you disable a rack the addresses are still set aside for that rack space If a power supply is removed the addressing will not change unless you make the change through the 1001M
296. rVisoryModel the Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear on the web page next to the Refresh Current Page hyperlink Select the Modify Configuration hyperlink The Model 1094A Configuration Next Configuration page will appear see section Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description on page 84 for more information After making configuration changes to the NetLink HDSL modems in the Model 1094A Update Configuration page return to this page and place the Input Mode variable back to onLine 0 This will notify the Model 1001MC that the configuration has completed and will cause it to copy the new configuration into the NetLink HDSL configuration space If this is not done the NetLink HDSL will not recognize the configura tion changes that were made Model 1094 Configuration Slot page Configuration Status table description The Configuration Status table shows the configuration for the set of units There are columns for the local and remote units If a field is highlighted in yellow it signifies one of two possible conditions Ar start up the Model 1001MC will display a default configuration for the card and all fields will be high lighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified During the negotiation phase Model 1094 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description 82 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management the NetLink HDSL modem will update the con
297. rack level configuration Including information on how to setup are rack for use by the system system help This page gives information about the system level Ser ae Tncluding how to set your IP address IP mask and Gateway about This page gives information about the system Including software revision of the box total errors total warning and tech support contact information Figure 138 Global Configuration Menu page The following hyperlinks are available configuration info This link displays information about setting the configuration for the cards in your system It provides helpful hints to aid in the proper configuration of your system e rack help This link displays information about the rack level configuration It includes information on how to set up each rack for use by the system system help This link displays information about the system level configuration It includes information on how to set your IP address IP mask and Gateway e about This link displays information about the system including the software revision of the box total errors total warning and tech support contact information Help 275 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting and maintenance Chapter contents Introduction T T OO TE Ta EEES EEE 277 Wroubleshootine ye T e eom ree uM TU 277 Siroubleshootinemetwarlemalhineslonsees eee OUTRE UTE TS 278 Checking O0 UNI GSwebrpaecstoIWAEDIDES rca 278 Using the System
298. rations the saved files can quickly be loaded or mported into a replace ment Model 1001M C greatly speeding up the installation process should the Model 1001MC need replacing Note All actions for Import Export require superuser access privileges To import or export a configuration click on Import Export under the Configuration Menu to display the Import Export main window see figure 114 IMPORT EXPORT EXPORT CURRENT FLASH CONFIGURATION The current power up settings as stored in the system flash will be dumped to your screen You may then save them in a file using the save as function in your web browser for later import back into the system When performing the save as function make sure that the file is saved in text format Note that the information which is exported is the current hard storage settings NOT the currently running settings You may want to issue a Record Current Configuration on the home page before dumping the configuration Export Flash IMPORT FLASH CONFIGURATION FROM FILE Tf you have previously exported the system configuration to a file then you can submit that file below and the system will update its flash configuration from the data saved in the file After this operation the system should be rebooted to activate the new settings The configuration is loaded directly into the flash and so does NOT immediately modify any settings WARNING This operation will erase whatever settings you curr
299. rd number in that rack and local circuit ID in the trap string followed by a description of the trap For example the string in a line up trap will resemble Model 1001MC Demo Rack Number 1 Card Number 12 Local Circuit ID Test Circuit Line Up Addr 12 Type the IP address into the text box then click the Submit button Note After submitting the change you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the config uration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Priority Min Priority for Syslog Daemon Specify the minimum priority for a message that will be sent to the SysLog Daemon The following options are available e priority Verbose 5 e priorityDebug 10 e priorityInfo 20 e priorityOddity 40 priorityService 60 e prioritySystem 80 e priorityDisable 1000 For most situations set the outputs that are being used to prioritySystem 80 For unused output mechanisms set the priority to priorityDisable 1000 Select the priority setting from the pop up menu then click the Sub mit button System Log Modify 253 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Note After submitting the change you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the config uration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Min Priority for Flash Storage Specify the minimum pri
300. re information Refer to section Applying a template on page 125 to activate the template Modifying a template This section describes how to modify a global configuration template The Patton Model 1095 enables the Model 1001MC system administrator to configure the units for a wide variety of applications Due to the many different applications that are supported care must be taken when setting the configuration of your modems There are several illegal combinations of variables that could cause problems with the modems if implemented incorrectly Be sure to read the following information before creating a template Configuration rules Things to keep in mind when creating a template see section Configuration rules on page 121 Notes on clock mode settings see section Notes on clock mode settings on page 122 Notes on framing mode settings see section Notes on framing mode settings on page 122 Illegal configuration messages see section Illegal configuration messages on page 122 After reviewing the rules and notes go to section Procedure for modifying a template on page 123 to learn how to modify a template Configuration rules Keep in mind the following when modifying a template Ifyou have an IM2RC K G 703 G 704 Rear Card installed with a 1095RC in your rack the unit must have the Local Clock Mode set to external and the Framing Mode set to slotted Ifyou have an IM1 K G 703 G 704 Quick Connect Mo
301. re sett eee e e rU E eter GLEE iE GONE 210 Local Circuit JD local Circuit da iia 210 Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID eese nente aR TAR aiaa ahg seen nans 210 Alarm InfotiiattOn scott reete doe Ge a en tfe ia etiem E 210 Clear Sloe Alastas resetStatuls iia 210 Hardware H TT A A a aes ne eiat 210 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Card Lost Indication cardLostindication 4 ertet inte tet dla dead 210 Line Down Indication lineDownIndication sss 210 Creating and modifying global configuration templates eese netten eene 211 Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 3088RC NTUs from global modification 211 Protecting an entire Model 1001 rack from global configuration eene 211 Protecting a selected Model 3088RC rack card from global configuration eenn 213 Creating Neb M ees 214 Moding tein late saat eere nee opere redo E EUER BUR PE een E EEEE eris RE ATI da 216 Deleting a template 25 o STRE REIN E P RD E IEEE ERO E NS 217 Applying template atte ERI PE EHE ERR eR ERR 217 To configure all Model 3088RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks eee 217 To configure all Model 3088RC rack cards in just one Model 1001 rack e 219 189 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Introduction This chapter describes managing a Model 3088
302. red if a global template is applied see section Protecting a Model 1095RC rack card from global configuration on page 116 for more information Select the appropriate option from following configuration choices e Globally configure a Model 1095RC rack cards in 4 Model 1001 racks see section Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks on page 126 e Globally configure all Model 1095RC rack card in one Model 1001 rack see section Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in one Model 1001 rack on page 128 Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks Do the following to apply global configuration to all Model 1095RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks l Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Information page see figure 63 Figure 64 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Patton Electronics HomePage System Level Information HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Overview System Info Apply System Configuration DownLoad Apply System Test Mode System Log SNMP Total Slots Available 15 System Config Total Cards Installed Help Power Supplies Installed Total System Warnings Oo oO u Total System Errors Clear All System Alarms Update e e zZ x vd Z V io e
303. remote transmit data sample point You have the following choices normal 0 inverted 1 6 Configure the Local TM from DTE pop up menu using the following choices disabled 0 enabled 1 7 Configure the Remote TM from DTE pop up menu using the following choices disabled 0 enabled 1 8 Configure the Local Framing Mode pop up menu using the following choices slotted 0 System Config 270 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference normal 3 9 Configure the Remote Framing Mode pop up menu using the following choices slotted 0 normal 3 10 When you have finished setting the configuration click on the Submit button to save the changes Note Ifyou receive an invalid configuration error after creating a configura tion it is resulting from an illegal combination of variables Refer to sec tion Illegal configuration messages on page 268 for more information Refer to section Applying a template on page 271 to activate the template Patton Electronics He P 22 Global Configuration Menu gt HOME D FAN Aboutiooimc Create New Configuration Configure Cards GN System Info Model 1095 Configuration s DownLoad mil System Log Modify Configuration AB SNMP System Config Modify Configuration CONFIG 1 0 el Modify Configuration EN Help E Delete Configuration e Delete Model 1095 Configuration Q Figure 134 Global Configura
304. ress of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Slot Configuration page MIB variables description 185 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Remote User Id remoteUserlD This feature is not supported by the Model 2707RC NTU Local Circuit ID localCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms resetStatus Selecting this push button erases the alarms errors and warning associated with the specified slot Note The errors and warning will still be listed in the System Log Hardware Reset resetStatus Selecting this push button will force the associated modem to perform a hardware reset Card Lost Indication cardLostlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem is removed from the man agement system Three choices are available e Error 2 e Warning 1 e None 0 Line Down Indication lineDownlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem reports a line down sce nario Three choices are available Error 2 e Warning 1 e None 0 Note Line Down Indication must be set to
305. ription ee e e E A ais 101 Slots AvailableqtocalContigslots boue ete te TT EU TR TTE 101 IModemisilnstalled irackox ardsinstallecieeesee eee AL ad 101 Numberof Power Supplies rack XDPowerSupplies eee ce es ee NIE ERUNT LIU ta 101 Rack Pro tection C UTRUM ehe 101 Submit cron mouet rte mese Eee ce EE metta euet vetet ares cree I S reer rec 102 Power Supply R ere Uer er eMe EP IU UTEM 102 lowensupplw2 T eee ee n eT EM NT I T 102 GleariRiacle xe arms e T 102 IRE cit UD SS IST D T Lent ueste uere me eon tei quus PRE Re E E ER 102 Dine Statusce tetuer EON vargas Seen TEO nd 102 Warnings warning Count Uo oret a ILLI E ee A A AEA ER E EREE EA RAEE 103 ETIO NEOL OUI t A A HM TTT 103 Toca di A RIP T A Aer 103 loea Model Code local O ade T TTT 103 enoe L B RTT e R TE 103 Remote Model Eoderemote Mode Eat E P EAE ao 103 INS m Em MTM 104 VAO r O local curl UE ERRORI 104 Remote Gircuie ls rem ote Circuit US eee E UTI IS RR TENE 104 O eee 104 Madel095 Configuration Slotipage MIR vatiablesidesenip that aaa 104 Model 1095 RE Model 1095 Configuration Slot OSS lO 104 astas A temer E ao EIU 105 Processor Mode processor Mode crie T E e TTA 105 Previous CardibuttoDb ex e TORT ONERE 105 S THT TT 105 Nert Card ET eee I ERE mer 105 A ka Gl check T e ep eee ee T MR ed et 105 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Input Mode mode1095 nd gent nere n rep e rta e Re REP PEE ais 106 Model 1095 Configuration Slot page Configuration St
306. rit eret da Pee redde 184 H W Testmode testMoedeSetInd 2 2 oir re dias 184 SW Test mode testModeSetE2707 A 52 ehe td esee lid 184 Loop Timeone MOG pO Mn 185 Test Mode from DTE testModeDT 9 nnne ERE nnns EAER EEE NE EEn 185 Contig Type confie lype cese one tenerae Ote pit e ee E e tome tien 185 JE exa E51 30 D sete re EM EN 185 Slot Configuration page MIB variables description tenente nenne carr one enne nene 185 Card Address nmsSlotlbi it id 185 Local Model Code localModelGode 5 5 2 7 i 185 View Rack X hyperlink ceci oreet reete tiet Pr t epit eee dre i es PE Ha EUROS 185 Card Identification Information A ere easet asia ett 185 Eocal User TId localUlserbID e 4 4 ioc tii retro aet e apre e rt etre eo rever tens n a Pee 185 Remote User Id remoteUserID a n eter e eroe erbe abeo e PEL este Le eaa Lee urea RE 186 ocal Creu TD local Cra its LU M e uL ie ned 186 Remote Cirouit ID remoteC cuit idea 186 Alarm Information 2 9 eite re ee ia is 186 Clear Slot Alarms tesetStatis ii iii 186 Hardware Restrlres cita ia a iia 186 Card Lost Indication cardLostIndication 2 2 nada encina inet etii iere 186 Line Down Indication lineDownIndication sss 186 168 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Introduction This chapter describes managing a Model 2707RC NetLink G 703 network termination unit NTU using the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS internal HTTP HTML web engine and a standard we
307. rmation describes each column of the modem table Each table heading is a hyperlink to a help page that contains information about the column Card Address nmsSlotID This variable defines the address of the card The Model 1001MC will poll the cards using the addresses listed in the Card Address column If a modem is found with the same address it will be displayed in that row The address of the card is set up using the DIP switches on the card The address is also a hyperlink to the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page This page can be used to set slot specific information about the card Line Status The line status column on each View Rack page shows the current line status of each card Keep in mind that the more cards the 1001MC is managing the longer it will take for the line status field to update Displays the status of the line The following values can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data Modem Information page MIB variables description 102 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management testMode 3 Warnings warningCount This field displays the warnings that are associated with each modem installed in the system When warnings are present this field will be highlighted in yellow and the number of warnings will be listed For more infor mation on the cause of the warning you should view the System Log Warnings will be
308. rms Card Address LineStatus Warnings Errors Local User Id Local ModelCode Remote User Id Remote ModelCo 0 0 E SNMP Mgr Model 1001MC None None 1 0 0 mel None none 0 None none 0 2 linedowntl lo 10 None model2701RC ETH 11 None none 0 T inedownit 0 0 None model2701RC X21 10 None S 4 dataMode 2 ID ILocal model2701RC ETH 11 None none 0 Iz I Figure 66 Modem Information page for the Model 2701RC Starting from the HOME page to access the Modem Information Rack X page for the 2701RC click on the fol lowing links Home menu Configure Cards menu View Rack rack number Figure 67 on page 134 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system For more information about items on the Modem Information Rack X page see Displaying the Slot Configuration Page on page 139 Configuration and management 133 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management View Rack 1 Cad Slot ar 0 K ibd Configuration Configure System Level sn Cards Information Cow Rak 3 mation Rack X System 1 Modem FA w Mode Configuration View Rack 8 System Log Modi Record Information SNMP MIB System Log RAM Hard Reset System Log Flash Figure 67 Web page navigation to Modem Information page E is He 16 E CAJA Login HOME System Log Modify Configuration Next Configuration Configuration and management
309. s In Band Loops the two in band loops are the CSU loop and the V 54 loop disabled 0 neither loop can be enabled enabled 1 one of the in band loops can be enabled depending on the selection of the RDL Type RDL Type csu 1 Selects the in band loop which is initiated as the standard CSU loopback v54 2 functions as defined by the V 54 remote Loopback Test Mode DTE refers to the initiation of loopbacks via one of the DTE signals disabled 0 no loopbacks can be initiated by a DTE signal enabled 1 Loopbacks can be initiated by a DTE signal Refer to section Applying a template on page 164 to activate the template Creating and modifying global configuration templates 162 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Modifying a template This section describes how to modify a global configuration template Patton Electronics HomePage Global Configuration Menu HOME E About 1001MC Create New Configuration Super Taunt Model 1095 Configuration Create Configuration Configure Cards y l Svstem Info Model 2701RC 2707RC Configuration Create Configuration DownLoad Z 2 Seta Eos Modify Configuration SNMP l l l A Sestenr Conf Modify 1095 Configuration None Created Modify Configuration System Vong l Hel Modify 2701RC 2707RC Configuration Example 0 Modify Configuration Delete Configuration Delete Model 1095 Configuration None Created Delete Configuration
310. s 1 to address 13 The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 14 The daisy chained racks are setup in the same manner with 13 addresses being available in a redundant system and 15 addresses being available in single supply system When you disable a rack the addresses are still set aside for that rack space If a power supply is removed the addressing will not change unless you make the change through the 1001MC web pages This allows easy service of the power supplies Introduction to the internal HTTP HTML management pages This section explains how to configure the internal HTTP HTML management pages to manage your Patton NetLink System The system can also be managed by using an SNMP Network Management Station using a standard SNMP software package or MIB walking tool Logging into the HTTP HTML administration pages To log into the HTTP HTML administration pages you must enter the 4 octet Internet protocol IP address in the format ht1p your server ip address for example http 201 168 15 12 4as the universal resource locator URL into a World Wide Web WWW browser After you enter the IP address the 1001MC will prompt for your user name and password as shown in figure 16 Connect to 209 168 1512 as Nae Password Realm 1001MC L Remember Password Figure 16 1001MC login window The Model 1001MC has two levels of password protection
311. s installed in each rack is entered on the Modem Information page If the system is set for two power supplies installed the 1001MC will automatically set the number of slots available displayed on the Modem Informa tion page in the chassis to 13 If the system is set for a single power supply installed the 1001MC will auto matically set the number of slots available in the chassis to 15 Installing NetLink modem cards 24 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Using this information the Model 1001MC will poll the specified address range in each rack Thus in a single power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from address 1 to address 15 Note The 1001MC is always address 0 The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 16 In a redundant power supply system the address range for rack 1 the rack with the 1001MC installed will be from address 1 to address 13 The 1001MC will then begin polling rack 2 on the daisy chain port starting from address 14 The daisy chained racks are set up in the same manner with 13 addresses being available in a redundant system and 15 addresses being available in single supply system When you disable a rack the addresses are still set aside for that rack space If a power supply is removed the addressing will not change unless you make the change through the 1001MC web pages This allows eas
312. s 58 Curl S Lo ELI Seer rU EM Ie Wa ae oa A EE 58 PREN tee E 58 Warnings GwarnineC ont e dece T EN IEUL PENNE IE NE EE Eee 59 EOS EAU TOIT DODGE E E T NUT 59 MocalaWser Vdi leealllser Ins eee et ERES E E 59 I acalviodebksoces ocaliviocdel ode e se ete e MM UN 59 Renoir A eme eM CR a ERE tU 59 Remote Model Codeilremiote Mode O ade iaa 59 A essa 60 IE ES H SOT Lae seems cepe e O EE IO 60 Remote Ercilla ad 60 doo 60 Model 1092 Configuration slop pace MD ee edu eU T T EE 61 Model 1092A Model 1092 Configuration slot mmssetlb essere ner E UTI TRU Te e EET 61 Dese Status lime Status ID sonoros PETRO TEE T das 61 Processor Mode processor corr rre ee voter E cots NUT TER UTE eeTe 61 InpusModemodehU92A rc me a eye Ce A E t e GA I 61 Model 1092 Configuration Slot page Configuration Status table description ess 62 Model GodelecalModelGode remoteModelGodg aio 62 DAA E bee NENE 62 S aa T Dee local S 62 TM From DEA ia 62 47 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management HW Test Mode testModeIndiDSL remotetestModeIndiDSL sss 62 SW Test Mode testModeSetiDSL remotetestModeSeti DSL sss 62 Software Rev softVersioniDSL remotesoftversioniDSL asses 63 Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables description eee 63 Card Address nimsslotlI arinrin t retirer at CREE gae 63 Line Status himeS casi SUL ck cds cos errorae eroe etre ctetuer eet eco iae teens eder test
313. s its configuration from the DIP switches on the card Software config 1 The 2701RC gets its configuration via the software configuration and not the DIP switches e Clock Mode this selects the source of the clock used for the Transmit signal on the El channel Please note the difference from Tx Clock Timing described below network CLK 0 derived from the received signal from the network internal CLK 1 driven by the internal oscillator in the 2701RC NTU external CLK 2 provided by DTE External Transmit Clock signal Line Coding the two commonly used types of line coding on El circuits code HDB3 0 most common code AMI 1 primarily in legacy equipment CAS Multi Framing refers to an El circuit which is using bit oriented signaling in the multi frame made of 16 x 256 bit frames Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Creating and modifying global configuration templates 161 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management TxClock Timing this selects the source of the DTE Transmit Clock signal Note that Clock Mode above is for the transmitted El signal external 0 Use only when the Clock Mode is set to external CLK 2 internal 1 Use when the Clock Mode is set to either internal CLK 1 or networtk CLK 0 FP Switch Front Panel disabled 0 disables the toggle switches on the front panel of the 2701RC rack card enabled 1 enables the ability to use the front panel toggle switche
314. sable 1 Line Coding lineCoding3088RC This variable is used to select the G 703 line coding The following options are available code HDB3 0 HDB3 e code AMI 1 AMI Line Build Out lineBuildOut This is used to select the line build out The following options are available e bo 75ohm 0 75 ohm e bo 120ohm 1 120 ohm Model 3088RC Configuration page MIB variables description 207 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Tx Clock Timing txClock The following options are available e external 0 serial transmit data coming from the DTE is clocked in using the DTE provided external clock internal 1 serial transmit data coming from the DTE is clocked in using the DCE provided transmit clock Model 3088RC Configuration page MIB variables description 208 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Software Test Mode testModeSet3088RC This is used to invoke test modes through the NMS Available options are lal 4 Local loopback test rdl 7 Remote loopback test from V54 RDL Response v54Loop The following options are available enabled 1 The unit will respond to a V 54 loop up command e disabled 0 The unit will ignore a V 54 loop up command FP Switches frntSwitch This selects if the front panel toggle switches used for loopbacks and pattern generators are enabled 1 e disabled 0 Slot Configuration page MIB variables description This sec
315. sh Messages syslogElashC leat 4 5 etre mtem te rrt ete teeth bee ee deeds 257 i D 258 SERE M 259 Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 1095RC modems from global modification 259 Protecting a Model 1001 rack from global configuration eere 260 Protecting a Model 1095RC rack card from global configuration eere 262 Creating a tem plate SD 263 enirn cdas ibi in 263 Notes onvclock mode S tanes iia 264 Notes on framing mode Setillps ams isa 264 Illegal configurati n messages dorsal ainia 264 Procedure forscreating a template incor 265 Moditying a templates sisas ede d RU X E Da tai HR ERR N 267 Configuration tales C 267 Notes on clocle mode settings iia paie etii aed 268 Notes n framing mode setulligs nia 268 Mlesalicontisutation messages tandil 268 Procedure for modifying template cir iii iii 269 Deletingia template cnn c 271 Applying a template is dois 271 Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks eere 272 Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in one Model 1001 rack eene 274 Heladio dl ada 275 223 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Introduction This section describes how to navigate the internal HTT
316. shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Power Supply 2 Status rackXPower2Down Displays the current status of power supply 2 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 If the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Clear Rack X Alarms clearAlarms Click on this button to clear alarms for the current rack Note The System Log will still display the errors after the Clear Rack X Alarms button is clicked Note The following information describes each column of the modem table Each table heading is a hyperlink to a help page that contains information about the column Card Address nmsSlotID This variable defines the address of the card The Model 1001MC will poll the cards using the addresses listed in the Card Address column If a modem is found with the same address it will be displayed in that row The address of the card is set up using the DIP switches on the card The address is also a hyperlink to the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page This page can be used to set slot specific information about the card Line Status lineStatus The line status column on each View Rack page
317. sion2 70 RC uenerit ia 149 Configuration Type config Type i2 en tt iii ins 150 Channel Assienment ds EnableCh 1 dsoEnableC H ie rr tree dre 150 Unit Configurauon table cuand aiii 150 Line Formar inem ni aiii ind 150 Glock Mode cloekMode270 R ranr aE TEE EE 150 DTE Rate dteRate270 DR ue A E ete OE e o ee erre E et Ur FE eodeni 150 Line Coding lineCoding270 I RG i52 20 2 nestle toe dere EE A eren ern 150 ORCA Hira tinting EE 151 CAS Mulaframing cas HT 151 Line Build e 0 C Out ds 151 Tx Clock Timing aI T 151 H W Test Mode testModeSetInd iii da iia 151 Software Test Mode test ModeSet2701RG 5 5 anal etii creek tute tasisi eda 152 RDL Reponse vad Loap i35 3 pereo PE RIP Aa 152 EP Switches EEtS witcha miii ta tiara ey Ded euge eo 152 Patrern Select patter Select sti eR le 152 Loop Timeout loop R iia 152 ROL Typed Typo iia pr A it 153 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Config Type config Type de uelim e hee den epe sb dte ees bb ast e doe dire oto naa 153 Test Mode from DTE testModeDTE ui dise ERE EHE 153 Slot Configuration page MIB variables description eene tentent enne enne 153 Card Address nmso9loblb 225 enormi pte tantae tel Pee ERI EROS EUNT 153 Local Model Code localModel Code cuore see tp P edad 153 View Rack X hyperlinki scia doco a reet etude tte reet eH Ep cease O TEE E 153 Card Identification Information
318. sorModeiDSL Displays the status of the processor running on the NetLink iDSL There are four values that are significant to you normal 0 When the processor is in normal 0 mode the NetLink iDSL modem is monitoring itself and sending the status information to the Model 1001MC internalProcessing 1 When the processor is in the internalProcessing 1 mode it is either busy down loading code to the internal DSP or setting the data pump negotiating 2 When the processor is in the negotiating 2 mode the card was just brought online and the NetLink iDSL is setting up the configuration parameters within the Model 1001MC lineDown 3 At startup all of the fields will be highlighted in yellow signifying that they are not verified parameters As the NetLink iDSL sets up the parameters the highlighting disappears signifying that the display matches the set ting of the card Input Mode mode1092A The following settings are available onLine 0 superVisoryModel To make configuration changes to the NetLink iDSL modems you must first set this bit to superVisoryModel When the Input Mode is set to superVisoryModel the Modify Configuration hyperlink will appear on the web page next to the Refresh Current Page hyperlink Select the Modify Configuration hyperlink The Model 1092A Configuration Next Configuration page will appear see section Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration page MIB variables descrip
319. splays the errors that are associated with each modem installed in the system When errors are present this field will be highlighted in red and the number of errors will be listed For more information on the cause of the error you should view the System Log Errors will be highlighted in red in the log The errors for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page Note The System Log will still display the errors even after the number is cleared The error count listed in the Model 1001MC column is the sum of all error s for the system including the individual modems Local User Id localUserID User supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within the Slot Configuration page Local Model Code localModelCode This column displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address The Model Code is also a hyperlink into the configuration page for the NetLink modem and its remote unit The model code information is passed to the Model 1001MC after the card is placed online The Model 1001MC is auto sensing meaning that when a card is found or lost the information will automatically be updated in the sys tem You are not required to setu
320. st Mode oft 2 Apply Test Mode Apply 2701RC Rack Configuration 0 E Apply Configuration Apply 2701RC Test Mode off E Apply Test Mode Rack Protection Mode noma gt Apply Protection Clear Alarms Clear Rack 1 Alarms 2 Use the Rack Protection Mode pop up menu see figure 74 to select protected 1 Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration com mand Creating and modifying global configuration templates 156 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management 3 Click the Apply Protection button The rack is now protected Protecting a selected Model 2701RC rack card from global configuration Do the following to protect a single Model 2701RC rack card l Starting from the HOME page click on the following links Configure Cards View Rack 1 choose the rack you want to protect in the example shown in figure 75 rack 1 was selected Figure 75 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Figure 75 NTU Information Rack 1 page 2 Locate the card address see figure 55 on page 119 of the Model 2701RC you want to protect 3 Set the Protected pop up menu see figure 55 on page 119 to protected 1 Note Setting the Protected option to normal 0 will enable the Model 2701RC to receive new configurations through the global configura tion command Click the Submit but
321. stalled at the specified address View Rack X hyperlink Click on the View Rack X link to display the Modem Information Rack X window see section Modem Infor mation Rack X on page 239 for more information Card Identification Information Local User Id localUserlD User supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Remote User Id remoteUserlD User supplied string that defines the Customer Premise box at the far end of the link The string is stored in non volatile flash within the CP unit If the unit is moved the User ID will move to the new slot making it useful for hardware identification The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Local Circuit ID localCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Slot Configuration page MIB variables description 86 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms resetStatus Selecting this push button erases the a
322. stalled in the rack Total Cards Installed rackXCardslnstalled Displays the number of cards that the system has found Power Supplies Installed rackXPowerSupplies Displays the number of power supplies installed in the rack this value determines the addressing range for the rack Total Errors rackXErrorNumber Displays the number of errors that have been reported by the system for this rack Total Warnings rackXWarningNumber Displays the number of warnings that have been reported by the system for this rack Apply Rack Configuration If you are applying a global configuration to Model 1095RC 2701RC and 2707RC rack cards installed in the rack select the desired template from the pop up menu then click the Apply Configuration button For more information about the system configuration feature including how to protect rack cards from being modified refer to section System Config on page 259 System Level Information 237 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Apply Test Mode If you are going to be running in test mode select one of the following test patterns from the pop up menu then click the Apply Test Mode button off 0 e fivel1 2 511 is the pattern that is used when the pattern generator and detector are turned on fiveller 3 511 with errors is the pattern that is used when the pattern generator and detector are turned on lal 4 Local loopback JalWith511 5 L
323. stem Log Flash 9 lt Model 3088RC management View Rack 1 Cord Slot Address Configuration Modem Infor mation Rack X D Modem Configuration E Local Model Code View Rack 8 Supervisory Submit Query Modify Configuration Next Configuration Figure 96 Web page navigation to Model 3088RC Configuration page Configuration and management 196 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Displaying the Slot Configuration Page The Slot Configuration Page see figure 97 is used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats that slot in the case of errors or warnings Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001MC Import Export Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Log SNMP System Config Help L4 Z e Z w lt c gt e Z o V Q e SLOT CONFIGURATION PAGE Card Address 2 Local Model Code model3088RC 12 View Rack 1 Card Identification Information Local User ID None Remote User ID None Clear Local ID Clear Remote ID Card Identification Information Local Circuit ID Submit Query Clear Local Circuit ID Submit Query Clear Remote Circuit ID Remote Circuit ID Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms Card Lost Indication error 2 vw Figure 97 Slot Configuration Page Starting from the HOME page to access the Slot Configuration page f
324. storage area using the Min Priority for RAM variable in the Syslog Modify page Messages stored here will be lost if the box reboots Patton Electronics Home Page SYSTEM LOG Volatile Memory HOME System Up Time 0 days 0 hrs 27 min 9 sec About 1001MC Time Message Configure Cards System Info 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 2 sec lanWlaninit cc Using stored ethernet settings DownLoad 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 3 sec lanlanconf cRev B PCB System Log 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 3 sec srcWroot c Closing Console Driver SNMP 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 3 sec boxiboxmib c Error Power Supply 1 Down System Config 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 3 sec box boxmib c Error No Cards Enabled Help 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 3 sec boxlboxmib c Enable Rack 1 O days O hrs 0 min 4 sec boxlrack c Card Found Address 01 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 4 sec boxtrack c Card Found Address 02 D days 0 hrs 0 min 6 sec box rack c Card Found Address 08 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 6 sec boxirack c Card Found Address 09 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 11 sec boxlrack c Card Found Address 11 0 days 0 hrs 0 min 51 sec func2701Vunc2701 c Line Up Address 02 D days 0 hrs 0 mm 59 sec func2701 finc2701 c Line Up Address 01 e eu z lt e gt O Zz d M 1001MC Figure 123 System Log Volatile Memory System Log Volatile Memory 256 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference System Log Non Volatile Memory System Log System Non Volatile System Log Log Non Volatile The System Lo
325. t 11 Line Status Processor Mode normal 0 dataMode 2 Previous Card Refresh Current Page Next Card Input Mode onLine 0 y Submit Query Configuration Status static 1 Local Remote Model Code model 1095RC 2 none 0 DTE Rate rate32k 0 rate32k 0 Clock Mode Local Remote internal receiveRecover 0 receiveRecover 2 Respond to RDL request enabled 0 enabled 0 TM from DTE enabled 0 enabled 0 Enable Front Panel Switches enabled 1 enabled 1 HW Test Mode off 1 of SW Test Mode of off 1 Ai Ties ano ann Figure 44 Model 1095 Configuration Slot page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page for the 1095RC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Local_Model_Code for the 1095RC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 44 the 1095RC was installed in slot 11 Figure 45 on page 96 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 95 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management System Level E Modem Infor Information mation Rack X Modem Configuration System Log ail odi System Log RAM System Log Flash Figure 45 Web page navigation to Model 1095 Configuration Slot page Information Hard Reset Making configuration changes to your 1095RC Netlink modem Do use t
326. t beginning with box1box c Error the web page error counter will be incremented and an SNMP trap message will be sent CRCA Error crc4Error Displays the number of CRC4 errors received by the El interface This is an error counter that records word errors in the CRC4 The counter is disabled during loss of sync This number is accumulating in the 1001MC Note Alarm counters severity level is controlled by the Line Down Indica tiom level The following options are available none Only Syslog message will be sent warning Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Warning and web page warning counter will be incremented error Syslog message will be sent beginning with box box c Error the web page error counter will be incremented and an SNMP trap message will be sent The Clear Counter button This button clears all alarm counters Model 2701RC Configuration Slot X page MIB variables description 145 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management CRC4 Error Alarm Threshold crc4Threshold The valid setting for the threshold is 0 to 255 By setting a threshold the CRC4 Alarm counter will not issue the error warning Syslog and SNMP Trap message unless the accumulating CRC4 Error Counter is greater than the threshold The Record Current Configuration button will store the setting of the alarm threshold Input Mode mode2701RC The following settings are available onLin
327. t of the 1001 MC go to section Installing the Model 1001MC RS 232 daisy chain port cable Otherwise go to section Setting the address range for your NetLink modems Installing the Model 1001MC RS 232 daisy chain port cable Using the Model 1001MC RS 232 Daisy Chain Port and an EIA 510 cable your Model 1001MC can man age up to seven additional racks Each daisy chained rack must have a Model 1001CC Controller Card installed The Model 1001MC in combination with the Model 1001 CC can control up to 120 NetLink rack card modems and their remote CPE devices This section describes how to connect your Model 1001 MC to additional racks Note Ifyou plan to build your own RS 232 to EIA 561 converter to con nect the Model 1001MC to the Model 1001CC refer to the Model 1001CC manual for EIA 561 interface pinouts Installing the Model 1001MC RS 232 daisy chain port cable 39 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 3 Getting started Model 1001MC Rack 1 10Base T Ethernet port RS 232 to ElA 561 converter Patton Model 12M 561 K RS 232 daisy chain por RJ 45 to RJ 45 8 wire straight through cable RJ 45 to RJ 45 straight through EE cable to AT on Model 1001CC in next rack Figure 15 Configuring a daisy chain network Setting the address range for your NetLink modems The Model 1001MC polls the system looking for NetLink modems If the address of the NetLink modem is not configured or does not
328. ter you have defined the number of power supplies installed in the rack and the rack protection mode click on the Submit button to save the changes Power Supply 1 Status Displays the current status of power supply 1 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 lf the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Power Supply 2 Status Displays the current status of power supply 2 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 If the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Clear Rack X Alarms clearAlarms Click on this button to clear alarms for the current rack Note The System Log will still display the errors after the Clear Rack X Alarms button is clicked Note The following information describes each column of the modem table Each table heading is a hyperlink to a help page that contains information about the column Card Address nmsSlotID This variable defines the address of the card The Model 1001MC will poll the cards using the addresses listed in the Card Address column If a modem is found with the same address it wil
329. tes on framing mode Set nps aida 118 Mlesalconfisuration messages dansa nando 118 Procedure for creating a template ii eds 119 Modine a ternlate a aaa MEA 121 Configuration leon nidad iaa 121 Noteson clock mode settings iia dira 122 Notes on framing mode setings Si soepi eite EP rrt Ir epe e E ee seus t reete epo gas 122 Illegal configuration message acond petet 122 Procedure for m dityine a template nadar 123 Deleting a template TTT 125 Applying template id A 125 Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks attantion 126 Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in one Model 1001 rack eee 128 91 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management Introduction This chapter describes managing a Model 1095RC NetLink mDSL modem using the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS internal HTTP HTML web engine and a standard web browser This chapter is meant to be used in addition to the manual that came with your unit NetLink NMS description Specifically designed for use in the Patton NetLink system when the NetLink mDSL is coupled with the Model 1001MC NetLink NMS and the Patton Model 1001 rack system the modem is fully SNMP manageable SNMP management can be performed on both the local and remote units using a standard SNMP network man agement station NMS or by using a standard web browser and the Model 1001MC s built in web server You can view and change configuration variables
330. the 1095 1095RC Local Clock Mode Local Framing Mode Remote Clock Mode Remote Framing Mode mena External Normal Receive Recover Normal External Slotted Receive Recover Normal External Slotted External Slotted Receive Recover Normal Internal Normal Receive Recover Normal External Normal a Denotes a unit that must have an IM2RC K or IMI K installed Creating and modifying global configuration templates 122 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Procedure for modifying a template 6 Model 1095RC management HOME System Info DownLoad System Log SNMP Help e K z A w m lt x T O Z V Q 2 About 1001 MC Configure Cards Patton Electronics Home Page Global Configuration Menu Create New Configuration Model 1095 Configuration Modify Configuration Modify Configuration CONFIG 1 0 Modify Configuration Delete Configuration Delete Model 1095 Configuration Figure 60 Global Configuration Menu page Do the following to modify a template 1 Select a template from the Modify Configuration pop up menu see figure 58 then click the Modify Con figuration button The Model 1095 Global Configuration window displays see figure 59 Z e zZ a _ ie cm Z e ad V i e Patton Electronics Home Page HOME About 1001MC Configure Cards System Info DownLoad System Loq SNMP System Conf
331. the CP box over the link to the CO Rack Card unit The NetLink mDSL Modem Information page MIB variables description 80 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management rack card will then update the Model 1001MC For this reason this information will not be available until after the link is made between the two modems Protected You can protect individual rack cards from being globally configured by setting the pop up menu from nor mal 0 to protected 1 After you have set the protection option if you are finished making changes to the cur rent rack card click on the Submit button located at the right side of the rack card s row in the table to save the changes Note Setting the protection to normal 0 will enable the rack card to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Note After submitting the protection setting you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Local Circuit ID localCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed within the Configure Cards page or from the Slot Configuration page After clicking the Sub mit Query button to input the string to the management system you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the
332. the G 703 line coding The following options are available code HDB3 0 HDB3 e code AMI 1 AMI Model 2701 Configuration page MIB variables description 150 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management CRC4 Framing crc This variable is used to enable or disable CRC 4 framing The following options are available e disable 0 e enable 1 Note This setting should be the same as the G 703 G 704 network CAS Multiframing casMF This variable is used to enable or disable CAS multiframing The following options are available e disable 0 enable 1 Note This setting should be the same as the G 703 G 704 network Line Build Out lineBuildOut This is used to select the line build out The following options are available bo 75ohm 0 75 ohm e bo 120ohm 1 120 ohm Tx Clock Timing txClock The following options are available e external 0 serial transmit data coming from the DTE is clocked in using the DTE provided external clock internal 1 serial transmit data coming from the DTE is clocked in using the DCE provided transmit clock H W Test Mode testModeSetind This read only variable displays any test mode invoked from the toggle switches and DTE test mode lines If the unit is in a test mode this option will be highlighted in blue off l e pat 2 pate 3 lal 4 Jal Withpat 5 JalWithpate 6 rdl v54 7 rdl v54Withpat 8 rdl v54Withpate 9 rdl csu 10 e rdl csuWit
333. the cards installed in the selected rack These items include model codes user IDs errors and warning and circuit IDs This page also allows you to gain information about the number of cards and power supplies in the rack See section Modem Information Rack X on page 239 for more information Erom this page there are two hyperlinks that can be selected that will give you detailed information about a specific modem These are the Slot Configuration hyperlink shown as the address of the card in the table and the Modem Statistics hyperlink shown as the local model code Slot Configuration The Slot Configuration page enables you to enter information about the modem installed From the page you can change the User IDs Circuit IDs and the Error and Warning Indications From this page you can also clear errors and warning and perform a hardware reset on the modem installed in the rack see section Slot Configuration on page 243 for more information Modem Statistics The Modem Statistics page shows the current configuration and statistical state of the local and remote modem installed at the selected address From this page you can place the card into the superVisoryMode Once the card is in this mode the web page will display a hyperlink that will allow you to enter the Modem Configuration Page Modem Configuration Page The Modem Configuration page allows you to change the configuration of the local and remote modems installed at
334. the remote CDE box see section Displaying the Model 1094 Configuration Slot page on page 72 Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page This page along with the Model 1094 Configura tion Slot page enables you to update configuration of modems installed in the system see Displaying the Model 1094 Configuration Next Configuration page on page 74 Slot Configuration page This page can be used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors or warnings see section Displaying the Model 1094 Configu ration Slot page on page 72 Download page This page is where you can download the latest version of 1001MC and 1094ARC soft ware see section Displaying the Download page on page 77 Note For information about other Model 1001MC pages refer to chapter 10 HTTP HTML web page reference on page 220 Introduction 69 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Displaying the Modem Information page The Modem Information page see figure 28 displays the cards installed in the system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems MODEM INFORMATION RACK 1 Card Display Type flistPopOnly 0 Max Slots Available 13 Number of Power Supplies 2 Submit Query Power Supply 1 Status available 0 Power Supply 2 Status available 0 Clear System Alarms 5 e Model 1094ARC management
335. the selected address This page can also be used to place the cards into test modes Once the configuration has been setup submit the changes then return to the Modem Statistics page to place the modem into the oz Line state Note The configuration changes that are made will not be implemented in the cards until the unit is placed back into the onLine state System Information You can navigate to the System Information page by selecting the hyperlink along the left side of any page The System Information page enables you to setup the IP information box information and password information for the system It is recommended that you change your passwords immediately after installing your Model 1001MC to ensure security for your network see section System Information on page 246 for more information Download The Download page enables you to perform software upgrades on the 1001MC itself and the 1094ARC and 1095RC NetLink rack card modems installed in the system New software can be obtained from Patton Electron ics via a file transfer protocol FTP connection see section Download on page 249 for more information System Log The System Log page displays Syslog messages Syslog messaging is a reporting tool used in the Model 1001MC to log run time operations There are several levels of messages and you can set the system to report only messages above a certain level From this page you can reach the Syslog Modify Modify Volat
336. ting the remote information in the table and Line Status set to datamode 2 e Ifa rack card is installed in the rack without a customer premise unit connected the remote information will be left as either none or highlighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified The following sections define the MIB variables that are shown in the Configuration Status table Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page MIB variables description 181 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Configuration Status configStatus2707RC Displays the configuration status of the rack card The following status can be displayed Negotiating 0 The 1001MC is receiving the rack card s configuration for the first time e Static 1 The 1001MC is showing the updated and correct configuration for the 2707RC ImplementingChanges 2 The 1001MC is updating configuration changes to the 2707RC Model Code localModelCode remoteModelCode These variables display the local and remote models codes for the units that were found in the specified address Line Format lineFormat The following status variable can be displayed unframe G703 0 Sets the line format to G 703 unframed Clock Mode clockMode2707RC This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink E1 modems The following status variables can be dis played network CLK 0 e internal CLK 1 e external CLK 2 DTE rate dteRate2707RC This variable
337. ting will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Clear Rack X Alarms clearAlarms Click on this button to clear alarms for the current rack Note The System Log will still display the errors after the Clear Rack X Alarms button is clicked Note The following information describes each column of the modem table Each table heading is a hyperlink to a help page that contains information about the column Card Address nmsSlotID This variable defines the address of the card The Model 1001MC will poll the cards using the addresses listed in the Card Address column If a modem is found with the same address it will be displayed in that row The address of the card is set up using the DIP switches on the card The address is also a hyperlink to the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page This page can be used to set slot specific information about the card Line Status The line status column on each View Rack page shows the current line status of each card Keep in mind that the more cards the 1001MC is managing the longer it will take for the line status field to update Displays the status of the line The following values can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data Modem Information page MIB variables description 79 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management testMode 3 Warn
338. tion Con figuration page enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 2707RC and the remote CPE box see section Displaying the Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page on page 172 Model 2707RC Configuration Next Configuration page This page along with the Model 2707RC Con figuration Slot page enables you to update configuration of modems installed in the system see Display ing the Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page on page 174 Slot Configuration page This page can be used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors or warnings see section Displaying the Model 2707RC Con figuration Slot page on page 172 Note For information about other Model 1001MC pages refer to chapter 10 HTTP HTML web page reference on page 220 Introduction 169 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Displaying the Modem Information page The Modem Information page see figure 83 displays the cards installed in the system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems MODEM INFORMATION RACK 1 Card Display Type stPopOnly 0 7 Max Slots Available 13 Number of Power Supplies IB Submit Query Power Supply 1 Status available 0 Power Supply 2 Status available 0 Clear System Alarms 8 Model 2707RC management Remote User Id Local Circuit ID Figure 83 M
339. tion see figure 100 Clicking on the Create Configuration button creates the new template and displays the Model 3088RC Global Configuration window Creating and modifying global configuration templates 214 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Figure 101 is the Unit Configuration section see figure 101 for the configuring E1 link parameters There are 16 configurable parameters What follows is a description of them with the available options for each Valid Configuration Local Remote ratebak 1 Irate64k 1 DTE Rate Clock Mode Local Remote internal receiveRecover 0 Y linternal 0 Tx clock Invert disable v disable 1 v DSL Link Enable disab e l v l disable x Line Probe disable 1 v disable 1 v Annex Type eme Y amexA Front Panel Switches disable 1 Y disable 1 Response to Test Mode disable 1 Y disable 1 Serial Interface Type normal 0 Y normal 0 Figure 101 Unit Configuration section of the web management table DTE Rate Use the dropdown menu to select an available DTE rate e Clock Mode this selects the source of the clock used for the Transmit signal on the El channel Please note the difference from Tx Clock Timing described below network CLK 0 derived from the received signal from the network internal CLK 1 driven by the internal oscillator in the 3088RC NTU extern
340. tion on page 63 for more information After making configuration changes to the NetLink iDSL modems in the Model 1092A Update Configuration page return to this page and place the Input Mode variable back to onLine 0 This will notify the Model 1001MC that the configuration has completed and will cause it to copy the new configuration into the NetLink iDSL Model 1092 Configuration Slot page MIB variables description 61 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management configuration space If this is not done the NetLink iDSL will not recognize the configuration changes that were made Model 1092 Configuration Slot page Configuration Status table description The Configuration Status table shows the configuration for the set of units There are columns for the local and remote units If a field is highlighted in yellow it signifies one of two possible conditions e Ar sarr up the Model 1001MC will display a default configuration for the card and all fields will be high lighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified During the negotiation phase the NetLink iDSL modem will update the configuration in the Model 1001MC with its last set of stored parameters As these fields are updated in the Model 1001MC the yellow highlighting will disappear signi fying that the information has been updated After the local and remote units are linked the units will begin updating the remote information in the table and
341. tion Menu page Deleting a template Do the following to delete a template Note When a template configuration is deleted it cannot be recovered 1 Select a template from the Delete Configuration pop up menu see figure 134 2 Click the Delete Configuration button Applying a template This section describes how to apply a global configuration to all Model 1095RC rack cards other than those that meet one of the following exceptions Model 1095RC rack cards installed in Model 1001 racks that have had the Rack Protection Mode option set to protected 1 will not be configured if a global template is applied see section Protecting a Model 1001 rack from global configuration on page 260 for more information System Config 271 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Model 1095RC rack cards that have had the Protected option set to protected 1 will not be configured if a global template is applied see section Protecting a Model 1095RC rack card from global configuration on page 262 for more information Select the appropriate option from following configuration choices e Globally configure a Model 1095RC rack cards in 4 Model 1001 racks see section Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in all Model 1001 racks on page 272 e Globally configure a Model 1095RC rack card in one Model 1001 rack see section Configure all Model 1095RC rack cards in one Model 1001 rack on page 274
342. tion Rack X page MIB variables description 200 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Protected disableGlobalConfig You can protect individual rack cards from being globally configured by setting the pop up menu from nor mal 0 to protected 1 After you have set the protection option if you are finished making changes to the cur rent rack card click on the Submit button located at the right side of the rack card s row in the table to save the changes Note Setting the protection to zormal 0 will enable the rack card to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Note After submitting the protection setting you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the configuration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information Local Circuit ID localCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC This string can be changed within the Configure Cards page or from the Slot Configuration page After clicking the Sub mit Query button to input the string to the management system you are required to select the Record Current Configuration button on the Model 1001MC button on the Model 1001MC HOME page This will store the information into flash making it available after a re boot or power cycle Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored i
343. tion changes or select the Set Default Configuration button Select the Submit Query button to place the changes into the 1001MC temporary memory If you decide that you do not want your changes implemented you can select the Clear Changes button Select the Back hyperlink to return to the Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page 6 Change the Input Mode back to onLine and select the Submit Query button When the unit returns to the online state the 2707RC will begin implementing the configuration changes Note The variables that you changed are now highlighted in yellow After the 2707RC processes the new information the highlighting will be removed For more information about items on the Model 2707RC Configuration Slot page see Model 2707RC Con figuration Slot page MIB variables description on page 181 Configuration and management 173 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 8 Model 2707RC management Displaying the Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page The Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page see figure 87 enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 2707RC and the remote CPE box When the page displays the unit is set to the onLine state and the current configuration is displayed e Figure 87 Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page Starting from the HOME page to access the Model 2707RC Configuration Configuration page for the 2707RC click on the following links Conf
344. tion describes the MIB variables that are available on the Slot Configuration page From the Modem Infor mation page the address column creates a list of hyperlinks to the Slot Configuration page associated with the spec ified address The Slot Configuration page can be used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors and warning Starting from the HOME page click on the follow ing links Home menu Configure Cards menu View Rack rack number X in the Card Address column Card Address nmsSlotID Displays the address of the card Local Model Code localModelCode Displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address View Rack X hyperlink Click on the View Rack X link to display the Modem Information Rack X window see section Modem Infor mation Rack X on page 239 for more information Card Identification Information Local User Id localUserlD User supplied string that defines the NetLink NTU installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink NTU and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Slot Configuration page MIB variables description 209 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Remote User Id remoteUserlD
345. tion hyperlink will appear Select the Modify Configuration hyperlink The Model 3088RC Configuration page will appear see section Model 3088RC Configuration page MIB variables description on page 206 for more information After making configuration changes to the NetLink E1 NTUs in the Model 3088RC Configuration page return to this page by clicking on the Back hyperlink and place the Input Mode variable back to onLine 0 This will notify the Model 1001MC that the configuration has completed and will cause it to copy the new configuration into the NetLink E1 NTU configuration space If this is not done the NetLink E1 NTU will not recognize the config uration changes that were made Model 3088RC Configuration Slot page Configuration Status table description The Configuration Status table shows the configuration for the set of units There are columns for the local and remote units If a field is highlighted in yellow it signifies one of two possible conditions e Ar sarr up the Model 1001MC will display a default configuration for the card and all fields will be high lighted in yellow notifying you that the information has not been verified During the negotiation phase the NetLink El NTU modem will update the configuration in the Model 1001MC with its last set of stored parameters As these fields are updated in the Model 1001MC the yellow highlighting will disap pear signifying that the information has been updated After the local an
346. to clear alarms on a per rack or system basis Each rack view also contains a View Rack hyperlink to the Modem Informa tion page see section Modem Information Rack X on page 239 for more information The following sections describe the variables contained within the System Level Information page System Overview This section of the System Level Information window see figure 113 on page 232 does the following Displays status information compiled from all Model 1001 racks in the system e Provides several test patterns for use when running diagnostics in system test mode e Enables you to apply global system configurations to Model 1095RC 2701RC and 2707RC rack cards installed in the system Apply System Configuration If you are applying a global configuration to all Model 1095RC 2701RC and 2707RC rack cards in the sys tem select the desired template from the pop up menu then click the Apply Configuration button For more information about the system configuration feature including how to protect rack cards and racks from being modified refer to section System Config on page 259 System Level Information 235 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Apply System Test Mode If you are going to be running in system test mode select one of the following test patterns from the pop up menu then click the Apply Test Mode button Note The Model 2707RC operates only in the local loopback lal 4 mo
347. ton The rack card is now protected Creating and modifying global configuration templates 157 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Creating a template This section describes how to create a global configuration template Patton Electronics HomePage Global Configuration Menu HOME mem e Create New Configuration InportExport Model 1095 Configuration Create Configuration Configure Cards Model 2701RC 2707RC Configuration Create Configuration System Info DownLoad EEE Modify Configuration SNMP T s A Modify 1095 Configuration None Created lt Modify Configuration System Config I lo al Hel Modify 2701RC 2707RC Confguration 0 v Modify Configuration Delete Configuration Delete Model 1095 Configuration None Created Delete Configuration Delete Model 2701RC 2707 RC Configuration 0 Delete Configuration Figure 76 Global Configuration Menu page Note You can create as many as five templates if you need to delete a tem plate to make room for another refer to section Deleting a template on page 164 Do the following to create a template 1 In the Create New Configuration section type a short name 10 characters or less in the text box named Model 2701RC 2707RC Configuration see figure 76 Clicking on the Create Configuration button creates the new template and displays the Model 2701 RC Global Configuration window with two parts Creating
348. tronics suggests that you set your addresses starting with address 1 at the far left of your rack farthest away Installing NetLink modem cards 20 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation from the power supplies and increment the numbers by one as you go from left to right Setting the addresses in this manner will make configuration easier as you start using the web page management An example of this is shown below 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 NMS PS2 PSI Table 3 shows the bit setting to configure the address Table 4 shows examples of address settings Table 3 Bit setting to configure the address S2 7 S2 6 S2 5 S2 4 S2 3 S2 2 S2 1 Lv on o Upper Lower Nibble o O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O N N FF O FF N O N FF O FF O N O FF S O N N O FF FF N ON N ON N OFF N OFF FF ON i FF ON i FF OFF i FF OFF i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B D E F Address in Hex Dec Table 4 Examples of address settings 0x01 1 0x02 2 ON ON ON ON ON OF ON 0x10 16 ON ON OF ON ON ON ON 0x35 53 ON OF OF ON OF ON OFF Installing NetLink modem cards 21 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Hardware setup for a Model 1094ARC The following must be done to configure your Model 1094ARC hardware for use with th
349. tus of the link see table 11 Table 11 Ethernet LED indicators Color Function Description U Green Twisted pair link indication On Connected to active LAN Off Not connected to active LAN TD Yellow Green Transmit data from 1001MC Yellow Idle condition to LAN Green Toggles yellow green with activity RD Yellow Green Receive data at 1001MC from LAN Yellow Idle condition Green Toggles yellow green with activity Power LED indicator The power LED shows the power status of the Model 1001MC see table 12 Table 12 Power LED indicator Function Description Power Green Power status On Power is ON Off Power is OFF Heartbeat LED indicator Table 13 Poll LED indicator LED Color Function Description Poll Yellow Heartbeat Toggles when packet TX is on the backplane bus Fault LED indicator Table 14 Fault LED indicator Function Description Fault Red Fault condition On Signals hardware fault Off No hardware fault PPP LED indicator Note The PPP capability will be included in future releases as a software upgrade to the 1001MC Where to go next Congratulations you have finished installing the Model 1001MC Now go to chapter 3 Getting started on page 36 Where to go next 35 Chapter 3 Getting started Chapter contents Introduction E 37 Booting the TOOIMQ eerte a MU eme I Tet 37 Installing the Mo II MIC YRS 37 idatsy chatmporticdblep vss
350. tus okay about to open data connection 226 Closing data connection Connection closed by remote host There will be a few second delay after the data connection is opened while the file is being transferred then the connected will be closed The 1001MC will automatically install the new software Download 250 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 s HTTP HTML web page reference Patton Electronics Home Page SYSTEM LOG HOME Modify Volatile Memory Non Volatile Memory About 1001MC Trap IP Address 192 168 200 254 Configure Cards SysLog Daemon IP Address 192 168 200 156 System Info Min Priority for SysLog Daemon priontyDisable 1000 DownLoad Min Priority for Flash Storage prioritySystem 80 System Log Min Priority for RAM priontyOddity 40 SNMP Maintain Flash Storage syslogFlashOK 0 System Config Unix Facility disable 0 Help Z z e w E L4 Q Figure 121 System Log System Log System Log System log The System Log page see figure 121 displays an overview of the system logging functions The system log is a messaging system that stores information about the system as it is running The following hyperlinks are avail able for modifying and viewing system log messages System Log Modify This page enables you to modify the system log parameters You can choose which messages will be sent to the available message logging functions see section System Log Modify on
351. ual 1001 racks and 1095RC modems from being globally configured Creating a template see section Creating a template on page 263 Modifying a template see section Modifying a template on page 267 Deleting a template see section Deleting a template on page 271 Applying a template see section Applying a template on page 271 Note Forinformation on configuring and using templates for the Model 2701RC see chapter 7 Model 2701 RC management on page 129 For the Model 2707RC see chapter 8 Model 2707RC manage ment on page 167 Protecting Model 1001 racks and Model 1095RC modems from global modification This section describes how to protect 1001 racks and 1095RC modem cards from being modified when a glo bal modification is applied This is useful if you are setting all but a few cards to the same configuration Select the appropriate option from following configuration choices e Protect a Model 1001 rack see section Protecting a Model 1001 rack from global configuration on page 260 e Protect a Model 1095RC rack card see section Protecting a Model 1095RC rack card from global config uration on page 262 System Config 259 Model 1001MC Operations Guide Protecting a Model 1001 rack from global configuration Do the following to protect a Model 1001 rack 1 10 HTTP HTML web page reference Starting from the HOME page click on the Configure Cards link to display the System Level Infor
352. ubleshooting and maintenance 8 9 Disconnect from the malfunctioning Model 1001MC and label the 10Base T Ethernet cable and RS 232 configuration daisy chain cable if installed Loosen the captive fasteners located on the front card until it is not longer attached to the rack chassis when that happens remove the malfunctioning Model 1001MC by pulling the card gently but firmly from its slot in the chassis Place the removed card in the container the replacement Model 1001MC came in so you can return the defective Model 1001MC for repair Loosen the captive fasteners located on the rear card until it is not longer attached to the rack chassis then remove the card and place it in the container with the front card Slide the replacement rear I O card into rear chassis slot 14 along the metal guide rails Secure the rear card using the captive fasteners Slide the front rack card into the front chassis slot 14 until it meets the rear card receptacle When that happens push the front card gently bur firmly into the card edge receptacle of the rear card it should click into place Secure the front rack card using the captive fasteners Verify that the green POWER LED on the Model 1001MC front card illuminates 10 Verify that the LI LED is lit indicating that the Ethernet connection is nominal The Model 1001MC is operational Maintenance 285 Chapter 12 Contacting Patton for assistance Chapter contents A VI IONES 287 C
353. uide 3 Getting started Where to go next Refer to the following chapters as appropriate to manage the modem rack cards installed in your Model 1001 rack chassis e Chapter 4 Model 1092ARC management on page 47 e Chapter 5 Model 1094ARC management on page 67 e Chapter 6 Model 1095RC management on page 89 e Chapter 7 Model 2701RC management on page 129 e Chapter 8 Model 2707RC management on page 167 e Chapter 9 Model 3088RC management on page 187 For more detailed information about Model 1001MC management web pages refer to chapter 10 HTTP HTML web page reference on page 220 Where to go next 46 Chapter 4 Model 1092ARC management Chapter contents ntrod ctiot e ee OTTONIS Hee rece rec eee eee eco 49 NM descriptione eere IM MITTIT 49 A vehe eet E ET de TNT E 49 Displaying theyNiodenulmronmauom paccere e o ODE STUDUIT RU ee 50 Displaying the Model 1092 Configuration STER 52 Making configuration changes to your 1092 AR Netlink modem eee SS Displaying the Model 1092 Configuration Next Configuration DE 54 A eee E E NUT EE HEU EEE EE ETE TETTE eee ery eeee 56 Modem Information page MIB variablesideschiption emt ee EU ERUNT 57 SSA coco 57 Modems TTS EITS arde 57 Number o Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies morrer eean e e e E E 57 SI TR Te A ERE 57 Submit Dutton eee E E E EE E E E E O Oo 58 INT e TT E T E E tes 58 Power Supply T ted e eee eR E Terra 58 TE eec e ENSE UU NEN e
354. unique address through the setting of switch S2 Note Standalone units use the address of the rack card that they are con nected to Polling overview The Model 1001MC sends poll messages along the internal bus looking for cards installed in the system Once a card is found it is placed online and communication with the management station can begin If the address of the NetLink modem is not configured or does not match the address range of the rack that it is installed in the Model 1001MC may not recognize the card The address range that is polled is determined by the configuration of the system The system administrator must make sure that the software configuration within the Model 1001MC matches the hardware configuration of the system Polling rack 1 and daisy chained racks The Model 1001MC uses the number of power supplies in the sys tem to determine what the address range of the individual racks will be The number of power supplies installed in each rack is entered on the Modem Information page If the system is set for two power supplies installed the 1001MC will automatically set the number of slots available displayed on the Modem Informa tion page in the chassis to 13 If the system is set for a single power supply installed the 1001MC will auto matically set the number of slots available in the chassis to 15 Using this information the Model 1001MC will poll the specified address range in each rack Thus in a single power
355. ure refer to section System Config on page 259 Modem Information page MIB variables description 57 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 4 Model 1092ARC management Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Submit button After you have defined the number of power supplies installed in the rack and the rack protection mode click on the Submit button to save the changes Power Supply 1 Status Displays the current status of power supply 1 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 lf the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red e notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Power Supply 2 Status Displays the current status of power supply 2 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 lf the status is shown as down it means the 1001MC is unable to detect the power supply This status listing will also be highlighted in red notInstalled 2 The power supply has not been installed Clear Rack X Alarms clearAlarms Click on this button to clear alarms for the current rack Note The System Log will still display the errors after the Clear Rack X Alarms button is clicked Note The following information describes each column
356. used to set slot specific information related to the system and how the system treats that slot in the case of errors or warnings Patton Electronics Home Page SLOT CONFIGURATION PAGE HOME Card Address 1 About 1001MC Local Model Code model 1094 ARC 1 Confiqure Cards View Rack 1 System Info Card Identification Information E DownLoad mM System Log L TV ID gt 1 E ocal User ID Uecomm JE SNMP 24 system Config Remote User 1D None c Help Clear Local 10 Clear Remote 10 Z Card Identification Information e z a Q Local Circuit ID Uecomm 1 Clear Local Circuit ID e Remote Circuit ID remote test Submit Clear Remote Circuit 1D Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms Hardware Reset Card Lost Indication Line Down Indication 4b gt Figure 34 Slot Configuration page Starting from the HOME page to access the Slot Configuration page for the 1094ARC click on the following links Configure Cards gt View Rack 1 gt Card_Address for the 1094ARC you wish to manage in the example shown in figure 34 the 1094ARC was installed in slot 1 Figure 35 on page 77 shows the web page navigation required to get to this area of the system Configuration and management 76 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 5 e Model 1094ARC management View Rack 1 1001MC Configure Cards Information System Lo System Log z SNMP MIB System Log RAM System Log Flash System Level z M
357. utton unless you have changed the default configuration Point This word means to move the mouse in such a way that the tip of the pointing arrow on the screen ends up resting at the desired location Click Means to quickly press and release the left or right mouse button as instructed in the procedure Make sure you do not move the mouse pointer while clicking a mouse button Double click means to press and release the same mouse button two times quickly Drag This word means to point the arrow and then hold down the left or right mouse but ton as instructed in the procedure as you move the mouse to a new location When you have moved the mouse pointer to the desired location you can release the mouse button Additional References The Patton Electronics website www patton com provides 1001MC and NetLink modem application notes which includes FAQ startup notes and test setups RFCs Use a web browser to find online copies of the following requests for comments RFC documents REC 1643 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet like Interface Types RFC 1155 Structure and Identification of Management Information for TCP IP based Internets RFC 1213 Management Information Base for Network Management of T CP IP based Internets MIB II RFC 1389 RIP Version 2 MIB Extension RFC 1643 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet like Interface Types Technical support Patton Electronics of
358. utton will place the default configuration into the Next Configuration table Slot Configuration page MIB variables description This section describes the MIB variables that are available on the Slot Configuration page From the Modem Information page the address column creates a list of hyperlinks to the Slot Configuration page associated with the specified address The Slot Configuration page can be used to set slot specific information related to the sys tem and how the system treats the slot in the case of errors and warning Note The information contained here is also available in the Model 1001MC manual and is listed here for ease of use Card Address nmsSlotID Displays the address of the card Local Model Code localModelCode Displays the model code of the NetLink modem installed at the specified address View Rack X hyperlink Click on the View Rack X link to display the Modem Information Rack X window see section Modem Infor mation Rack X on page 239 for more information Card Identification Information Local User Id localUserlD User supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem and is useful for hardware identification If the address of the modem is changed the User ID will move to the new slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Remote User Id remoteUserlD User sup
359. vailable in the rack Modems Installed rackXCardsInstalled Displays the number of modem cards installed in the rack that the system has found Number of Power Supplies rackXPowerSupplies This is where you specify the number of power supplies installed in the rack this value determines the addressing range for the rack In the case of a redundant power supply system you should set this variable to 2 this will inform the Model 1001MC that there should be 2 power supplies in the system Rack Protection Mode rackXProtected If you want to protect all Model 2701RC rack cards installed in the current rack from being globally config ured select protected 1 from the drop down menu then click the Submit button For more information about the system configuration feature refer to section System Config on page 259 Modem Information Rack X page MIB variables description 140 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 7 Model 2701RC management Note Setting the Rack Protection Mode to normal 0 will enable the rack to receive new configurations through the global configuration command Submit button After you have defined the number of power supplies installed in the rack and the rack protection mode click on the Submit button to save the changes Power Supply 1 Status rackXPower Down Displays the current status of power supply 1 as one of the following e available 0 The power supply is working normally e down 1 lf the status is
360. values can be displayed e startup 1 e dataMode 2 When the line status is dataMode 2 the units are linked up and ready to send data testMode 3 Warnings warningCount Displays the warnings that are associated with each modem installed in the system When warnings are present this field will be highlighted in yellow and the number of warnings will be listed For more information on the cause of the warning you should view the System Log Warnings will be highlighted in yellow in the log The warnings for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page see section Slot Configuration on page 243 for more information Note The System Log will still display the warnings even after the number is cleared Errors errorCount Displays the errors that are associated with each modem installed in the system When errors are present this field will be highlighted in red and the number of errors will be listed For more information on the cause of the error you should view the System Log Errors will be highlighted in red in the log The errors for the slot can be erased in the Slot Configuration page see section Slot Configuration on page 243 for more information Note The System Log will still display the errors even after the number is cleared Local User Id localUserID User supplied string that defines the NetLink modem installed in the rack The string is stored in non volatile flash within the NetLink modem If the
361. view statistical variables and view error and warning indications Configuration and management This section describes the configuration and management of your NetLink mDSL modems using a Model 1001MC NetLink NMS with built in HTTP HTML web server If you plan to manage your units using a standard network management station you can download the Patton Enterprise MIBs either through the SNMP web page on the Model 1001MC or obtain them from the Patton web site at www patton com The following pages are used to configure and manage the Model 1095RC e Global Configuration Menu page Model 1095RC rack cards can be configured globally by templates you create If you use this capability you have the option to globally configure some or all Model 1095RC modems in multiple racks or those in just one rack see section Displaying the Global Configuration Menu page on page 93 Modem Information page This page displays a list of the cards that are installed in your system and a quick view of any errors or warnings associated with your modems see section Displaying the Modem Informa tion page on page 94 Model 1095 Configuration Slot page This page along with the Model 1095 Configuration Next Config uration page enables you to make configuration changes to the Model 1095RC and the remote CPE box see section Displaying the Model 1095 Configuration Slot page on page 95 Model 1095 Configuration Next Configuration page
362. w slot The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Remote User Id remoteUserlD User supplied string that defines the Customer Premise box at the far end of the link The string is stored in non volatile flash within the CP unit If the unit is moved the User ID will move to the new slot making it Slot Configuration page MIB variables description 110 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 6 Model 1095RC management useful for hardware identification The string can be up to 10 bytes long and can be changed or reset within this page Local Circuit ID localCircuitlD The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Remote Circuit ID remoteCircuitID The circuit ID is a 40 byte string that is stored in non volatile flash within the Model 1001MC Alarm Information Clear Slot Alarms resetStatus Selecting this push button erases the alarms errors and warning associated with the specified slot Note The errors and warning will still be listed in the System Log Hardware Reset resetStatus Selecting this push button will force the associated modem to perform a hardware reset Card Lost Indication cardLostlndication This variable allows you to choose what type of indication will be made if a modem is removed from the man agement system Three choices are available Error Warning None Line Down Indication lineDownlndication This v
363. will not reset the individual cards in the rack only the 1001MC If you would like to perform a hardware reset on the individual cards refer to the Slot Configuration page See section HOME on page 228 for more information About 1001MC The About 1001MC page gives a more in depth overview of the system that presented on the HOME page This page also provides contact information about Patton Electronics See section About 1001MC on page 231 for more information Import Export The Import Export function enables you to make a backup or export copy of the 1001MC racks configura tion parameters By exporting the configurations l the saved files can quickly be loaded or imported into a replacement 1001MC rack greatly speeding up the installation process should a rack need to be replaced Additionally you may have multiple racks requiring the same configuration This simplifies and accelerates the installation Note All actions for Import Export require superuser access privileges IMPORT EXPORT EXPORT CURRENT FLASH CONFIGURATION The current power up settings as stored in the system flash will be dumped to your screen You may then save them in a file using the save as function in your web browser for later import back into the system When performing the save as function make sure that the file is saved in text format Note that the information which is exported is the current hard storage settings NOT the currently
364. y service of the power supplies If the address is 0 all ON position then the unit will run completely from its DIP switch configuration This can be useful for testing circuits independently of the management system If an address is placed on the switch the unit will boot from its stored flash configuration and begin looking for poll commands from the Model 1001MC Switch S1 allows an 8 bit address to be assigned to a link The following rules apply to setting the address Bit S1 8 is the least significant bit A bit set to ON is considered a 0 A bit set to OFF is considered a 1 Patton Electronics suggests that you set your addresses starting with address 1 at the far left of your rack farthest away from the power supplies and increment the numbers by one as you go from left to right Setting the addresses in this manner will make configuration easier as you start using the web page management An example of this is shown below 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 NMS PS2 PSI Installing NetLink modem cards 25 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 2 Hardware installation Table 7 shows the bit setting to configure the address Table 8 shows examples of address settings Table 7 Bit setting to configure the address S1 1 S1 2 1 3 S1 4 Upper Lower Nibble S1 5 GES S1 7 S1 8 0 ON ON ON ON 1 ON ON ON OFF 2 ON ON OFF ON 3 ON ON OFF OFF 4 ON OFF ON ON 5 ON OFF ON OFF 6 ON OFF OFF
365. ync 1 in sync 2 losing sync 3 Software Version softVersion3088RC This read only MIB variable displays the current version of code that is running in the NetLink El rack card modem Model 3088RC Configuration page MIB variables description 206 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 9 e Model 3088RC management Configuration Type configType This displays if the 3088RC is using the DIP switch control or software control for its configuration Unit Configuration table This table shows the configurable MIB variables for the set of units After changes are made select the Submit Query button at the bottom of the table and then place the Input Mode back to onLine 0 in the Model 3088RC Configuration page The following sections explain the MIB variables that are shown in the Unit Configuration table Clock Mode clockMode3088RC This variable defines the clock mode for the NetLink E1 modems The following options are available network CLK 0 e internal CLK 1 external CLK 2 DTE Rate dteRate3088RC This read only variable displays the DTE rate for the link This is the Nx64 kbps data rate selected by the number of activated channels TX Clock Invert tcClockinvert3088RC enable 0 e disable 1 DSL Link Enable dslLinkEnable3088RC enable 0 e disable 1 Line Probe lineProbe3088RC Enables or disables the Line Probe feature to negotiate the optimal rate for current line conditions enable 0 e di
366. ystem log parameters You can choose which messages will be sent to the available message logging functions Daemons Syslog Daemon IP Address syslogDaemonlP The Model 1001MC can send messages over a network to a Syslog Daemon This variable specifies the IP address that will be running the Syslog Daemon Type the IP address into the text box then click the Submit button Note System Log Modify After submitting the change you must click on the Record Current Configuration button located on the HOME page to store the config uration changes into memory see HOME on page 228 for more information 252 Model 1001MC Operations Guide 10 HTTP HTML web page reference SNMP Trap Daemon IP Address syslogTraplP SNMP traps are generated for line down line up card lost power supply 1 fail and power supply 2 fail events The specific trap numbers are as follows Trap Description Specific Trap Number TRAP ID POWER ONE FAIL 1 TRAP ID POWER TWO FAIL TRAP ID CARD LOST TRAP ID LINE UP TRAP ID LINE DOWN Ci A GI db The Trap IP address is assigned on the System Log page If the IP address is assigned SNMP traps will be sent to that IP address For line up and line down traps Line down indication has to be set to error 2 on the Slot Configuration page for each card see section Slot Configuration on page 243 The line up line down and card lost trap messages will include the box name rack number ca

Model 1001MC NetLink™ SNMP Management Card Operations Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Model 1001MC NetLink&trade; SNMP Management Card Operations Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Model 1001MC NetLink™ SNMP Management Card Operations Guide